JP7314591B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

In the island facility of the game hall, a data display is generally provided above each game machine for each game machine. This data display displays various game information such as the number of big wins on the day and the number of variable games from the previous big win to the current variable game.

Here, in the game hall, a hall computer is set, and based on the game information output from the game machine to the hall computer via the external output terminal board of the game machine, the game status such as the number of big wins of the day, the number of variable games from the previous big win to the current variable game, the total number of variable games, etc. are managed. Then, game information relating to the game machine corresponding to the data display is transmitted from the hall computer to the data display, and various types of game information such as the number of big wins on the day and the number of variable games from the previous big win to the current variable game are displayed on the data display.

Also, the game machine transmits a pattern determination signal indicating that the variation game is terminated to the hall computer each time the variation game is terminated, and the hall computer transmits a variation game end signal indicating that the variation game is terminated to the data display each time the pattern determination signal is received. On the other hand, when the variable game end signal is received on the data display, the number of times obtained by adding 1 to the current number of variable games is displayed as the number of variable games from the previous big win to the current variable game. That is, the current number of variable games on the data display is updated each time a variable game is completed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-201706

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game, and to increase the willingness of the player to play the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (fluctuation game) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition judgment;
Signal output means (41) for outputting information game information (symbol determination signal) related to the information game output by the main control means (41) via an output terminal (101);
with
The signal output means (41) is
When the first condition is established, a plurality of the information game information are collectively output as a signal through the output terminal,
When a second condition different from the first condition is established, one of the information game information is output as a signal.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening/closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4; The figure which shows an example of the opening-and-closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. The perspective view of a croon apparatus. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6; A diagram for explaining a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention section, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls entering the special out ball mouth of the crew device, and a specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display section. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 section line of FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10(B) and 10(C) are cross-sectional views along the X3-X3 section line of FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing a display example of numbers on the 7-segment display, and FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of alphabet display on the 7-segment display. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller; The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section of the performance information display device; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 20; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a first pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of FIG. 21; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of a set value changing process executed in the main process of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28; FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display order setting processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35; FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34; FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37; FIG. FIG. 38 shows an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37; FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a set value suggesting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the set value suggesting process of FIG. 40; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a 7-segment display section control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a control example of the segment display section and an update example of the 7-segment display section control information storage area; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of a 7-segment display; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display section control information storage area; FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending addition image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40; FIG. The figure which shows the example of a screen transition in the ending production of a jackpot game. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of setting value suggesting processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display section control process executed in the set value suggesting process of FIG. 48; FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of an ending addition image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display order setting processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51; The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of a sub-timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56; FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56; FIG. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation statuses. The figure which shows the screen transition example in the pattern display part in a standby state. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in the standby state screen transition processing of FIG. 62; The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 64; The figure which shows the lighting/lighting-out example in a lamp display part. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a set value suggesting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display section control information storage area set in a sound lamp control device; It is a figure which shows the example of a screen transition in a round game when a lamp display part is controlled in a jackpot game. The figure which shows the example of a display screen by the ending production of a jackpot game. The figure which shows the other example of a lamp display part. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a variation table used by the main control device of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention in the low frequency support mode and in the high frequency support mode without holding; The figure which shows an example of the fluctuation table used by the main controller at the time of hold|hold in high frequency support mode. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of variation pattern setting processing executed in the variation start processing of FIG. 74; FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used by the sound lamp control device when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37; FIG. 37 shows an example of a jackpot pseudo continuous effect pattern type selection table used in the sound lamp control device when the fluctuation pattern command received in the command determination process of FIG. 37 has a fluctuation display time of 9 seconds and the jackpot lottery lottery result is a jackpot. FIG. 37 shows an example of a failure pseudo-continuous effect pattern type selection table used in the sound lamp control device when the variation pattern command received in the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern. A diagram showing an example of a pseudo-run 3 normal A production pattern. A diagram showing an example of a pseudo run 3-chance A effect pattern. A diagram showing an example of a pseudo-run 2 normal A1 effect pattern. A diagram showing an example of an advance notice effect in the pseudo-run 1 effect pattern. 37. A diagram showing an example of a normal reach effect pattern type selection table used in the sound lamp control device when the variation pattern command received in the command determination process of FIG. 37 has a variation display time of 30 seconds and there is a hold in the high frequency support mode. The figure which shows an example of a normal reach production|presentation pattern. 37. A diagram showing an example of a super reach effect pattern type selection table used in the sound lamp control device when the variation pattern command received in the command determination process of FIG. 37 has a variation display time of 60 seconds and is held in the high frequency support mode. The figure which shows an example of a super reach production|presentation pattern. 37. A diagram showing an example of a special reach effect pattern type selection table used in the sound lamp control device when the variation pattern command received in the command determination process of FIG. 37 has a variation display time of 90 seconds and there is a hold in the high frequency support mode. The figure which shows an example of a special reach production pattern. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of production pattern determination processing executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 37 in the sound ramp control device for gaming machines according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of a straddle pseudo-continuous effect. The figure which shows an example of the notice effect|presentation performed by straddling pseudo-continuous effect|action. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of variation pattern setting processing executed by the main controller of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of production pattern determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device. The figure which shows an example of 2 fluctuation series production|presentation. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a variation table when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode used in the main controller of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention; 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern determination processing executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 37 in the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern determination processing. The figure which shows an example of the look-ahead crossing production|presentation. The figure which shows the progress example of the variable game production|presentation in the high frequency support mode in the conventional gaming machine. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a gaming machine system according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention; The figure which shows an example of the variation table used by a main controller. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed by the main controller. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a variable display time setting process executed in the variable start process of FIG. 104; FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a variable display time setting process executed in the variable start process of FIG. 104; FIG. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a variable display time setting process executed in the variable start process of FIG. 104; FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation pattern command setting processing executed in the variation start processing of FIG. 104; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation stop processing executed in the variation game control processing of FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device; The figure which shows an example of the fluctuation|variation classification table used with a sound ramp control apparatus in high frequency support mode. The figure which shows an example of the fluctuation|variation classification table used with a sound ramp control apparatus in high frequency support mode. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of variation start processing executed by the main controller of the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a fluctuation stopping process executed in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sound lamp control device; The figure which shows an example of the continuous production|presentation in high frequency support mode. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 118; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of variation start processing executed by the main controller of the gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment shall be defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in the gaming hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to an island facility (not shown) of the gaming hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other game machines such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), an arrange ball game machine, and a ball game machine.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the front frame 11 . Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an electric decoration part 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the operation button 20 is pressed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (operated or not operated). The operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button performance or the like executed with the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation acceptance period in the variable game performance executed in the variable game for clearly indicating the lottery result of the big winning lottery to the player.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effects or the like in the variable game effects.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the shooting handle 22, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, and is used to store game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and guide the stored game balls to the game ball shooting mechanism 32 in a state of aligning them in a line. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect of outputting audio. In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the illumination section 27 incorporates a light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and performs lamp effects according to a lighting color and a blinking mode such as lighting or extinguishing.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As shown in FIG. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31 , the game ball shooting mechanism 32 and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 . In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332 . In the game machine 10 , a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, an out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a crew device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being shot from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318.

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 includes a shooting rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The shooting rail 321 is formed from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 . In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 4 , the general winning port 313 , first winning port 314 , second winning port 315 , variable winning port 316 , and out port 318 are formed with openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. On the back side of the game board 31, ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting entry of game balls are provided corresponding to each of the general prize winning port 313, the first prize winning port 314, the second prize winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316. Game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the out port 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and detected by an out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. Also, the variable prize winning port 316 is provided in the right central portion of the game board 31, and a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter. A game ball that has passed through the through portion 316b of the variable winning opening 316 is guided to the crew device 37 by a guide path 316c (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and has an entrance ball sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gate 317. FIG. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board 31 passes through the through gate 317, and the detection of the game ball passing through the through gate 317 is used as a trigger to execute a normal winning lottery to determine whether or not to open the second prize winning port 315.例文帳に追加

The entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a. Detecting the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 316a is hereinafter sometimes referred to as winning. Also, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of shot game balls shot onto the game board 31 by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 .

Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sets a special out ball detection command indicating that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 described later, and transmits this special out ball detection command to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. As a result, the sound ramp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

The entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls by other detection methods.

In addition, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electrical role) 315b for switching whether or not the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. In the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 315, and the electric accessory 315b is closed to restrict the entry of the game ball to the second winning port 315.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 for switching whether or not the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 . On the game board 31, the opening of the opening/closing door 319 enables the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening/closing door 319 restricts the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316.例文帳に追加The open/close door 319 is moved to a position to open the variable winning opening 316 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and otherwise waits at a position to close the variable winning opening 316 . As a result, the game ball 99 launched into the right area of the game board 31 in the round game of the jackpot game can enter the variable winning hole 316 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of attachment portions 319d for rotatably attaching the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. As a result, the opening/closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 when it is in the operating position. A pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a to prevent game balls 99 received by the base 319a from falling from the left and right of the base 319a. Also, the pair of guides 319 c guides the game ball 99 received by the base 319 a to the variable winning opening 316 . A pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. In addition, the variable prize winning port 316 has a through portion 316b for discharging the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The through portion 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The guideway 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 is entered into the variable winning opening 316 and guided to the crew device 37 through the through portion 316b and the guide path 316c. A ball entering sensor 316a is provided in the guideway 316c. As a result, the game ball 99 entered into the variable winning hole 316 is detected when it passes through the penetrating portion 316b and is introduced into the guideway 316c. The ball entering sensor 316 a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 . As a result, the detection result of the entering ball sensor 316 a is input to the main control unit 331 , and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning hole 316 .

In the gaming machine 10, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery when the entry of a game ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Also, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entering ball sensors 313a to 316a, a preset number of winning balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize opening 313 is ten, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315 is three, and the number of prize balls when entering the variable prize opening 316 is ten. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big win, the game machine 10 shifts to a big win game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. When the result of the lottery is winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is a game state including an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed five times until a predetermined time elapses or until game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, 9) enter the variable winning hole 316. The 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state including an open/close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and is a game state more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state because a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Concretely, in the pattern display part 341, various image performances such as variable display performance of decoration patterns according to the lottery result of the big winning lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the entry of the ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 and variable game performance executed with the variable display performance are performed. Also, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the variable display performance of decorative patterns in the pattern display part 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of decorative patterns with numbers '1' to '9' in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the oblique direction. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative designs. In addition, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are 9 types of decorative patterns, ie, "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variable game, after a preset variable display time elapses from the start of the symbol variable display in the symbol display part 341, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed so that the variation of all the decorative symbols is stopped. More specifically, in the variable display of decorative patterns, first, all decorative patterns are changed along a preset variable direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuation of a plurality of decorative patterns is stopped in order. Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the variation of the decorative design on all lines is stopped, the variable display of the decorative design is completed.

When the variable display of the ornamental symbols in the symbol display portion 341 is completed, the symbol display portion 341 displays a state in which the ornamental symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decoration pattern indicates or suggests the lottery result of the big win lottery by the main control unit 331. - 特許庁For example, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``16R probability variable jackpot'' or ``5R normal jackpot'', a state in which decorative patterns of the same type are arranged on the effective line is displayed to clearly indicate the jackpot. In addition, although the jackpot type may be indicated by a combination of decorative symbols on the activated line, it is not necessarily indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', a state in which pattern combinations such as ``777'' set as a pattern combination showing 16R probability variable big win among the decorative patterns are arranged in the effective line is displayed, or a state in which the same decorative pattern combinations other than ``777'' are arranged in the effective line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', a state in which pattern combinations such as ``333'', which are set in advance as a pattern combination indicating 5R probability variable big win, among the decoration patterns are arranged in the effective line is displayed, or a state in which the same decorative pattern combinations other than the pattern combinations indicating 16R probability variable big win or 5R probability variable big win such as ``777'' and ``333'' are lined up in the effective line is displayed. When the lottery result is ``5R normal jackpot'', a state is displayed in which combinations of the same decoration patterns other than the pattern combination indicating the probability variable jackpot such as ``222'' and ``444'', which are set in advance as the pattern combination indicating the normal jackpot among the decoration patterns, are arranged on the effective line. Also, if the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are lined up on the activated line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341, along with the variable display of decorative symbols in the variation game, a variation game effect is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. When the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', when a state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the decoration pattern combination showing the 16R probability variable big win is arranged on the effective line is displayed, a suggestive performance suggesting 5R probability variable big win or 5R normal big win is executed as the variable game performance. In this case, in the big win game effect, promotion effect is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable big win. Similarly, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', when a state in which big winning pattern combinations other than the combination of decorative patterns showing probability variable big winning are arranged on an effective line is displayed, a suggestive performance suggesting 5R normal big winning is executed as variable game performance. In this case, in the jackpot game production, a promotion production or the like is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect and an ending effect.

Also, the game board 31 may be provided with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensors are provided around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316, for example. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316, the fraud can be detected. On the other hand, radio wave sensors are provided around the first prize winning port 314 and the second prize winning port 315, for example. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the entering ball sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entering of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4, the crew device 37 distributes the game balls entered into the variable winning hole 316 to either a normal out ball 378 or a special out ball 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8). Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening/closing door 319, the cloon device 37 and the game ball retention portion 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the cloon device 37, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the croon device 37 is dish-shaped having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371 . The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view, and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and an inclined portion 371c that slopes downward to the left and is provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes the right portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. A special out-ball passage 374 having a special out-ball mouth 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 371a. The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the central portion of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99 . A first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374 . This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention portion 38 . The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375 a and a lower opening 375 b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374 . The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game ball 99 of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention portion 38 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374.

It should be noted that the first guide member 375 can also have a function of retaining the game ball 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 . By the way, in the present embodiment, numbers (specific information) corresponding to non-set values, which are game set values other than set values, which are game set values set in the gaming machine 10, are presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period (see FIG. 9) (the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period). In this embodiment, since the number of segments of the 7-segment display section 39 is seven (excluding the dot points DP), one non-set value can be reliably specified with seven pieces of information. In addition, since the game set values are in six stages from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-set values, so all the non-set values can be specified with 35 pieces of information. That is, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 (predetermined number) pieces of information. Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 is configured so that a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 can be retained during a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the game machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention portion 38 to retain the game balls 99 in a predetermined number or more. In this case, by providing the first guide member 375 with the function of accumulating the game balls 99, the number of game balls 99 that is difficult to be retained only by the game ball retaining portion 38 can be retained using the first guide member 375.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to allow game balls 99 of a prescribed number or more to remain in a specified period, and information necessary to specify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game ball 99 may be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, when it is difficult to retain the game balls 99 in a prescribed number or more not only by giving the game ball retention part 38 but also in the first guide member 375 a function to retain the game balls 99 due to the arrangement of various members, the game balls 99 in a prescribed number or more can be retained by using the special out ball passage 374.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 in a specific period, and there is a possibility that information necessary for specifying all non-set values is presented.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained during a specific period. For example, it is conceivable to set the limit number to the specified number (match the limit number to the specified number). In this case, for example, when the number of information (individual information of specific information) corresponding to the number of balls 99 entering the special out ball 373 is presented, information for specifying all non-set values in one specific period may be presented. In addition, when the number of game balls 99 satisfying a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out ball 373, for example, information corresponding to the number of winnings in the lottery is presented, the information of the expected number corresponding to the probability of winning the lottery is presented, and the expected number of this information is basically smaller than the specified number, so there is a possibility that all the information necessary to specify all the non-set values will not be presented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 in one specific period, and as a result, when the set value is low (when the probability of big win is low), it is possible to prevent the early termination of the game in the game machine 10 during which the player is playing.

As means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period, for example, a configuration is adopted in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention portion 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out ball passage 374, and when the limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, the game balls 99 are positioned near the special out ball opening 373 (by causing ball clogging), thereby reducing the special out ball passage 37. It is conceivable to limit the entry of the game ball 99 to 4. According to such a configuration, it is possible to limit the number of game balls 99 to be retained for a specific period by a simple mechanical configuration without requiring complicated configuration and control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention portion 38 has a retention lane 381 inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right portion (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention portion 38 . The game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 does not enter the various prize winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317 . Therefore, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is treated as an out ball at the time when it is not expected to enter the various prize winning openings 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, at the time when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (at the time when it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom portion 371b constitutes the left portion of the bottom wall 371 and slopes downward toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal out ball mouth 378 is provided in the low bottom portion 371b. The normal passage 376 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 of the low bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 entered through the normal out ball 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out ball 373. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376 . This second guide member 377 gathers the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 to the back side of the game board 31 in the same way as the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318 . The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out-ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out-balls.

The game ball 99 that is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 as described above is guided to the croon device 37 through the guide path 316c. The game ball 99 guided to the croon device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372 . As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 is delayed in the croon device 37 . Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 usually enter an out ball opening 378 by, for example, reducing the kinetic energy and colliding with the peripheral wall 372 of the croon device 37 and other game balls 99. A game ball 99 entering the normal out ball opening 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, some of the game balls moving on the bottom wall 371 change their moving direction due to collision with the periphery of the normal out ball 378 or other game balls, and enter the special out ball 373 . A game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 is released toward the game ball retention portion 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375 .

Here, the ball entry probability that the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 enters the special out ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% or more and 5% or less, preferably 1% or more and 3% or less. In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 per 10R round game is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the probability of entering a ball or the expected number of entering a ball within such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the set value early, and to actually specify the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being finished in the game machine 10 when the set value is specified at an early stage such as when the set value is low, and to prevent the game in the game machine 10 from being finished due to a feeling of boredom due to the inability to specify the set value.

In this embodiment, the special out ball 373 is provided on the high bottom portion 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball 373. Therefore, the special out ball 373 is markedly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball 378. However, in place of or in addition to all or part of these, the game ball 99 is thrown into the special out ball 373 by other means. It is also possible to make it difficult to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide an inhibition means for inhibiting entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball 373 in the peripheral portion of the special out ball 373 . As the obstructing means, for example, an obstacle such as a wall surrounding the special out ball 373 that obstructs the entry of the ball into the special out ball 373, a means for generating a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 around the special out ball 373, and a means for forming an air curtain by blowing air around the special out ball 373 can be considered.

Further, an opening/closing portion for opening/closing the special out ball 373 may be provided, and the opening/closing portion may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball 373 . In this case, the special out ball 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball 378 , and the normal out ball 378 may be formed to have the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out ball 373 .

Also, the distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning opening 316 to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 is not limited to the crew device 37, and other means may be used. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotating member, or a nail driven into the game board 31, the normal out ball 378 and the special out ball 373 may be distributed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retention section 38 receives the game ball 99 entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 and retains the game ball 99 until a specific period elapses. Then, after the specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, are controlled, and numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 before the predetermined period has elapsed. Here, FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention portion, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls entering the special out ball mouth of the crew device, and a specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display portion.

In the following description, referring to FIG. 9, the specific period is defined as the period during which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the predetermined period is defined as the period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and the "specified period" is defined as the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 during the specific period. 39, but the ``specific period'' is not limited to the period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention portion 38, and the ``predetermined period'' is not limited to the period in which the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is cumulatively counted. That is, the "specified period", "predetermined period" and "prescribed period" include at least the periods described below.

As shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B) , the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retaining portion 38 is from the start of the big win game (opening) to the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the big win game (start of the ending), and the specific period is set for each big win game started in a predetermined period. That is, the beginning of the specific period is when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends (when the ending starts). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low-probability mode (when the first hit is a normal jackpot and a one-shot jackpot), the specific period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a variable probability big win is won in the low probability mode (when the first win is a variable probability big win and a series of big wins is started), a period from the start of each big win game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the big win game is set as a specific period for all the big win games executed until the continuous big win by the normal big win game when the normal jackpot is won in the high probability mode. That is, in the jackpot series, a plurality of specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games executed during the jackpot series.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or winning timing, the number corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the croon device 37 in a specific period of one jackpot game, which will be described later. That is, the specified period is set as a period for displaying a number indicating a game set value (a plurality of non-set values) other than the game set value (set value) defining the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the game machine 10 will be a big hit based on the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in the specific period.

Then, when the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one big win game is 7 or more and less than 14, the number specifying the game set value (a plurality of non-set values) other than the game set value (set value) that defines the probability that the lottery result in the big win lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a big win is set according to the display order set in the display order setting process of FIG. One is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 during a certain period of time. In addition, at the ending (specified period) after the specified period of the jackpot game has elapsed, two numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order when the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 in the specified period of one jackpot game is 14 or more and less than 20, and when the number is 21 or more and less than 28, three numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. When the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, and when the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. When the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during a specified period of one big win game is less than 7, not even one number specifying a plurality of non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 in the ending (specified period) after the specified period of the big win game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, 1 to 5 numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values can be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, which will be described later, based on the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in a specific period every time a jackpot game is executed, and the setting values can be specified by displaying the numbers specifying the 5 non-set values. For example, by displaying the number 1 on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 1 is a non-set value, by displaying the number 2 on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 2 is a non-set value, by displaying the number 3 on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 3 is a non-set value, and by displaying the number 4 on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 4 is a non-set value. By displaying the number 5 on the 7-segment display part 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 5 is a non-set value, and by displaying the number 6 on the 7-segment display part 39, it is possible to specify that the game set value 6 is a non-set value. In addition, since five numbers 2 to 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display 39, it can be identified that the non-set values are the game set values 2 to 6, so that the set value can be grasped as the game set value 1. Similarly, by displaying five numbers 1, 3 to 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be understood that the set value is the game set value 2. By displaying five numbers 1, 2, 4 to 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be understood that the set value is the game set value 3. By displaying five numbers 1 to 3, 5, 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be understood that the set value is the game set value 4. , 6 are displayed, it can be grasped that the set value is the game set value 5, and five numbers 1 to 5 are displayed on the 7-segment display part 39, so that the set value can be grasped as the game set value 6.例文帳に追加

Also, it is possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all the segments A to G are to be controlled. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned off, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “1” and “4”. When segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. When segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2", "3", "5" and "6". When the segment B which is the second object to be controlled is turned on, it can be determined to be either "2" or "3", and when the segment B is turned off, it can be determined to be either "5" or "6". Furthermore, it can be recognized as "3" when segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when segment C is turned off. That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G become the control target, becomes the control target. Furthermore, it can be recognized as "6" when segment E, which is the fifth controlled object, is turned on, and can be recognized as "5" when segment E is turned off. That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third control object, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment E, which is the fifth control object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the segment F, which is the sixth control object, is turned on or off. In this embodiment, even if the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 become the object of control, the control for displaying the number of the next priority is not started unless all the segments A to G become the object of control. As a result, in order to specify all non-set values, it is necessary to satisfy more specific conditions than when the control for displaying the next priority number is started at the stage where the numbers corresponding to the non-set values can be grasped. As a result, it is possible to increase the difficulty until all the non-set values are identified, and thus the difficulty of recognizing the set values, thereby preventing the set values from being recognized in a short playing time. Therefore, even when the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the game player from grasping the set value in a short period of time, so that the game time in the game machine 10 can be prevented from being reduced, and the operating rate of the game machine 10 can be suppressed from being lowered.

In addition, when the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number may be started. For example, when the numerical priority is "1"→"2"→"3"→ . By the way, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled, even if the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all the segments A to G are controlled, the control of the segments A to G for displaying the next number to be displayed is not started until after all the segments A to G are controlled. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 before all the segments A to G become control objects, the information for specifying the number already recognized by the player is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 until the display of the next number to be displayed starts. In other words, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and there is concern that the player's interest in the game may decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. On the other hand, when the number indicating the non-set value is grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display part 39 become the control object, if the control for displaying the next priority number is started, the segments A to G that do not contribute to the estimation of the non-set value will not become the control object after one non-set value can be specified. This prevents the loss of interest in the game due to the segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is the point of time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the point of time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game is terminated (timing when the ending of the normal jackpot game is started). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low-probability mode (when the first win is a normal jackpot and a one-shot jackpot), the predetermined period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. That is, in the case of a single-shot jackpot, the predetermined period coincides with the specific period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention portion 38 . In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, when a variable probability big win is won in the low probability mode (when the first win is a variable probability big win and a series of big wins is started), the predetermined period is a period from the start of the variable probability big win game for the first win that triggers the start of the consecutive big wins to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game that triggers the end of the consecutive big wins. That is, in the case of a series of jackpots, the predetermined period does not coincide with the specific period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and a plurality of times are set according to the number of jackpot games started within the predetermined period.

By the way, when the jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot game, or the game is not finished in the middle of the jackpot series. Therefore, by setting a specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retaining portion 38 for each jackpot game, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the specific period ends. A predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering a special out ball opening 373 of a crew device 37 is set from the start of a big win game for a big win in a low probability mode to the end of an open/close execution mode for a big win game for a normal big win, thereby preventing the player from finishing the game before the specified period ends. In the jackpot game, at the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period, the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled based on the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball holding section 38 during the specific period (the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37), thereby displaying information (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-setting values) that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed, and opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot. In the ending after the elapse of, information (all or part of the number corresponding to the non-set value) that can identify or guess the non-set value corresponding to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period is displayed. As a result, even when a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set values other than the set values can be specified or estimated progresses the game, the game is prevented from ending before the timing at which the non-set values can be specified or estimated. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set values can be specified or estimated can specify or estimate the non-set values, and can specify the set values by specifying all the non-set values. In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior of other players who play games aiming at timings at which non-set values can be specified or guessed.

Further, the specific period is set for each jackpot game started in a predetermined period, so that in the consecutive jackpot, the predetermined period is set from the first jackpot to the final jackpot game of the jackpot consecutive jackpots. Therefore, in the continuous jackpot, the predetermined period is longer than in the single hit, and the predetermined period is longer as the number of times the jackpot game is executed increases. As a result, the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is more likely to increase in the consecutive big win than in the single-shot winning, and the possibility of increasing the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 increases as the number of times of the consecutive big win increases. As a result, the player not only obtains a larger expected value of the game value to be acquired as the number of times of jackpot wins increases, but also obtains a large amount of information for specifying or estimating the non-set value, and obtains the benefit of facilitating the estimation or specification of the non-set value and the set value.

The starting time of the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention part 38 may be set during the jackpot game, not only when the jackpot game is started, but also when the opening/closing execution mode is started (the opening of the first hit is finished). Moreover, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that normally shifts after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the open/close execution mode for one jackpot game. Thus, based on the number of specific conditions established when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning hole 316 in the open/close execution mode (based on the number of the game balls 99 passing through the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37), information for specifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period has elapsed. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373, and after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, that is, after the lapse of a specific period, the user can enjoy the game by paying attention to the contents displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 and specifying or estimating the non-set value based on the display contents.

Further, the starting time of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is not limited to the time when the big winning game for the first winning (big winning in the low probability mode) is started, but may be set to the big winning game. Preferably, the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the first win (jackpot in the low probability mode), for example, the jackpot game for the first win (jackpot in the low probability mode) is started (the opening of the first win is finished). Thus, by setting the starting time of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first win, the predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single-shot jackpot or a consecutive jackpot, so that at least one chance of guessing or specifying a non-set value for one first win is guaranteed.

On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends, but may be set during the jackpot game, for example, it is conceivable to set the ending of the jackpot game, typically the ending of the normal jackpot game. Also, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the normal jackpot game ends (the ending with the jackpot ends), or the time when the time-saving mode shifted after the normal jackpot ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the description is based on the premise of a loop variable machine, but in other forms of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and one and two types of mixing machines, setting a predetermined period according to the aspect It is also conceivable. For example, in the V-ST machine, if there is no V prize at the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same way as the normal jackpot of the loop variable machine, and if there is a V prize at the first hit (variable probability jackpot), the start of the first jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode is the start of the predetermined period, and the end of the opening/closing execution mode with no V win or the end of the specified number of jackpot lotteries in the high probability mode is the end of the predetermined period.

Also, the predetermined period may be set to a period during which the variable game is executed (a period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the jackpot game) regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) in which all or part of the specific information (number) indicating the non-set value is displayed, and the period of staying in the normal game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) (period from the end of the time saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), the period of staying in the time saving mode (period from the end of the normal jackpot to the normal game state), the period of staying in the low probability mode (from the end of the normal jackpot to the next jackpot game) period until the technique is started), the period until a predetermined number of jackpot lotteries are received in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until the normal winning lottery is received in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until the predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the general winning opening 313 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until the predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the first winning opening 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. , a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the second winning hole 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are launched onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Moreover, the predetermined period may be set for each variation game. That is, the predetermined period may be set to a period from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols). In this case, the entire period of one variation game may be the predetermined period, or a partial period of one variation game may be the predetermined period. When a partial period of one variable game is set as a predetermined period, the predetermined period includes a period from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the decorative patterns reach the ready-to-win state, a period from the start of the variable display of decorative patterns to the start of development performance such as special ready-to-win performance, a period from the ready-to-reach state to the start of the development performance, a period from the ready-to-reach state to the end of the development performance, and a period during which the development performance is executed.

By setting a predetermined period in the period in which the variable game is executed in this way, it is possible to specify or estimate the non-set value and recognize or estimate the set value even in a period other than the period in which the big win game is executed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) during the period in which the variable game is executed.

Then, when the predetermined period is set to the period during which the variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the cloon device 37 is a position (for example, the left area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning opening 314) to distribute the game ball 99 to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 when the game ball 99 hit to the left area of the game board 31 is hit left. ) can also be considered. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special hit (right hit that hits the game ball 99 to the right side area of the game board 31). As a result, it is possible to enjoy specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) while progressing the game as usual without lowering the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314.例文帳に追加

Also, depending on the type of specific condition, it is conceivable to set the start time of the predetermined period when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Also, depending on the type of specific condition, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The specific condition is that the game ball 99 distributed by the distribution means such as the crew device 37 in a predetermined period is entered in the special out ball mouth 373 instead of the special out ball mouth 373. The game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball mouth 373, for example, the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 enters various winning holes 313 to 316.

In addition, the game balls 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314 or passing through the through gate 317 may be guided to a sorting means such as a crew device 37, and the specific condition may be that the game balls 99 sorted by the sorting means enter the special out ball hole 373.例文帳に追加In this case as well, it is possible to enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without performing a special launch.

Also, the specific condition may be the occurrence of a specific event that can occur in the progress of the game. The particular event in this case may be either favorable or unfavorable to the player. If the specific event is advantageous to the player, the player can obtain all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) in addition to the privilege obtained by the occurrence of the specific event. On the other hand, if the specific event is disadvantageous to the player, the player can obtain all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. Specific events include, for example, winning a jackpot a predetermined number of times (including once) or more (a jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (including one) or more), winning a variable or normal jackpot a predetermined number of times (including one) or more (running a variable or normal jackpot game a predetermined number of times (including one) or more), reaching a number of consecutive jackpots exceeding a predetermined number of times (winning a variable probability jackpot a predetermined number of times or more in a row until a normal jackpot is won), It is conceivable that the number of jackpot lotteries until winning the jackpot reaches a predetermined number or more, or that the number of game balls 99 exceeding the upper limit number (over prize winning) occurs in the round game in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game.

Further, the specific event may be execution of a specific effect preset in a variation game or a jackpot game. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, for example, it may be set to any of non-reach effect and ready-to-win effect, and may be set to any of opening effect, round game effect and ending effect. Typically, the specific performance includes a premium performance in which a big win or a variable probability big win is confirmed among variable game performances, and a performance that indicates that a holding series is executed after the end of the big win game in the big win game (the holding at a specific time of the big win game such as the start of the big win game, the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the end of the opening/closing execution mode, or the end of the big win game includes a lottery result that is a big win). Furthermore, as a specific event, it is conceivable that the decorative symbols in the pattern display section 341 are displayed in a specific combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display). For example, in the pattern display part 341, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at ``777'', when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach dot like ``767'', when it is stop-displayed at a specific non-reach-out dot (discrete dot) such as '367', etc., a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) which clearly indicates that the development effect is executed when a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as a reach effect can be considered. As the temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development performance is to be executed, it is conceivable that the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in the ready-to-win state, such as "7 development 7", and the middle pattern, such as "development", is temporarily stopped and displayed to clarify that the development performance is to be executed. The specific condition may also be the occurrence of a specific combination of specific events.

Also, the specific condition may be established in relation to the set value. That is, a set value may be included in a specific condition, and for example, a specific condition may be established when a specific event occurs in a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is defined by the set value, as will be described later. Therefore, the numbers indicating the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a different order depending on the type of specific condition. Thus, the display order can be set for each set value based on, for example, whether the probability of winning a big win is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of numbers indicating a plurality of non-set values for each set value.

In addition, the prescribed period for displaying the specific information indicating the non-set value or part thereof (special information) when the specific condition is satisfied is not limited to the case of being set for each ending of the jackpot game, but may be other timing, and may be set according to the relationship with the predetermined period, the relationship with the specific period, or the relationship with the specific condition. For example, the prescribed period may be only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game typically set to the end of the given period after the lapse of the given period as described in the second embodiment described later, or other than the jackpot game, for example, after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when a predetermined period is set as the execution period of the variable game, the specified period includes, for example, the start of variation of the decorative pattern in the variable game, the temporary stop display timing when the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state, the timing to start the development performance such as the super ready-to-win performance and the special ready-to-win performance, and the execution of the development performance. In other words, it is conceivable to set the prescribed period to the period during which the variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period during which the variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the non-set value along with the result of the big winning lottery. For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is displayed in the pattern display section 341 by displaying the variation of decorative patterns, the pattern display section 341 can be made to display the specific information at the same time. As a result, the player's interest in the variable game can be enhanced by displaying the specific information.

Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 section line in FIG. 8, FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view along the X3-X3 section line in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described later is at the upper limit position, and FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view along the X3-X3 section line in FIG. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 for a specific period, and includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper section 383.

The staying lane 381 receives the game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The stay lane 381 is open at the top and slopes downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a portion of the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). Thereby, it is possible to visually recognize that the game balls 99 are retained in the retention lane 381, and it is possible to visually recognize the number of the retained game balls 99, that is, the number of the game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within a specific period. In addition, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently with resin or the like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 . Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 visible, the number of the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be displayed. The display of the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be, for example, the number of lamps lit up, image display in the symbol display section 341, or the like.

The discharge lane 382 continues to the left end of the staying lane 381, and guides the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 to a predetermined position, for example, a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

A special out-ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382 . This special out ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves through the discharge lane 382 . That is, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within a specific period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and by monitoring the output from the special out ball sensor 384 by the MPU 41, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has moved in the discharge lane 382. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and transmits this special out ball detection command to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls, and controls the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the setting value (see command determination processing in FIG. 37 and setting value suggestion processing in FIG. 40).

As the special out ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Also, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the audio ramp control device 5 . In this case, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 does not set the special out ball detection command, but the sound lamp controller 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384 .

The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is vertically moved between the upper limit position and the lower limit position by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. The upper limit position is a position where the tip portion protrudes upward, and the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 by the stopper portion 383 being at the upper limit position (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip portion does not protrude upward, and the game ball 99 in the staying lane 381 can be discharged via the discharge lane 382 by the stopper portion 383 being at the lower limit position (see FIG. 10(C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position detectable by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

The means for allowing the game balls 99 to stay in the staying lane 381 and for discharging the game balls 99 in the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the vertically movable stopper portion 383, but may be other means such as a stopper portion that can move back and forth, a stopper portion that can rotate between a standing state and a prone state, and the like. Alternatively, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be ejected by canceling the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. Furthermore, by making the retention lane 381 vertically movable, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which the game ball 99 is discharged. For example, the game ball 99 may be retained by waiting in the stay lane 381 at a lower position than the discharge lane 382, and the game ball 99 may be transferred to the discharge lane 382 by moving the stay lane 381 to a higher position than the discharge lane 382.例文帳に追加In addition, the game board 31 may be provided with an opening for discharging the game balls 99 to the back side of the game board 31, and the retention lane 381 may be vertically moved between a position at which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 and a position at which the game balls 99 can be discharged from the opening to the back side of the game board 31. Also, by moving a box-shaped movable body instead of the retention lane 381, it is conceivable that the game ball 99 can be retained in the movable body and the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31.例文帳に追加

Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display portion 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a display example of numbers on the 7-segment display portion, and FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a display example of alphabets on the 7-segment display portion.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the 7-segment display section 39 consists of 7 segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually, and can display at least numbers 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11(B) and at least alphabets A to F as shown in FIG. 11(C). In the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers (specific information) indicating each of a plurality of (five) game set values (non-set values (specific numerical information)) other than the game set values (set values (predetermined numerical information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 from a plurality (six) of game set values (numeric information) corresponding to the jackpot probability (see FIGS. 14A and 14B) that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a big win. is displayed numerically by lighting or extinguishing each of the segments A to G. Specifically, in the 7-segment display section 39, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, segments B and C are lit to display the number 1; when the non-set value is the game set value 2, the segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2; , C, F and G are lit to display the number 4, when the non-set value is the game set value 5, the number 5 is displayed by lighting the segments A, C, D, F and G, and when the non-set value is the game set value 6, the number 6 is displayed by lighting the segments A, C to G. Further, in the present embodiment, the dot point DP is illuminated at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed to clearly indicate that the number corresponding to the non-set value has been displayed.

Also, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values in the 7-segment display section 39 are displayed in the order determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set values are changed (see FIGS. 35 and 36). Also, as will be described later, the control order of turning on or off the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is set (fixed) to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G.

Then, in the 7-segment display unit 39, as will be described later, segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period) are controlled to be turned on and off, and the 7-segment display unit 39 displays a number or a part of the number. Here, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 indicate non-set values other than the set values after the game set values. Therefore, part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 does not indicate game set values, but indicates part of specific information indicating non-set values, and corresponds to special information. In other words, the special information is displayed using part of the plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39. FIG. In this way, not only the number indicating the non-set value but also part of the number (special information) is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39, so that the player can not only specify the non-set value when the number is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39, but also guess the non-set value based on part of the number displayed on the 7-segment display part 39. Therefore, even if the numbers are not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the non-set value can be guessed based on a part of the numbers and enjoyed, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

In the 7-segment display section 39, whether or not each of the segments A to G is to be controlled may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. If it is clearly indicated that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, it becomes easier to guess the set values than when it is not indicated. In this embodiment, since the control order of the segments A to G is fixed, it is not clearly stated that the segments A to G are controlled objects, and a method is adopted that makes it difficult to guess the set values. When clearly indicating to the player that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, for example, by flashing the segment to be controlled, it is possible to indicate to the player that the segment is to be controlled, and to indicate to the player that the segment is to be controlled by lighting the segment in a different color from the lighting of the segment to be controlled.

Further, in the 7-segment display section 39, the information for specifying the non-set value may be displayed in alphabetical characters corresponding to the non-set value. For example, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the letter A is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 2, the alphabet B is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 3, the alphabet C is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 4, the alphabet D is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 5, the alphabet E is displayed, and when the non-set value is the game set value 6, the alphabet F is displayed. (See FIG. 11(C)).

The main display section 36 includes a normal symbol display section 361, a first special symbol display section 362, a second special symbol display section 363, a first reserved number display section 364, and a second reserved number display section 365, which are arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31.

A normal pattern display part 361 includes an LED pair as a normal pattern (normal pattern), and displays the lottery result of the normal pattern winning lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b executed with the winning of the through gate 317 as a trigger, by the combination of turning on and off the LED pair. A main control unit 331 (MPU 41) flashes a pair of LEDs (variably displays a normal pattern) with the winning of a through gate 317 as a trigger, and lights or extinguishes each LED after the lapse of the variable display time to display the result of the lottery per normal pattern.

The first special symbol display part 362 includes a 7-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game executed upon winning a prize in the first winning port 314 by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments in the 7-segment display device. A main control unit 331 (MPU 41) flashes 7 segments of a 7-segment display device (variably displays the first special pattern) with the winning of a prize in a first prize winning port 314 as a trigger, and displays the result of the big winning lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the lapse of the variable display time.

The second special symbol display part 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game to be executed upon winning a prize in the second prize winning port 315 by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the seven segments on the 7-segment display device. A main control unit 331 (MPU 41) flashes 7 segments of a 7-segment display device (variably displays a second special pattern) with the winning of a prize to a second prize winning port 315 as a trigger, and displays the result of the big winning lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the lapse of the variable display time.

The first reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number N of the first special figure of the variable display caused by the winning of the first winning hole 314 by the number of lighting of the four LEDs.

The second reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number M of the second special figure of the variable display caused by the winning of the second winning opening 315 by the number of lighting of the four LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140. As shown in FIG.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 12 , the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7 , a launch control device 8 and a power control device 9 . The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 controls the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 . The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 .

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12 , the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of games in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42 and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. The MPU 41 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . Also, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, an out ball sensor 318a, a special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether a ball enters the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316, and whether the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317, based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 317a. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Furthermore, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a special out ball detection command, and a set value change command to the sound lamp control device 5.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation display time and the lottery result of the big win lottery to the voice lamp control device 5, and includes information on the type of big win when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 of the variation start process in FIG. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The first hold command and the second hold command are, when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, the fluctuation pattern, and the hold number N or hold number M. It is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5. The first pending command and the second pending command are set based on information stored in the pending storage area 412b described later when the pending number N or the pending number M increases (step S1207 or step S1209 of the first pending command setting process in FIG. 22 described later).

The shift command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted when the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M decreases. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 25, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, and is set in the game state transition processing in the main processing of FIG. 23 to be described later when shifting to the jackpot game state. Also, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the start of the jackpot game to the voice lamp control device 5, the voice lamp controller 5 can grasp not only the start of the jackpot game but also the start of the opening by receiving the jackpot game start command. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the sound lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command for starting each round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of round number information indicating what round the round game is, and is set in jackpot game control processing in the main processing of FIG. 23 described later. The sound lamp control device 5 can grasp that the round game start command ends the opening and starts the opening/closing execution mode, but apart from the round game start command, the opening end command may be set at the end of the opening, or the opening/closing execution mode start command may be set at the start of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 .

Round game end command is a command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 to end the corresponding round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, it is set in jackpot game control processing in the main processing of FIG.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 to be described later. The sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control contents of the 7-segment display section 39 .

The set value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the set value has been changed and the changed set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

Commands other than the commands described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41 . Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (eg, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 activates and executes main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, each time the clock signal rises (or falls). The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operating clocks of the main control units in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

A ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41 . For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412, the reservation storage area 412b, and the electrician reservation area 412c to set the big winning lottery and the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when judging the losing type. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 36 and the symbol display section 341. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a normal win random number counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second prize winning port 315 is to be put in the electric role open state, and a normal win initial value counter CIN2 used for initial value setting of the normal win random number counter C4. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reserved storage area 412b comprises a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a big winning lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the type of the variable game that the first special symbol display unit 362 performs variable display and stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol game. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the second special symbol display unit 363 performs variable display and stop display may be referred to as a second special symbol game.

Then, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as win/fail information used in the jackpot lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. Further, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as win/fail information used in the jackpot lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition process of the right/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. The lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variation type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided individually corresponding to each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is stored in either the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for 19 in the variable game executed based on the win/fail information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the win/fail information is stored in the vacant areas in order of priority among the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

Also, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the winning/failure information is stored in the vacant areas in order of priority among the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 are used.

It is also possible to provide a holding area with a maximum holding number of 8 in common to the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315 as another embodiment, and even in this case, it is possible to hold up to eight pieces of win/fail information as a winning history. The processing for storing the win/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

The execution area AE is a storage area used for moving the winning/failure information stored in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the pattern variation display on the main display portion 36 and the pattern display portion 341 is started. Specifically, the right/wrong information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and when the right/wrong information does not exist in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB and the number of reservations storage area NAB is 0, the right/wrong information in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

If the difference between the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the first reservation storage area REA and the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB of the second reservation storage area REB is 2 or more, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the reservation area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the success/failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variation game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on numerical information stored as success/failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the win/fail information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, the win/fail information stored in the third reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the win/fail information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the win/fail information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the first reservation area REB1, the win/fail information stored in the third reservation area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the win/fail information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315.例文帳に追加

The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is set in two types corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is the probability variable gaming state, by the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 411 . Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode.

In the example shown in FIGS. 14(A) and 14(B), as the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, a plurality of success/failure tables with different probabilities (jackpot probabilities) that the lottery result in the big win lottery results in a big win according to the game set value are provided. The low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table each include six success/failure tables corresponding to game set values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the order of game set value 6, game set value 5, game set value 3, game set value 2, and game set value 1, the lottery result in the big lottery has a high jackpot probability and is advantageous to the player.

At the game set value 1, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 821 (0 to 820) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about 1/79.9 (820/65536), which is about four times that in the low-probability mode.

At the game set value 2, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 845 (0 to 844) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is approximately four times that in the low-probability mode, which is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65536).

At the game setting value 3, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 869 (0 to 868) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about 1/75.4 (869/65536), which is about four times that in the low-probability mode.

At the game setting value 4, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 893 (0 to 892) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is approximately four times that in the low-probability mode, which is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65536).

At the game set value 5, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers that make the lottery result of the jackpot lottery a big win is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 917 (0 to 916) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/71.5 (917/65536).

At the game set value 6, among 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery results in a big win is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode success/failure table and 941 (0 to 940) for the high probability mode success/failure table. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/69.6 (941/65536).

Incidentally, if the value of the big win random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning the big win, the result of the big win lottery is lost.

Here, in the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, the lottery result of the big winning lottery between the same game set values has a common random number that makes a big win, but it is conceivable that the random numbers that make a big win are not common. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values, but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

In addition, six low-probability mode success/failure tables and six high-probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to game setting values in six stages, but at least one success/failure table for each mode is sufficient. In other words, the game set values are not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game set values in multiple stages, and to provide one high-probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low probability mode, and not to provide stepwise game setting values for the high probability mode, thereby making the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode may be made uniform, and game setting values of multiple stages may be provided for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of two jackpot types, ie, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of the allocation table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (C), when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers to be the 16R probability variable jackpot is five from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be the 5R normal jackpot is five from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is five of 0 to 4, the number of the fourth random number to be the 16R probability variable jackpot is 10 of 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers of the 5R normal jackpot is five of 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop definite variable machine in which the probability of the definite variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Also, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b), compared to the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode with low opening probability of the electric accessory 315b), the expected value of the game ball obtained when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is set higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a separate distribution table is set for each of the first winning port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning and the second winning port 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the pattern game. In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two type mixing machine, or the like.

Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result of the big winning lottery is ``5R probability variable big winning'', ``16R probability variable big winning'', ``5R normal big winning'' or ``loss'' based on the values of the big winning random number counter C1 and the big winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE.

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which round games are repeated 16 times in the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the machine shifts to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening an electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "5R variable probability big win", "16R probability variable big win" or "5R normal big win".

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state which is a low-probability mode with a low jackpot winning probability and a high-frequency support mode with a high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) continues until the player is notified of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for a predetermined number of times, such as 50 times or 100 times, or ends when the player informs the player that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win before the lapse of the predetermined number of times.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop variable probability machine, after the jackpot game at the time of the variable probability big win, a jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) is executed in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). , the high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also possible to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state in the variable game as another embodiment. It should be noted that, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, it is not shifted to the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types, 5R variable probability jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example.

Also, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outlier types is set according to the outlier type table stored in the outlier type table storage area in the ROM 411, i.e., the front-to-rear out-of-reach reach in which the final stop pattern after the occurrence of the ready-to-win is shifted by one before and after the ready-to-win pattern and stops, the reach other than the front-to-rear out-of-reach in which the final stop pattern stops at a position other than the ready-to-win pattern after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, and the complete loss without the occurrence of the ready-to-win.

Here, FIG. 14D is a diagram showing an example of the exclusion type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (D), the random number value that becomes the front and back reach is 0 to 8, the random number value that becomes the reach other than the front and rear deviation is 9 to 38, and the random number value that becomes complete deviation is 39 to 238. In addition, the MPU 41 judges that reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, a variable game that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the ready-to-win state is a variable state in which a pattern combination of decorative patterns indicating that a big win is likely to occur is shown during the period from the start of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display part 341 to the stop display of the patterns. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the pattern display part 341, a story performance process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, a player participation type operation performance process in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the performance, etc. are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric role product 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. For example, when the electric accessory open counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is possible to win, and when the electric accessory open counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is possible to lose.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. Thus, by determining the variation pattern type, the voice ramp control device 5 determines rough variation game performance types such as high-speed variation performance (basic performance, non-reach performance), normal reach performance, super reach performance, and special reach performance according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or an off variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411 . Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation table and a loss fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, and loss fluctuation table, fluctuation patterns are associated in advance according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the MPU 41 refers to a normal big winning variation table when the lottery result in the big winning lottery is ``5R normal big winning'', to a probability variable big winning variation table when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big winning'' or ``16R probability variable big winning'', and to a loss variation table when the lottery result is ``losing'' to specify the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, one of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Here, when the variation pattern '01' is selected, the normal ready-to-win performance pattern having a variation display time of 30 s is determined as the variation type (performance pattern type) in the sound lamp control device 5, and the normal ready-to-win performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the normal reach production. Further, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super ready-to-win performance pattern with a variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the super ready-to-win performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the super reach production. Further, when the variation pattern '03' is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the special ready-to-win performance pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern), and the special ready-to-win performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the special reach production.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the loss variation table, the correspondence relationship between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined for each stop type at the time of failure (front-rear failure reach, reach other than front-rear failure, complete failure) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front-rear out-of-reach reach or non-rear-end out-of-reach reach, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of deviation is complete deviation, either variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a no-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the non-reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加Further, when the variation pattern '05' is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 10 s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the non-reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern '04', the variation display of the deviation pattern is executed in which the variation display is deviated and stopped at the pattern without an advance notice performance of displaying a character, a message, or the like. In addition, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern '05', the variation display of the deviation pattern is executed in which the variation display is terminated and stopped at the pattern, accompanied by an advance notice performance of displaying a character, a message, or the like. Further, when the variation display at the time of loss corresponding to the variation pattern "05" is performed, a player-participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as an advance notice effect.

Note that the types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B) and 15(C). Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

For example, in the game machine 10, a plurality of kinds of normal ready-to-win performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal ready-to-win performances to be executed in the normal ready-to-win performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern '01', and one of the normal ready-to-win performances selected from them is executed.

Similarly, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of super ready-to-win performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super ready-to-win performances to be executed in the super ready-to-win performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern '02', and one of the super ready-to-win performances selected from them is executed. The super ready-to-win performance is a ready-to-win performance with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win performance, and is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal ready-to-win performance and the probability (expectation) of winning the big win is lower than the special ready-to-win performance.

Further, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of special ready-to-win performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as special ready-to-win performances to be executed in the special ready-to-win performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern '03', and one of the special ready-to-win performances selected from them is executed. The special ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, the normal ready-to-win effect or the super ready-to-win effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

The production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern may include a player-participation type operation production such as an operation production in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production, for example, a single operation production in which a single operation is reflected in the production, a repeated operation production in which the continuous hitting operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production, and a long-press operation production in which the long-pressing operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 363 and the symbol display part 341 of the main display part 36, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result of the big winning lottery is input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is ``5R normal jackpot'', the MPU 41 outputs any one of the variation pattern commands ``A01'' to ``A03'' in which ``A'' indicating 5R normal jackpot is added before the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03''. Further, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', the MPU 41 outputs any one of the variation pattern commands ``B01'' to ``B03'' with ``B'' indicating 5R probability variable big win in front of the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03''. Further, when the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', the MPU 41 outputs any one of the variation pattern commands ``C01'' to ``C03'' with ``C'' indicating 16R probability variable big win in front of the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03''. In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 outputs any one of the variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" with "D" indicating the failure in front of the variation patterns "01" to "05". Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and based on the variation pattern and the lottery result, determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the performance type displayed on the pattern display part 341. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display part 341 to execute the variable display based on the details of the determined variable mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and turns on, blinks or extinguishes the illumination part 27.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 executes a simple process of determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display section 341. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information relating to game history, ball payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d contains, as game information, "number of out balls", "number of balls paid out to general winning opening", "number of balls paid out to first winning opening", "number of discharged balls to second winning opening", "variable number of paid out balls to winning opening", "set value", "base information", "consecutive role ratio information", "character ratio information", "cumulative number of jackpot lotteries", "number of unit jackpot lotteries", "number of jackpots", and " The number of consecutive failures" is stored. Among these pieces of game information, "set value", "base information", "consecutive role ratio information", "player ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery number of times" correspond to game information (performance information) relating to ball output performance.

The "number of out balls" is an integrated value of the number of game balls shot to the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "general winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the general winning hole 313 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "general winning hole payout ball number" is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls according to the winning to the general winning hole 313 in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. .

The "first winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the first winning hole 314 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out to the first winning hole" is a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the first winning hole 314 in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. update to.

"Second winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). The number of balls to be paid out to the second winning port 315 is obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out for this winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the second winning port 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. value.

The “variable winning hole payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning hole payout ball number" is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning when setting the winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls according to the winning to the variable winning hole 316 in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. do.

The "set value" is for selecting the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (determination of success/failure). In other words, the "set value" defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, six levels of setting values (six types of low-probability mode success/failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 14(A)) and high-probability mode success/failure tables (see FIG. 14(B))) are prepared. The "set value" is updated in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

The 'base information' is information on the 'base' which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this 'base' is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the 'general winning port payout ball count' and the 'first winning port payout ball count' to the 'out ball count' in the normal game state. If the "base" is represented by a mathematical formula, it is "base" = 100 x ("number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening" + "number of balls to be paid out to the first winning opening") / "number of out balls". "Base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 28 (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the ``base'' when the latest number of out balls reaches 60,000 is stored as the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the ``base'' when the previous number of out-balls reaches 60,000 is stored as the 60,000-ball base B2 the last time, as ``base information'' in the game information storage area of the RAM 412.例文帳に追加Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the current base BL is calculated (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM412. Also, when the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the "base information" stores the "number of balls paid out to the general winning opening", the "number of balls paid out to the first winning opening" and the "number of out balls" for the base calculation, in addition to the "number of balls paid out to the general winning opening", the "number of balls paid out to the first winning opening" and the "number of out balls".

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000-ball base B1", and "previous 60,000-ball base B2", and the past two 60,000-ball bases are recorded as a history, but the past three or more 60,000-ball bases may be recorded as a history. Further, the "base information" may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall up to the present.

The 'continuous role ratio information' is information on the 'continuous role ratio', which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable winning openings to the total number of balls paid out from all the winning openings (the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316). If the "continuous role ratio" is represented by a formula, it is "continuous role ratio"=100*"variable number of payout balls"/"total number of payout balls". "Continuous role product ratio information" is updated, for example, in specific performance information update processing in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous role ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous role ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. The "continuous role ratio information" may be a continuous role ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous role ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous role ratio and the continuous role ratio over a certain number of periods.

The "character ratio information" is information related to the "character ratio", which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of balls paid out from the second winning opening and the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening to the total number of paid out balls due to the winning of all the winning openings (the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316). Expressing the "role product ratio" as a mathematical formula, "role product ratio"=100×("number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening"+"number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning opening")/"total number of balls to be paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “accessory ratio information” is stored as the accumulated accessory ratio from the installation of the gaming machine 10 in the game hall up to the present. Note that the "accessory ratio information" may be a role ratio for a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, and a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous role product ratio information" may include both the cumulative role product ratio and the role product ratio for a certain number of periods.

The 'cumulative jackpot lottery number' is the number of jackpot lotteries performed in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) from the start of the game machine 10 to the present before the opening of the game hall. In other words, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is also the cumulative variation display count in which symbol variation display of the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 is executed with the winning of the first winning port 314 in the normal game state as a trigger. The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is incremented by one each time the symbol variation display on the main display section 36 is started at step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. 26, which will be described later. In addition, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of jackpot lotteries (the number of times the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display part of the main display part 36 is executed) triggered by the winning of the first winning port 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the ``unit jackpot lottery number'' is the number of variable display times of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display part 362 with an average of 1000 yen (the number of times the jackpot lottery is received) when 250 balls are rented for 1000 yen in the game hall. The "unit jackpot lottery count" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The “unit jackpot lottery count” is updated in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the accumulated unit jackpot lottery count from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. The "number of unit jackpot lotteries" may be for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, or for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "unit jackpot lottery number", both the accumulated unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The "number of big wins" is the number of times the lottery result of the big win lottery has been a big win since the game machine 10 was started before the opening of the game hall. The "number of big hits" is incremented by one each time the game state is shifted to the big win game state in the game state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. Also, the “number of times of big wins” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The ``number of consecutive losses'' is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutively lost in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode), and is cleared to 0 when the lottery result is a jackpot. The "number of consecutive failures" is incremented by 1 if the result of the success/failure determination based on the low-probability mode success/failure table in step S1603 is a loss, and is cleared to 0 times if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, when the pattern variation display on the main display unit 36 is started at step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. 26 described later. In this embodiment, the “number of consecutive losses” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the “number of consecutive failures” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “setting values” stored as game information (performance information) in a game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. FIG. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46 and a ROM 47. FIG. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, which are called 4-digit 7-segment displays. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or may be provided in a game component other than the main control unit 331. Also, it is conceivable to display the “base information” using the first special symbol display portion 362 and/or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 .

The 7-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying numbers "0"-"9" and alphabets "A"-"F". In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when the alphabet "B" is displayed, the dot is lit and displayed as "8." in order to distinguish it from the number "8", and when the alphabet "D" is displayed, the dot is lit and displayed as "0." Also, when displaying any of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is conceivable to light up the dots to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

Of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the performance display monitor 43 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed in abbreviations, and the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation of the current base BL "BL" is displayed as "8." and "L" in the left two seven-segment displays 431 and 432, which are the identification segments, and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" in the two right seven-segment displays 433 and 434, which are the ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3" and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by pressing it, and is provided at a position where it is easy to operate when the inner frame 12 is expanded (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the performance display monitor 43 is enabled to display the base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are de-energized and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided in a place other than the main controller 4 .

Here, FIG. 18A is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000-ball base B1 → the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 → the current base BL are looped in order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. The example shown in FIG. 18(B) indicates that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in FIG. 18(C) indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the 60,000-ball base B2 the last time, and a program for sequentially displaying the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the 60,000-ball base B2 the last time on the performance display monitor 43 at regular intervals are stored in the ROM 47 provided in the main control unit 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Further, a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG.

Further, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous role product ratio information" or "accessory ratio information" in place of or in addition to the "base information".

Also, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the setting value display unit 45 is configured by a 7-segment display to display the above-described setting values for selecting the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, and the performance display monitor 43 may be used to display the setting values.

The setting value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off by pressing, and allows setting values to be changed by rotating when the 7-segment display is powered on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contact by a rotating operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section 45 of the main controller.

As shown in FIG. 19A, when the setting value display unit 45 is in the off state and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized and the setting value display unit 45 displays a number. The number displayed at this time is the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current set value. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the setting value display unit 45 is on, the power supply to the 7-segment display is interrupted and the setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 19(B), when the set value display section 45 is in the lighting state and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed. In the illustrated example, the setting value display portion 45 is rotated clockwise to increase the number displayed on the setting value display portion 45, and the setting value display portion 45 is rotated to the left to decrease the number displayed on the setting value display portion 45. When the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display section 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the setting value. Therefore, when the power of the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value change operation part 46 while the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display part 45, the number displayed immediately before the power is turned off is determined as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 can perform a jackpot lottery based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) or the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) selected in accordance with the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of turning off the set value display unit 45 after rotating the set value change operation unit 46 . For example, a method of determining the setting value by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), a method of turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) repeatedly, and a method of changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key, and then removing the key. Good.

Here, the performance information display device 4A having the set value display section 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. FIG. Also, the control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 . Therefore, the set value display part 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 with respect to the front frame 11, it is possible to select a visible state and a non-visible state from the outside of the game machine 10 (front side of the front frame 11). That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display part 45 cannot be visually recognized, while by opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display part 45 can be visually recognized. Thus, when a player executes a game on the game machine 10, the set value display part 45 is not visually recognized unless the game board 31 is opened, so that the player is prevented from grasping the set value by the number displayed on the set value display part 45.例文帳に追加When the set value display section 45 is in the lit state, the set value change operation section 46 is pressed to turn off the set value display section 45 . Therefore, by keeping the set value display part 45 off during the business hours of the game hall, even if the set value display part 45 is made visible by opening the game board 31 due to jamming of balls in the game machine 10 or the like, the set value can be prevented from being grasped by the player.

On the other hand, the set value display section 45 is turned on by pressing the set value change operation section 46 when it is in the off state, and the number corresponding to the set value is hidden. Therefore, by opening the game board 31 to the front frame 11 and performing a pressing operation on the set value change operation part 46 outside the operating hours of the game hall, the set value display part 45 is turned on, whereby the set value can be confirmed based on the number displayed on the set value display part 45, and furthermore, the set value can be changed by rotating the set value change operation part 46.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to change the setting value outside the business hours by a simple operation while ensuring the secrecy of the setting value during the business hours.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and executes symbol variation display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 based on control signals input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM511 and RAM512 are incorporated in MPU51.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as voices and lamp flashing patterns used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The sound lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4, the command (control signal) is input to the display control device 6, and the display of the pattern display unit 341 is controlled. In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display section 341, the reproduced sound output from the speaker 26, and the flashing mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect, which will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Also, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38, the 7-segment display portion 39, etc. based on the command input from the main control device 4. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 by the MPU 51, a state in which the game ball (special out ball) entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38 and a state in which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 is discharged through the discharge lane 382 are selected. Each segment A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off by the MPU 51 . Moreover, the operation switch 20a is connected to input-output I/F52. Thereby, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 is operated, and based on the detection result, it is possible to control the image game performance executed by the pattern display part 341, the voice output performance that the sound is output from the speaker 26, the lamp performance by the flickering mode of the illumination part 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4 .

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (decorative pattern stop symbol combination (see FIG. 38A), variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 38B)) and production pattern type (see FIGS. 39A to 37C) based on the variation pattern command, and transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 37). ), the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a failure, a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to the failure is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5 to execute the symbol variation display and effect display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 , and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Two-way communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612 . The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to control programs, a ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as variable patterns such as ornamental patterns used in pattern variable display of a pattern display part 341, advance notice performance images, ready-to-win performance images, jackpot performance images, and loss performance images. The images displayed on the pattern display section 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbols. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing variable symbol display and effect display.

A RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61 . Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 .

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 .

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game balls are paid out, and a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Also, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73 . The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball jamming (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed on an island facility together with the game machine 10.例文帳に追加The ball lending device 100 can pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the amount set in advance within the range of the amount stored in the recording medium such as the card inserted in the ball lending device 100 and lend them to the player according to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the game machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 . Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby supplying the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the shooting rail 321. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to shoot the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31 . At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a driving signal. As a result, the game machine 10 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 based on the voltage value input according to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 so that the intensity of shooting the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 increases as the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 increases.

Further, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stopping switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. The shooting control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, and when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 or detects that the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 stops shooting the game ball. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, preventing the game from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 . Further, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with the thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply controller 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drivers, etc., a +5V voltage for logic used in the controller, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8 and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

In addition, the power control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply has been cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it is determined that the power failure state occurs when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. In addition, when the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power failure signal from the power control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 33. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, main timer interrupt processing that is periodically started, and NMI interrupt processing that is executed when a power failure occurs. Note that in the present embodiment, descriptions of start-up processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described. In the start-up process, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 . The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of sensors connected to the main controller 4 and the like. For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball to any of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a is detected. Further, when out balls are detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. Furthermore, when the special out-ball sensor 384 detects a special out-ball sensor 384 , the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command and stores this special out-ball detection command in the RAM 412 .

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes start-up winning processing associated with winning to the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes launch control processing (step S1005). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the shooting control process is a process for validating the shooting of game balls on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the shooting handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping shooting is not operated. The shooting control process is a process of invalidating the shooting of game balls when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes through-gate processing in which a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b of the second prize winning opening 315 based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electricity holding area 412c. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the high-frequency support mode is not set, the MPU 41 judges a normal hit when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0-29, and judges a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is 30-249. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the win is normal when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and judges that the normal winning random number counter C4 is 200 to 249 as a loss. Then, when the MPU 41 determines in the through gate process that the win is normal, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second prize winning port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The starting winning process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314. FIG. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 obtains the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. Store in the first empty reservation area of the fourth reservation area REA4.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the success/failure information before the success/failure information for the first suspension acquired in step S1104 becomes a determination target of the success/failure of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes the first suspension command setting process of setting the first suspension command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second prize winning port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and when it determines that there is no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No), the starting winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 obtains the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. Store in the first empty reservation area of the fourth reservation area REB4.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the propriety information before the validity information for the second suspension acquired in step S1109 becomes a determination target of the propriety of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes the second pending command setting process of setting the second pending command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second pending command setting process is the same as the first pending command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second pending command setting process, the "first pending command" in the first pending command setting process of FIG. 22 can be replaced with the "second pending command", and the "number of pending commands N" can be read as the "number of pending commands M".

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. In addition, the first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or out), the variation pattern and the number of pending N, etc. Information is included. The first pending command setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the pending number N from the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first pending from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is the high-probability mode. If the mode is the high-probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high-probability mode (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether the high-probability mode is set based on a high-probability mode flag that is set to ON when transitioning to the high-probability mode in a game state transition process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described later, and is set to OFF when transitioning from the high-probability mode to another game state such as a jackpot game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the validity determination is executed based on the high-probability mode validity table or the low-probability mode validity table stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 27 described later. Appropriateness determination may be performed by selecting the mode appropriateness table one by one.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, MPU41 reads out the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. For example, when the success/failure information is stored in the third reservation area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 21, the counter value of the big hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 included in the success/failure information stored in the third reservation area REA3 is read. Incidentally, among the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4, the reservation area in which the success/failure information is stored in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 21 can be determined by the value of the reservation number N stored in the reservation number storage area NA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. Thus, since the first pending command includes the pending number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first pending command refers to the pending number N included in the first pending command. By referring to this, it is possible to recognize which of the first pending area REA1 to the fourth pending area REA4 the first pending command corresponds to the correctness information stored.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command (step S1209).

The first pending command set to ON in the first pending command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is erased after being transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to the one described here as long as the sound lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 . In the main process, main control processes for progress of the variation game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 are executed as regular processes with, for example, 4 msec cycles, and the counter update processes of steps S1310 to S1312 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 executes external output processing for transmitting output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. For example, when commands such as a variation pattern command, a first reserve command, a second reserve command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery frequency update command are set in a RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.例文帳に追加Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7 .

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁At this time, in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode), when winning occurs in the general winning port 313 or the first winning port 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls to be paid out from the general winning port or the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. In addition, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning when winning occurs in the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). Further, in the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 updates the number of put-out balls for the variable winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of put-out balls for the current winning when winning occurs in the variable winning opening 316.例文帳に追加

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, MPU41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. Details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. In the variable game control process, the above-described jackpot lottery is executed, and a variation pattern command required for symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result and variation display time of the jackpot lottery in the RAM 412 based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319 so as to execute the round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened by the number corresponding to the result (jackpot type) of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot types are the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot. Also, in the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when each round game is started in the open/close execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when the ending is started.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start processing of FIG. 26 described later. In the game state transition processing, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to a jackpot game state in which an opening/closing execution mode is executed, a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a time saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and the like.

For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state after the variation game for reporting the lottery result is finished. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the big win game is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the big win game state to a predetermined game state according to the lottery result of the big win lottery which triggered the execution of the big win game. In this embodiment, the MPU 41 shifts to the variable probability game state after the end of the big win game when the lottery result of the big win lottery is 5R probability variable big win or 16R probability variable big win, and shifts to the time saving game state after the big win game ends when the lottery result of the big win lottery is 5R normal big win. In addition, when notification of the lottery result for the jackpot lottery of the prescribed number of times is completed in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variation game.

Further, when the transition of the game state is caused, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the game state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the game state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to ON while setting the jackpot game flag to OFF when there is a transition of the game state from the jackpot game state to the probability variation game state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the game state from the variable probability game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot game flag is set to ON.

Furthermore, when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "jackpot count" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.例文帳に追加

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes set value change processing. In this set value change process, a process of controlling display or non-display of the set value or change of the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to the operation of the set value change operation unit 46. FIG. Details of the set value change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the set value change process is executed in the main process, but it is conceivable that it is limited to the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process until the game ball is started to be launched. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the setting value cannot be changed until the power is turned on next time, so that the setting value can be prevented from being changed during the business hours of the game hall.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing in the game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

<Step S1309>
In step S<b>1309 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 . In the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43, processing for displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and each process after S1301 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1310, S1311, and S1312 until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, i.e., during the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process arrives (step S1310: Yes), until it determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
At step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variation game control process]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), it ends the variable game control process, and if it is not in the jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the big winning game is executed is determined based on a big winning game flag which is set to ON when shifting to the big winning game state and set to OFF when shifting from the big winning game state to another game state in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23, for example.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of variation display in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, and when it is determined that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404, and when it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the big win lottery corresponding to the variable game in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (step S1404), and sets the variable display flag to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If it is not during the symbol variation display (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 stores the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the reservation storage area 412b and the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB It determines whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the win/fail information data stored in the reservation storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes variation start processing for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform variation display based on the success/failure information, and terminates the variation game control processing. Details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of data setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. The data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1505, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves the right/fail information from the first pending area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success/failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success/failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 proceeds when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 proceeds when both or one of the number of reservations M and N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. 24 (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the right/fail information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 23). As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and shifts the process to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. The fluctuation start processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is the high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined, for example, based on whether or not the high probability mode flag which is set to ON in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23 is set to ON. If the game state is the high-probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and if the game state is not the high-probability mode (step S1601: No), i.e., if the game state is the low-probability mode, shifts the process to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the big hit random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the success/failure information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the big hit based on the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described later. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/fail information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the low-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27 described later.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the validity determination is executed based on the high-probability mode validity table or the low-probability mode validity table stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 27 described later. The mode validity table may be selected one by one to determine validity.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variable game to the variable display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the normal jackpot, the MPU 41 identifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15A). In addition, MPU41, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variable jackpot, specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variable jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15(B)). Furthermore, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is an error, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the error variation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command including the lottery result of the big winning lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5, and the sound lamp control device 5 executes the pattern variation display by the pattern display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.

As described above, the MPU 41 sets any one of 'A01' to 'A03' in which 'A' indicating 5R normal jackpot is attached to the variation patterns '01' to '03' in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command when the lottery result is 'normal jackpot'. When the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', the MPU 41 sets any one of ``B01'' to ``B03'' in which ``B'' indicating 5R probability variable big win is attached to the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03'' in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', the MPU 41 sets any one of ``C01'' to ``C03'' in which ``C'' indicating 16R probability variable big win is attached to the variation patterns ``01'' to ``03'' in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 sets one of "D01" to "D08", which is the variation pattern "01" to "08" with "D" indicating failure, in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 includes in the variation pattern command information as to whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach, or a complete loss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display section 36, and terminates the variation start process. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the symbols on the main display section 36, the MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to ON. This variable display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variable game control process of FIG. Further, when the symbol variation display of the main display section 36 is started, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412 d set in the RAM 412 . Further, when the result of the success/failure determination based on the low-probability mode success/failure table in step S1603 is a loss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive losses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and clears the "number of consecutive failures" to 0 when the success/failure result is a jackpot.

[Set value change process]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the set value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. The setting value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed, and if the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1701: Yes), the set value change processing is terminated, and if the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702), and if it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the set value change process is terminated, and if it is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display nor the jackpot game state is in effect (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1703), that is, whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been operated to turn on the power of the setting value display unit 45. That is, in this embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the game is in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the setting value is not displayed and the setting value cannot be changed. Here, if the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1704, and if the power of the setting value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power supply of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (step S1704), and causes the set value display unit 45 to display a number indicating the read set value (step S1705). This makes it possible to confirm the current set value. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the setting value display flag indicating that the setting value is being displayed in the setting value display section 45 (step S1706), and ends the setting value changing process.

<Step S1707>
If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that the setting value is being displayed in the setting value display section 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No), i.e., if the power is not turned on while the setting value display unit 45 is turned off, the setting value change processing ends.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the set value has been performed. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709 when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), and shifts the process to step S1711 when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No).

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes processing for changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the set value change operation part 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display part 45 before rotation, and on the contrary, when the set value change operation part 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display part 45 before rotation.

If the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed to "1". Further, when the number displayed on the set value display part 45 is "6", it may be prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the set value display part 45 is "1", it may be prevented from rotating further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number being displayed on the setting value display section 45 as the setting value, and ends the setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the set value change operation part 46 is switched from on to off, the set value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a valid set value. Therefore, by rotating the set value change operation unit 46 to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45, the set value saved in the RAM 412 is changed. By turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the setting value can be determined.

<Step S1711>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been operated to turn off the power of the setting value display unit 45. When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and when the power of the setting value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off (step S1711: No), the setting value change process ends. When the power supply of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), in the set value display unit 45, energization to the 7-segment display is interrupted so that the number indicating the set value is turned off, and the set value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 selects the low probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 14A) and the high probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710, and stores them in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to OFF, and ends the setting value changing process.

Here, in step S1712, a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14A) and a high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14B) are selected according to the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. That is, since the same set value is selected for the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, the setting value can be easily changed. However, the set value in the low-probability mode and the set value in the high-probability mode may be changed separately. In this case, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode can be set to different levels (numerical values), for example, the setting value of the low-probability mode is "1" and the setting value of the high-probability mode is "6".

[Performance information update process]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and determines whether or not the read out number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S1802). If the number of out balls has reached 60000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1805, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60000 (step S1802: No), shifts the process to step S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
When the number of out balls has not reached 60000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads the number of general winning opening payout balls and the number of first winning opening payout balls for base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the current base BL based on the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1801 and the number of general winning opening payout balls and the number of first winning opening payout balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S1803, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804) (see FIG. 29A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100×(the number of balls paid out from the general winning opening + the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening)/the number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
When the number of out balls reaches 60000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805-S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, in the base information, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base two times before (step S1805), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of general winning opening payout balls, the number of first winning opening payout balls and the number of out balls for base calculation, which are stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to 0 (step S1808).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 ends, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performance, updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1809), and ends the specific performance information update process. The specific performance in this case is, for example, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous role ratio, the role ratio, and the like.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main processing of FIG. The display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 of FIG. 31, and when the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the process shifts to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 to be described later. If the B1 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 of FIG. 32, and if the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 of FIG. 33, and when the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the process shifts to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. , “0”, and “0” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 . Then, the MPU 41 turns on the BL display flag (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1910, and if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910), and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "1", "3", and "3" indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 29%. "8.", "1", "2", and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the display control process ends. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), in the performance display monitor 43, energization to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is interrupted, thereby extinguishing the alphabets and numbers indicating the current base BL.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1915), clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), shifts the process to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919), and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "2", "3", and "2" indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% of the previous game is displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3” and “3” indicating 3% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 . Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the predetermined time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1922), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process ends. Incidentally, when the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), in the performance display monitor 43, the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is interrupted, thereby extinguishing the alphabets and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1924), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1925), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. , “0”, and “0” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 . Then, the MPU 41 turns on the BL display flag (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the display control process ends. Incidentally, when the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Yes), in the performance display monitor 43, the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is interrupted, thereby extinguishing the alphabets and numbers indicating the second-last 60,000-ball base B2.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1933), clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), and ends the display control process.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47. FIG.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 . In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when the audio lamp control device 5 is started, NMI interrupt processing during power failure, and the like.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 executes a display order setting process (step S2000), a counter update process (step S2001), a command determination process (step S2002), a variable game effect process (step S2003), a jackpot game effect process (step S2004), and a set value suggestion process (step S2005) in the secondary timer interrupt process.

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to a game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability of the gaming machine 10, and determines and stores (sets) the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, by executing the set value suggesting process in a jackpot game for a predetermined period, five numbers for specifying a plurality (five) of game set values (non-set values) other than the set values are displayed in a predetermined order on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which the five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display order setting processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting processing of FIG. Details of the display order setting process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers specifying the non-set values in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. Also, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the sub timer interrupt process by the starting process of the sound lamp control device, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7 segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described later). That is, in the game machine 10, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period is set when the power is turned on.

By the way, the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the gaming hall opens. Therefore, by setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 with the turning on of the gaming machine 10 as a trigger, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers in the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, so that repeated presentation of the same information in the 7-segment display section 39 and monotonous display of information in the 7-segment display section 39 can be prevented.

Here, if the display order setting flag is ON (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2012, and if the display order setting flag is OFF (step S2011: No), shifts the process to step S2014.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display order setting flag is ON (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the set value change flag is ON (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that the game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is set to ON in step S2121 in the command determination process in FIG. 37 described later. When the setting value change flag is ON (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value change flag to OFF (step S2013), and then shifts the process to step S2014. That is, in the game machine 10, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period is set when the set value is changed. By setting the display order of the numbers in the 7-segment display part 39 when the setting value is changed in this way, the display order of the numbers can be determined according to the setting value, so that the monotonous presentation of information in the 7-segment display part 39 can be prevented.

On the other hand, when the set value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the setting values from the RAM 512, and sets the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 with reference to the setting values and the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) (step S2015). Here, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table, and FIG. 36B is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36A, in the number display order determination table, the number display order is defined by lottery random numbers for each of game set values 1 to 6 (set values 1 to 6) set to define the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. There are 120 lottery random numbers from 0 to 119, each lottery random number is associated with one display order, and each display order has the same selection probability. The display order includes the display order A1 to A120 selected for the setting value 1, the display order B1 to B120 selected for the setting value 2, the display order C1 to C120 selected for the setting value 3, the display order D1 to D120 selected for the setting value 4, the display order E1 to E120 selected for the setting value 5, and the display order F1 to F120 selected for the setting value 6, for each setting value 1 to 6. , 120 display orders corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-set values are set.

The display order A1 to A120 selected when the setting value 1 is selected defines the order of displaying the five numbers "2" to "6" specifying the game setting values (non-set values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" specifying the setting value 1 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when one of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number because the set value is 1, the number "1" specifying the set value 1 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39. - 特許庁

The display order B1 to B120 selected when the setting value 2 is selected defines the order of displaying the setting values "1" and "3" to "6" other than the number "2" specifying the setting value 2, and the five numbers "2" to "6" specifying the setting values 2 to 6 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when the set value is 2 and one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "2" specifying the set value 2 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39. - 特許庁

The display orders C1 to C120 selected when the setting value 3 is selected specify the order of displaying the five numbers "1", "2", "4" to "6" that specify the setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6 other than the number "3" that specifies the setting value 1 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when one of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the set value is 3, the number “3” specifying the set value 3 is not displayed in the 7-segment display section 39.

The display orders D1 to D120 selected when the setting value 4 is selected specify the order of displaying the five numbers "1" to "3", "5", and "6" that specify the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 other than the number "4" that specifies the setting value 4 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when one of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the number “4” specifying the setting value 4 is not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

The display orders E1 to E120 selected when the setting value 5 is selected specify the order of displaying the five numbers "1" to "4" and "6" specifying the setting values 1 to 4 and 6 other than the number "5" specifying the setting value 5 (see FIG. 36(B)). That is, when one of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number “5” specifying the set value 5 is not displayed in the 7-segment display section 39.

The display order F1 to F120 selected when the setting value is 6 defines the order of displaying the five numbers "1" to "5" that specify the setting values 1 to 5 other than the number "6" that specifies the setting value 6 (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the setting value is 6, the number “6” specifying the setting value 6 is not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 .

Then, when the order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to off (step S2016), and ends the display order setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes), the order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10.

Thus, in the game machine 10, the display order of numbers in the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table when the power is turned on, and the display order of the numbers in the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table by changing the set value after the power is turned on. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined order during a predetermined period when a predetermined condition (for example, power-on or setting change) is satisfied. Since the game machine 10 is often turned on before opening the game hall, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display part 39 is set with the turn-on of the power supply of the game machine 10 as an opportunity to set the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display part 39 for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers in the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, so that repeated presentation of the same information in the 7-segment display section 39 and monotonous display of information in the 7-segment display section 39 can be prevented.

In the display order setting process of the present embodiment, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the game machine 10 is turned on and when the set value is changed. Predetermined conditions in this case will be described in a third embodiment described later, but the predetermined conditions include, for example, the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, the start of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game, and the like. Even when the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set by satisfying these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is prevented from being fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display section 39 from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36A, for the same setting value, the probability of selecting all number display orders is the same, but the probability of selecting the number display order does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the number display order determination table may be set such that the probability of selecting at least part of the number display order for the same set value is different from other number display orders. That is, it is conceivable to make a specific display order more likely to be selected and, conversely, to make it more difficult to select a specific display order. By setting the probability that at least a part of the number display order is selected according to the set value to be different from other number display orders, it is possible to facilitate selection of a specific number display order and to make it difficult to select a specific number display order according to the set value. That is, unlike the case where the probability of selecting the display order of all numbers is made the same, it is possible to easily specify the specific non-set values and, conversely, to make it difficult to specify the specific non-set values. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of possibility of a high set value, the degree of possibility of a low set value, and the like. Specifically, for example, when the setting value is a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less), the display order of numbers indicating non-setting values corresponding to a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more) may be delayed. In this case, by leaving the possibility of the high set value to the end when the set value is low, the player is prevented from specifying the low set value at an early stage while making the player feel the expectation of the high set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game in the gaming machine 10 from being terminated early while suppressing the decrease in interest in the game, thereby suppressing the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 . Conversely, when the set value is a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more), the display order of numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to a low set value (for example, a set value of 2 or less) may be delayed. In this case, the number corresponding to the high set value and the number corresponding to the low set value are not displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 until just before the set value is identified as the high set value, leaving the possibility of the low set value until just before the player grasps the high set value. As a result, the player can pay attention to whether the high set value is advantageous to the player or the low set value is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the feeling of excitement right up to the moment when the high set value is detected. It is also conceivable that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game set value among the non-set values is not late, for example, the display order that makes it easy to select the slowest display order, regardless of the set value. In this case, since the number indicating the most unfavorable non-set value for the player is displayed at the end, there remains the possibility of the most disadvantageous non-set value for the player and the non-set value more advantageous to the player until the last number is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the game set value (jackpot probability) is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the early termination of the game in the game machine 10 can be suppressed, and the lowering of the operation rate of the game machine can be suppressed.

Also, it is conceivable to set the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the high set value and the number indicating the non-set values corresponding to the low set value so that the display order of the numbers is later so that it is easy to select. For example, it is conceivable that at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to the low setting value and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to the high setting value are displayed later, so that the number display order is easily selected. In this case as well, the possibility of a high set value advantageous to the player and the possibility of a low set value unfavorable to the player are included until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the player can enjoy the excitement of whether the set value is a high set value or a low set value until just before the player grasps the set value.

Also, except when the set value is the highest set value (the set value is 6), it is conceivable to set the numerical display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values higher than the set value is later so that it is easy to select. For example, it is conceivable to set the selection rate of the display order higher than the priority of the number indicating the non-set value having a higher probability of advantageous determination than the set value than the number indicating the non-set value having a lower probability of advantageous determination than the set value. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values higher than the set values in this way, the player can expect the possibility that the set values are higher than the actual set values just before grasping the set values. As a result, it is possible to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting a high possibility of the set value until just before grasping the set value. Conversely, except for the case where the set value is the lowest set value (the set value is 1), it is conceivable to set the numerical display order in which the display order of the numerals corresponding to the non-set values lower than the set value is delayed so that it is easy to select. For example, it is conceivable to set the priority of numbers indicating non-set values having a lower probability of advantageous judgment than the set value to a higher selection rate of the display order than the numbers indicating non-set values having a higher probability of advantageous judgment than the set value. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values lower than the set values, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game set values lower than the set values are left as non-display numbers immediately before the set values are grasped. As a result, the final set value candidates are the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, since the game set values that are advantageous to the player are grasped as the set values in the end, the pleasure when the set values are grasped is improved.

Also, regardless of the setting value, it is conceivable to set the display order of numbers corresponding to a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more) so that the display order of the numbers is later so that it is easy to select. Conversely, it is conceivable to set the numerical display order in which the numerical display order corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value of 2 or less) is earlier so that it is easy to select. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low set values are displayed earlier, and the numbers corresponding to the high set values are displayed later, so that the higher set values are displayed later. As a result, the player can expect the possibility of a high set value advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the player can enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting the high possibility of the set value.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, effect pattern type counter, variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of decoration symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. Also, the effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In command determination processing (step S2002), a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), it ends the command determination process. Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2101 and is processed, and is stored in, for example, the processing work storage area.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2103, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2102: No), the process proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38A), the variation type table (see FIG. 38B) and the effect type table (see FIGS. 39A to 39C) stored in advance in the ROM 511, and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Moreover, MPU51 sets the big-hit flag according to a big-hit classification to ON, when the information regarding a big-hit classification is contained in a variation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot.

The stop symbol combination of decorative symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop pattern is a decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed first in the pattern display part 341, the second stop pattern is a decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop pattern is a pattern that is stopped and displayed last. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 39A), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 39B), and a special reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 39C).

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decoration symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 38 (A), the decorative patterns are "1" to "9", the pattern combination indicating that "333" is a definite variable jackpot (either the 5R definite variable jackpot or the 16R definite variable jackpot), the pattern combination indicating that "777" is a 16R definite variable jackpot, and the 5R normal jackpot, 5R definite variable jackpot and 16R definite variable jackpot other than "333" and "777". It is premised that it is a symbol combination that indicates that.

When the lottery result is ``5R normal jackpot'', there is no sorting of ``3'' and ``7'' as the first stop patterns, and the first stop patterns are determined with a predetermined probability from decoration patterns other than ``3'' and ``7''. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``7'' is not sorted as the first stop pattern, and the first stop pattern is determined with a predetermined probability from decoration patterns other than ``7''. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stop-displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "333" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', the double symbol combination other than the ``333'' symbol combination whose decorative symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal big win can be stop-displayed. When the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', when decoration patterns other than ``3'' excluding ``7'' are determined as the first stop pattern, the MPU 51 executes 5R probability variable promotion performance for indicating 5R probability variable big win in the jackpot game.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is ``16 probability variable jackpot'', all the decorative patterns ``1'' to ``9'' are sorted, and the first stop pattern is determined from the decorative patterns ``1'' to ``9'' with a predetermined probability. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the "777" symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'', the stop display result of decorative patterns can stop and display the symbol combination other than ``777'' which suggests 5R probability variable big win or 5R normal big win. When the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'' and ``7'' is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes 16R probability variable promotion performance for specifying 16R probability variable big win in the jackpot game.

Then, when the lottery result is a big hit and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stop-displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the game round is determined.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is ``missing'', all of the decorative patterns ``1'' to ``9'' are sorted, and the first stop pattern is determined from the decorative patterns ``1'' to ``9'' with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol based on the failure type selected based on the failure type table (FIG. 14(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol. For example, when the outlier type is front and rear outreach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the out-of-order type is the ready-to-win except for front and back out, the second stop pattern is determined to be the same as the first stop design, and the final stop design is determined to be different from the first stop design and the designs before and after the first stop design. Further, when the above-mentioned loss type is complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Incidentally, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop symbol may be determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol may be determined by the display control device 6.

Also, FIG. 38B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38B, the variation type table defines the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" with a lottery result of "normal jackpot" and a variation pattern of "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30 s" and a variation type of "normal ready-to-win effect pattern". A variation pattern command 'B02' with a lottery result of '5R probability variable jackpot' and a variation pattern of '02' is associated with a variation display time of '60s' and a variation type of 'super ready-to-win performance pattern', and a variation pattern command 'C03' of a lottery result of '16R probability variable jackpot' and a variation pattern of '03' is associated with a variation display time of '90s' and a variation type of 'special ready-to-win performance pattern'. Furthermore, a variation pattern command 'D04' with a lottery result of 'loss' and a variation pattern of '04' is associated with a variation display time of '7s' and a variation type of 'non-ready performance pattern', and a variation pattern command 'D05' with a lottery result of 'loss' and a variation pattern of '05' is associated with a variation display time of '10s' and a variation type of 'non-reach performance pattern'.

Further, FIGS. 39(A) to 39(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The production pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (production pattern). Specifically, FIG. 39(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal ready-to-win effect, FIG. 39(B) is a super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super ready-to-win effect, and FIG.

In the present embodiment, a case in which there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the number of types of effects may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 39, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(A), "production pattern X1" to "production pattern X5" are defined as production pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss). When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is the normal ready-to-win performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the normal ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, the performance patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, the normal ready-to-win performance in which the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win state after the high-speed fluctuation performance in which the decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed is finished, and the final individual performance type is the normal ready-to-win performance.

In addition, in the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is the super ready-to-win performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the super ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table are, for example, normal ready-to-win performances executed after the end of high-speed fluctuation performances, and are performances that develop into super ready-to-win performances with higher expectations for big hits than normal ready-to-win performances and longer performance execution times than normal ready-to-win performances as the final individual performance types. Note that the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table may include a super ready-to-win effect pattern effect that develops into a super ready-to-win effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed without going through the normal ready-to-win effect.

Further, in the special ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. When determining that the variation type (performance pattern) is the special ready-to-win performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance pattern Z1 to performance pattern Z3 included in the special ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table are, for example, normal ready-to-win performance and super ready-to-win performance after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance, and are performances that develop into special ready-to-win performance with a higher expectation for big win than normal ready-to-win performance and super ready-to-win performance as the final individual performance type and longer performance execution time than normal ready-to-win performance. The special ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table may include a special ready-to-reach performance pattern that develops into a special ready-to-win performance after a high-speed fluctuation performance or a normal ready-to-reach performance ends without going through at least one of the normal ready-to-win performance and the super ready-to-win performance.

Then, the MPU 51 sets, in the RAM 512, a display variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern command, a variation type table, a performance type table, a stop pattern combination of decorative symbols determined based on the performance type table and a performance type counter, and a variation type (performance pattern type).

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command to the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S2001 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type), and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the pattern display part 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and stops and displays the variations of the plurality of decorative patterns in order. During the variable display of the decoration pattern, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (production pattern type) specified by the display fluctuation pattern command are executed by the pattern display part 341, the speaker 26, the illumination part 27 and the like.

Further, when the MPU 51 outputs the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variable game effecting flag to ON. This variable game effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the variable game effect is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 sets the jackpot game execution flag to ON at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, when the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, and when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process proceeds to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining the effect to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening/closing execution mode effect which are executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON, and terminates the command determination process. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the big win game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating to start the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when starting the round game in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110, and when the received command is not the round game start command (step S2109: No), shifts the process to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S2310), and terminates the command determination process. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2112, and when the received command is not the round game end command (step S2111: No), the process proceeds to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2312), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the special out-ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2114, and if the received command is not the special out-ball detection command (step S2113: No), the process proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON, and terminates the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to add the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 in the set value suggesting process in FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S2115: No), shifts the process to step S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON, and terminates the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Also, the ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the set value suggesting process of FIG.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2118, and when the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process proceeds to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the big win game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Also, the jackpot game effect end flag is referred to in step S2301 in the 7-segment display control process of FIG.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a set value change command. The set value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the changed game set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a set value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120, and if the received command is not a set value change command (step S2119: No), shifts the process to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores the changed setting value, and ends the command determination process. The setting values stored in the RAM 512 are read in step S2014 in the display order setting process of FIG.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main controller 4, and then terminates the command determination processing.

[Variation game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect processing (step S2003) of the sub timer interrupt process, when a variable pattern command is received in the variable game for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the variable game effect in line with the effect pattern determined in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) of the secondary timer interrupt process, the opening effect, ending effect and opening/closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process in step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 37 are executed. In the present embodiment, in the ending effect, an ending addition image showing the display result on the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed on the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 47).

[Set value suggestion process]
In the setting value suggesting process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7 segment display portion 39 are controlled. Further, in the set value suggesting process, a process of displaying on the symbol display section 341 an ending addition image showing the display result of the 7-segment display section 39 in the big winning game is executed as an ending effect of the big winning game. Here, FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON at step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the process shifts to step S2206.

<Step S2202>
When the ending effect start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 lowers the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending effect start timing. Thereby, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38 , the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382 . At this time, the game ball 99 moving from the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 .

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets the stopper portion downward flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is downward (step S2203). The stopper portion downward movement flag is referenced in step S2206 to determine whether or not it is the timing at which the game ball (special out ball) staying in the staying lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384 or not. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position (step S2204), further sets the ending effect start flag to OFF (step S2205), and ends the set value suggesting process.

<Step S2206>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stopper portion downward movement flag, which is set to on in step S2203, is set to on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time for the game ball (special out ball) staying in the staying lane 381 to be detected by the special out ball sensor 384 . Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207 when the stopper portion downward movement flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2216 when the stopper portion downward movement flag is OFF (step S2206: No).

<Step S2207>
If the stopper portion downward movement flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is ON (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON at step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is ON (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and if the special out ball detection flag is OFF (step S2207: No), shifts the process to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and sets the special out ball detection flag to off (step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 are retained in the game ball retention portion 38 in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game. The number of special out balls counted in this manner is referred to for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
At step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the lowering time counter set at step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position.

Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position may be determined by whether or not the special out ball is not detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether or not the special out ball detection flag is continuously off for a predetermined number of times or more. If the condition for returning the stopper part 383 to the upper limit position is that the special out balls are not detected for a certain period of time, even if there are many special out balls, the special out balls can be accurately counted.

Here, when the value of the lowering time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2212, and when the value of the lowering time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), ends the set value suggesting process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the downward motion counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and sets the stopper portion downward flag, which is set to ON in step S2203, to OFF (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retention section 38 is returned to a state in which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 .

<Step S2214>
In step S<b>2214 , the MPU 51 executes 7-segment display section control processing for controlling the ON/OFF state of the 7-segment display section 39 . In other words, the MPU 51 executes 7-segment display section control processing for controlling turning on/off of the 7-segment display section 39 according to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device during the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game at the ending of the jackpot game after the lapse of a specific period for each jackpot game. Details of the 7-segment display section control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes ending additional image control processing for displaying an additional image corresponding to the ON/OFF state of the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. By this ending addition image control processing, it becomes possible to confirm the lighting/light-out state of the 7-segment display section 39 also in the pattern display section 341 . The details of the 7-segment display unit control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper portion downward movement flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set on (step S2216). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect, and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time for the jackpot game effect (ending effect) to end by means of the jackpot game effect end flag. Here, when the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2217, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is OFF (step S2216: No), ends the set value suggesting process.

<Step S2217>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the segments A to G lit in the 7-segment display section 39 (step S2217). That is, the MPU 51 turns off all the segments A to G in the 7-segment display section 39 when the jackpot game effect is terminated. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display portion 39 can be lit only during the ending of the big win game.

Here, in the segments A to G of the 7-segment display part 39, all or part of the numbers corresponding to the game set values (non-set values) other than the game set values (set values) defining the probability that the lottery result of the big win lottery in the game machine 10 will be a big win are displayed. Therefore, the player can obtain information for specifying or estimating the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game each time the jackpot game is executed. As a result, the player can specify or guess the non-set value each time a big win game is executed, so that the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value in the big win game. Further, by obtaining information for specifying or estimating non-set values for each jackpot game, when the number of jackpot games increases, for example, when the number of jackpot runs increases, all (five) non-set values can be grasped, and in this case, the set values can be grasped. In other words, the player can grasp the set value based on the specified non-set value, so that it becomes possible to guess the set value in the jackpot game, so that the interest in the game is improved.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
At step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the set value suggestion effect.

[7-segment display section control processing]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the set value suggesting process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display unit control process, the MPU 51 first acquires the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by adding it in step S2208 in the setting value suggesting process of FIG. The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have entered the variable winning hole 316 and entered the special out ball hole 373 of the crew device 37 in the opening/closing execution mode of the big win. Then, when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2303, and when the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, when it is 0 (step S2302: No), it is not necessary to light any of the segments A to G of the 7 segment display section 39, so the 7 segment display section control processing ends.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
At step S2303, the MPU 51 reads the segment display section control information from the 7-segment display section control information storage area (see FIG. 42A) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display section control information is information necessary for controlling the 7 segment display section 39 during a predetermined period (a period during which the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 is accumulated). Then, the MPU 51 determines the control details for the 7-segment display section 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display section control information read out from the 7-segment display section control information storage area in step S2303 (step S2304), and executes the control of the 7-segment display section 39 based on this control content (step S2305). Details of the determination of the control content and the control for the 7-segment display section 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. Further, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42A) of the 7-segment display section control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2307), and terminates the 7-segment display section control processing.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display section control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 42A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display control information storage area, FIG. 42B is a diagram showing an example of a control order storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display section control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and a previously displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control order storage area is an area for storing the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the order of control targets of the segments A to G when each number is displayed in a predetermined period (period of accumulating the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37). This control order storage area includes a numeric display order storage area and a segment control order storage area.

A number display order storage area stores the order of numbers (number display order) to be displayed in a 7-segment display part 39 during a predetermined period (for example, from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low probability mode to the end of an opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a normal jackpot). The number display order is determined in the above-described display order setting process of FIG. 35 based on the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) that is set for the setting value that defines the probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be a big win. In the number display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. 42(B), the display order A1 is set based on the number display order determination table for the set value 1 in the above-described number display order setting process, and "2"→"3"→"4"→"5"→"6" is stored as the number display order on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period. That is, as long as the setting is not changed during the business of the game hall, a fixed number display order is determined for each business day, and the number display order is fixed for a predetermined period of the same business day. Thus, by fixing the number display order in the predetermined period of the business day, the numbers are displayed in the same order on the 7-segment display part 39 every time the predetermined period starts, so that the numbers whose number display order is early are easily displayed, and the numbers whose number display order is late are difficult to be displayed. For example, when the numerical display order is ``2''->``3''->``4''->``5''->``6'', since the numbers are displayed in this order, ``2'' and ``3'' are easily displayed, but ``5'' and ``6'' are difficult to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being easily specified while allowing the setting value to be estimated and specified, so that the user can enjoy estimating and specifying the setting value. Further, since the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers with early number display order are easily displayed and numbers with late number display order are difficult to be displayed, so that, for example, when the set value is set low (when the probability of a big win in a low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting is low with a small number of initial hits. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely terminating the game in the gaming machine 10 during play, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 .

In addition, it is expected that the 7-segment display section 39 displays more numbers as the number of times of the specific period in the predetermined period increases (the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases). Therefore, as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, the number of non-set values that can be specified among a plurality of non-set values other than the set values also increases. As a result, since the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases, it is possible to obtain a large amount of information for specifying the non-setting value, so that setting value candidates can be narrowed down. By allowing 35 or more game balls 99 to enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period, the player can identify all non-set values, and as a result, can recognize the set values. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while aiming to specify all the non-set values, that is, to recognize the set values, and can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the jackpot succession continues (whether the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), thereby improving the interest in the game.

The number display order is not limited to the case where it is fixed when the power is turned on to the game machine 10 or when the setting is changed, but it may be determined when a big win game for a big win (first win) in a low probability mode is started. In this way, the number display order is determined when a big win game such as the first win is started, and the number display order is determined, for example, every predetermined period. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the display order of the numbers, so that variations in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of initial hits, and to recognize the set values at an early stage. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the numbers not displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 to be displayed based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 in the past for the purpose of specifying all the non-set values and recognizing the set values.

On the other hand, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of segments A to G when numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . The segment control order is fixed to segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G. That is, the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10 rather than being determined by turning on the gaming machine 10, changing settings, winning a jackpot, or the like. Thus, by fixing the segment control order as an order unique to the game machine 10, the player can grasp the control order of the segments A to G when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. This allows the player to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 even before the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the control order of the segments A to G, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the segment control order is fixed during the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when setting values are changed, similarly to the number display order, but it is also conceivable that it is determined for each business day. In this case, compared to the case where the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the game machine 10, it becomes difficult to grasp numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. FIG. As a result, the difficulty until all the non-set values are specified and the set values are recognized is heightened, so that when the set values are set low (when the probability of a big hit in a low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the low setting at an early stage. This prevents the player from prematurely terminating the game on the gaming machine 10 during play.

Also, the segment control order may be determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode is started (when a predetermined period is started), as described in the third embodiment below.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the already displayed information storage area is an area for storing information on numbers already displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period, numbers in the middle of display, and segments A to G already set as control targets. This already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

The already-displayed number flag information is information related to a flag indicating whether or not the number has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period. This displayed number flag information includes number 1 already displayed flag, number 2 already displayed flag, number 3 already displayed flag, number 4 already displayed flag, number 5 already displayed flag, and number 6 already displayed flag. The number 1 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 1 already displayed flag indicates that the number 1 is displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 1 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in the predetermined period when it is set to OFF. The number 2 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 2 already displayed flag indicates that the number 2 is displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 2 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to OFF. The number 3 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 3 already displayed flag indicates that the number 3 is displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 3 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to OFF. The number 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 4 already displayed flag indicates that the number 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 4 is not displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to OFF. The number 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 5 already displayed flag indicates that the number 5 is displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 5 is not displayed in the 7-segment display part 39 in a predetermined period when set to OFF. The number 6 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 6 already displayed flag indicates that the number 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the number 6 is not displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 for a predetermined period when set to OFF.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the number is a display target number in the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period. The display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 1 display target flag indicates that the number 1 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 1 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 2 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 3 display object flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 3 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 4 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 5 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF. The number 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. The number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to ON, and indicates that the number 6 is not to be displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 when set to OFF.

The target segment flag information is a flag indicating whether or not each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is subject to lighting/light-out control in display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This target segment flag information includes a segment A target flag, a segment B target flag, a segment C target flag, a segment D target flag, a segment E target flag, a segment F target flag, and a segment G target flag. The segment A target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment A of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment A target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment A has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment A is not a control target. The segment B existing target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment B of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment B target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment B has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment B is not a control target. The segment C target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment C target flag indicates that the segment C has become a control object in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when it is set to ON, and indicates that the segment C is not a control object when it is set to OFF. The segment D target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment D target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment D has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment D is not a control target. The segment E target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment E subject flag indicates that the segment E is subject to control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that the segment E is not subject to control when set to OFF. The segment F target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment F of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment F object flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment F has become a control object in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment F is not a control object. The segment G target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment G of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When this segment G target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the segment G has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the segment G is not a control target.

In the already displayed information storage area, in the initial state, all flags included in already displayed number flag information, display target number flag information, and already target segment flag information are set to OFF. Here, the initial state indicates a state outside a predetermined period, that is, a state at the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot (initial jackpot) in a low-probability mode (at the beginning of a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37). In this embodiment, all the flags included in the already-displayed information storage area are set to OFF (cleared) when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes) in step S2405 in the ending addition image control process in FIG.

43 to 45 are diagrams showing control examples (display examples) of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control information storage area and update examples of the already displayed information storage area. Hereinafter, a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display section 39 and an update example of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display section control information storage area will be described with reference to FIGS.

As described above, in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display section 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game according to the control content (step S2305). Thereafter, each flag information stored in the already displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 are determined according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. For example, when the displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)) and the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, some of the 7 segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are subject to lighting and extinguishing control. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during the specific period is 5), the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. When the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42B, the number 2 is displayed first, so segment A is lit, segment B is lit, segment C is lit, segment D is lit, and segment E is lit. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, the state shown in FIG. 43A in which all the segments A to G are turned off (non-controlled state) is changed to a partially controlled state in which the segments A, B, D and E are turned on as shown in FIG. 43B.

The change from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B) may be performed all at once, or may be performed stepwise by setting the segments A to E as objects to be controlled in order and lighting or extinguishing the segments A to E. Also, when the segments A to E are turned on or off in order as controlled objects, the segments A to E to be controlled may be flashed to indicate that they are controlled objects. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily have to be specified.

On the other hand, when the control of the 7-segment display section 39 ends, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B), the previously displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state in which all the flags shown in FIG. 42(C) are set to OFF to the content shown in FIG. 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), five segments A to E out of the segments A to G of the number 2 displayed first on the seven-segment display section 39 are subject to control, and segments F and G are not subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43C, since none of the numbers 1 to 6 is displayed in the displayed number flag information, all the flags of the number 1 displayed flag, the number 2 displayed flag, the number 3 displayed flag, the number 4 displayed flag, the number 5 displayed flag, and the number 6 displayed flag remain off. In addition, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag corresponding to the number 2 whose five segments A to E are controlled is set to ON. Further, in the displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are to be controlled, the segment A already targeted flag, the segment B already targeted flag, the segment C already targeted flag, the segment D already targeted flag, and the segment E already targeted flag for segments A to E are set to ON.

Further, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42C), the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a specific period is 10), a total of 10 segments A to G are controlled in the 7 segment display unit 39. That is, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the seven (all) segments A to G are subject to lighting/extinguishing control, so that the number in the first display order is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and further, the three segments A to C are subject to lighting/extinction control for the second display order with respect to the number in the second display order. Specifically, when the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the previously displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the non-controlled state in which all the segments A to G are turned off as shown in FIG. 44A is changed to the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed in the 7-segment display unit 39 by turning on the segments A, B, D, E and G and turning off the segments C and F as shown in FIG. 4(C) is changed to a partial segment control state in which segments A to C are controlled. In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), since the second number displayed is 3, segments A to C are lit.

The change from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segments controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B) and the change from the all-segments controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial-segments controlled state shown in FIG. Further, when the segments A to G or the segments A to C are turned on or off in order, the segment to be controlled may be flashed to clearly indicate that it is being controlled. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily have to be specified.

Further, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled, the previously displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segments controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial-segments controlled state shown in FIG. Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44B, all the segments A to E of the segments A to G for the number 2 displayed first on the seven-segment display section 39 are to be controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45A, in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-target flags for segments A to G are set to ON. Then, when all the target flags for the segments A to G are set to ON, the control to display the number 2 is finished, so as shown in FIG. After that, in the already displayed segment flag information, all the already targeted flags for the segments A to G are set to OFF. Further, as shown in FIG. 45C, in the already displayed segment flag information, the segment A existing target flag, segment B existing target flag, and segment C existing target flag for segments A to C are set to ON. That is, each time all the target flags of the already displayed segment flag information are set to ON (each time seven segments A to G are set to be controlled), the already displayed flag for the number that was the display target in the already displayed number flag information is set to ON, and the display target flag for the number that was the display target in the currently displayed number flag information is set to OFF, while the display target flag for the next number to be displayed is set to ON.

As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, thereby displaying all or part of the numbers corresponding to the game set values (non-set values) other than the game set values (set values) that define the probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 will be a big win. This allows the player to specify or guess the non-set value based on the display content on the 7-segment display section 39, and as a result, it becomes possible to recognize the set value.

By the way, some game machines, such as the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, have a plurality of set values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the game hall side can select the set values. In this case, the game hall desires to set the set value low in order to lower the expected ball output value. When the set value is set low, there is a tendency to desire a game machine in which the set value is unknown to the player in order to prevent the player from stopping the game due to recognition of the low set value by the player.

On the other hand, in order to play a game on the gaming machine 10 with a higher expected ball output value, the player desires a game property in which the set value can be guessed (narrowed down to a plurality of set values) or recognized for the game machine having the set value. Thus, there is a tendency for game halls and players to desire contradicting gaming machines that suggest or specify game set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, among the game balls 99 that have won the variable winning port 316, the game balls (special out balls) that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the crew device 37 are retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38 during a specific period from the start of the first winning jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) staying in the staying lane 381 is counted after the specific period has elapsed, and segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled according to the counted number. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are neither controlled nor illuminated unless at least the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a jackpot and the game is shifted to the jackpot game. Therefore, the set value is not assumed or recognized unless the game is shifted to a big winning game.

In addition, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the croon device 37, for example, one to two (about one in 10R minutes of the round game) entry of the game ball 99 is expected for one 16R jackpot game. Therefore, it is difficult to specify or guess the non-set value by the 7-segment display section 39 in one big win. On the other hand, the 7-segment display part 39 is controlled according to the total number of game balls 99 entered into a special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during a predetermined period from the start of a jackpot game (opening) executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending) in the normal jackpot game. In other words, when the first win is a variable probability big win, the prescribed period does not end as long as the high-probability mode continues, and continues until the opening/closing execution mode of the normal big win game ends when the normal big win is won. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and the set value, the more game balls 99 are expected to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 as the jackpot succession in the high probability mode continues, the non-set value (set value) can be estimated more accurately. can be identified with certainty. Therefore, in the game machine 10, information is displayed that makes it possible to estimate the set value according to the number of specific conditions established in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls entering the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in the predetermined period. On the other hand, in the case of jackpot consecutive games, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value) when the number of consecutive games is small, but as the number of consecutive games increases, the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 increases, so that the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (set value) is reduced. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting value can be estimated by specifying or estimating part or all of the plurality of non-setting values by stacking all or part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . In this way, the game machine 10 can meet the wishes of the store by suppressing the setting values from being easily specified or guessed (narrowed down), and can also meet the wishes of the players by making it possible to speculate more accurate non-set values (set values) by means of the jackpot series. As a result, the gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store side and the player side is provided.

By the way, in a conventional slot machine, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed may display an image suggesting or specifying a set value. An image suggesting or specifying a set value is displayed, for example, on a jackpot determination screen, a jackpot start screen, a jackpot end screen, a start screen such as ART or AT, a continuation screen and an end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. Specifically, in an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or indicate a set value, such as a jackpot game end screen, there is a certain probability that it is a specific set value or more (for example, an intermediate set value (set value 4 to 6) or more), a high set value (e.g., set value 5 or 6), an odd set value (e.g., set value 1, 3, or 5), an even set value (e.g., set value 2, 4, or 6), or not a specific set value (e.g., set value 1 negation). A screen is presented that suggests or clearly indicates that the maximum setting value (for example, setting value 6) is set.

However, in suggesting or specifying setting values in conventional slot machines, the probability of presenting a default screen that does not suggest or specifying setting values is set high, and the probability of presenting a screen that suggests or specifying setting values is set low so that the setting values are not easily identified or guessed. In particular, the probability of suggesting or indicating a set value that the set value is advantageous to the player or indicating that the set value is a specific set value is set low. In addition, the suggestion of the odd set value or the even set value tends to have a low reliability, and the reliability is often set to about 60%, for example. Furthermore, in the slot machine, even if the high setting value is suggested or specified, the high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6) is not suggested or specified, and in particular, the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6) is not suggested or specified. That is, the slot machine does not present disadvantageous information to the player, such as denying the high set value.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, information (non-set value) that allows estimation of a set value is displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 as a number according to the number of specific conditions that are established in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period. In other words, by displaying the numbers of the non-set values one by one on the 7-segment display part 39, it is possible to specify or guess a part of the non-set values, so that the set values can be guessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the set value can be recognized by specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, which is fundamentally different from the method of suggesting or specifying the set value at a fixed rate, which is adopted in gaming machines such as slot machines. In addition, in this embodiment, a non-set value (set value) is specified or suggested depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373) that are satisfied during the jackpot game for a predetermined period. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases, the difficulty of specifying or guessing some or all of a plurality of non-set values decreases, which is different from the suggestion or explicit indication of set values in conventional gaming machines such as slot machines.

In this embodiment, numerical information indicating a plurality of non-set values is presented depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373) that are satisfied during the jackpot game for a predetermined period. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency of presenting information for specifying the set values does not decrease, and the presentation of information for specifying the non-set values (set values) continues as long as the predetermined period continues (as long as the jackpot continues). Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the setting value, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, all non-set values can be identified when a specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-set values during a predetermined period. In other words, regardless of whether the non-set value is high or low, all non-set values are presented to the player, including information that is disadvantageous to the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where setting values are suggested or specified in conventional slot machines, even information that is disadvantageous to the player is presented such as denying the maximum setting value. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for specifying or estimating the setting value, so that the player can determine whether or not to continue the game in the game machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to set the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more) so that the display order of numbers is later so that it is easy to select. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set values (for example, the set value of 2 or less) is earlier so that the number display order can be easily selected. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low set values are displayed earlier, and the numbers corresponding to the high set values are displayed later, so that the higher set values are displayed later. As a result, the player can expect the possibility of a high set value advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the player can enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting the high possibility of the set value.

[Ending addition image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending addition image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, the MPU 51 reads various information in the already-displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. 41 in step S2401, that is, already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information updated with the passage of the current specific period, and based on these information, determines an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image that indicates the display content of the 7-segment display section 39, and is an image that allows the non-set value to be specified or estimated (see FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2) and 47(C)). Then, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 an additional image display command for causing the pattern display section 341 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 in the ending effect. As a result, the symbol display portion 341 displays an additional image as an ending effect.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending effect of the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47(A1) is a screen example of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending of the probability variable jackpot game, and FIG. 47(A2) is a screen example of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending of the normal jackpot. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C) are screen examples (setting value suggesting screen examples) of the symbol display section 341 in the second half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending of the variable probability big winning game, as the first half part of the ending effect, an image is displayed in the symbol display part 341 indicating that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are to be entered after the end of the variable probability big winning game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending of the normal jackpot game, as the first half part of the ending effect, an image is displayed in the symbol display section 341 indicating that the normal jackpot game is ended and the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (time-saving mode) is entered. In addition, in the first half part of the ending effect, in addition to an image clearly showing the game mode to be shifted after the end of the big win game, an image showing the number of consecutive jackpot games and the number of balls to be played is displayed.

On the other hand, in the second half of the ending effect of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control processing in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C), the additional image shows the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display section 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), as shown in FIG. When the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) through FIG. 44(B), an additional image including a setting value suggesting image simulating the display state shown in FIG. Furthermore, when all the five numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 by the end of the predetermined period, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that the numbers “2” to “6” other than the number “1” are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 . In this case, it can be identified that the non-set values are "2" to "6", and as a result, it can be recognized that the set value is "1".

Thus, in the ending performance of the jackpot game, the display history of the 7-segment display part 39 until the end of one prescribed period is displayed as an additional image including five set value suggesting images imitating the 7-segment display part 39 as the second half part. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information about the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until the jackpot game. As a result, even if it is not possible to know that the information about the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, if the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 is overlooked, or if the past display content on the 7-segment display section 39 in the predetermined period is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set value in the ending and recognize or guess the set value based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 for each jackpot game.

As the ending effect of the jackpot game, it is a design matter whether or not an additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display part 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display part 341, and it is conceivable not to display the additional image on the pattern display part 341 in the ending effect. When the additional image is not displayed in the ending performance, if there is a number displayed in the past during a predetermined period, it becomes difficult to specify or guess the non-set value based on the number previously displayed on the 7-segment display part 39, and furthermore, to guess or recognize the set value unless the number is stored or recorded. In other words, by not displaying the additional image in the ending performance, the difficulty of specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) is increased, so that the set value of the game machine 10 can be recognized at an early stage, or at least the recognition that the set value is not high can be prevented. As a result, the game of the gaming machine 10 can be prevented from being terminated early, and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 can be suppressed.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is the 5R normal jackpot. Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2305, and when the jackpot type is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the ending addition image control process ends.

<Step S2405>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area (sets all flags to off), and terminates the ending addition image control process. That is, the MPU 51 initializes the previously displayed information storage area when the jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, although the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated, in order to specify the non-set value (set value) or increase the accuracy of estimation, more game balls 99 need to be entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period, and the hurdles until the non-set value (set value) is specified are high. Therefore, there is an advantage for the game hall that the set values are not easily known to the players. On the other hand, the player has the advantage of being able to specify or guess the set value. In addition, the game machine 10 can be provided with the game property that the set value can be specified or estimated by winning the jackpot lottery as a trigger, the accuracy of the guess of the set value is enhanced by the continuation of the probability variable jackpot (continuous jackpot), and the set value can be recognized in some cases. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

Also, when a jackpot game is started, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there are special circumstances, and the game is not ended during the high probability mode when the high probability mode is set. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the first winning jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even when a player who cannot know the timing (the end of a predetermined period) at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed progresses the game, the game is prevented from ending just before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed can guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena actions of other players who play games aiming at timings at which non-set values (set values) can be specified or guessed.

In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start time of the jackpot game triggered by the jackpot winning in the low-probability mode of the first win, not only does it require at least one jackpot winning before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated, but even if the predetermined period starts, the hurdles until the non-set value (set value) can be specified are high as described above. 1 and you'll win a fair number of jackpot draws. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the number of unit jackpot lotteries (ease of receiving the jackpot lottery) can be sufficiently determined. Thereby, when the non-set value (set value) can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, the player can determine the ball output performance of the game machine 10 during the game including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the unit jackpot lottery number of times, so that it is possible to determine whether to continue the game. For example, even if the set value is low, if the unit jackpot lottery number of times is large, it is possible to make a decision to continue the game by comprehensively considering it. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the unit jackpot lottery number of times is small, it is possible to give up the continuation of the game by comprehensively considering it.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, information for specifying or estimating non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information about the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until the jackpot game. As a result, even if it is not possible to know that the information about the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, if the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 is overlooked, or if the past display content on the 7-segment display section 39 in the predetermined period is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set value in the ending and recognize or guess the set value based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display part 39 for each jackpot game, and enjoy the progress of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, but the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period may be displayed on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 after the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be displayed during a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is executed, a predetermined operation of the gaming machine 10 by the player may cause the display portion such as the pattern display portion 341 to display the display history of the 7-segment display portion 39 for a predetermined period. Thus, by displaying the display history in the predetermined period in the 7-segment display section 39 on the pattern display section 341 or the like after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm the display contents in the past in the 7-segment display section 39 when forgetting. This makes it possible to specify or guess the non-set value based on the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39 . Displaying the display history on the pattern display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like will be described in detail in a fourth embodiment described later.

In this way, when the display history can be displayed on the pattern display part 341 or the like in the standby state or the like, there is an advantage that it is possible to confirm the past display contents on the 7-segment display part 39 when the user forgets. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in a standby state or the like, anyone can check the display history by performing a predetermined operation on the empty gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加In other words, it becomes possible to specify or guess a non-set value (set value) by piggybacking on a privilege obtained by another person, and so-called hyena behavior is permitted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is not allowed to check the display history in the predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 after the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display of the specific information indicating the non-set value including the display history for the predetermined period is restricted except for the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena act of specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) by piggybacking on the privilege obtained by others.

In the present embodiment, when the first winning is a variable probability big winning, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first winning big winning game to the normal big winning game for the normal big winning in the high probability mode. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is the first hit or the consecutive win. In this case, the predetermined period starts when the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode starts, and ends when the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, instead of or in addition to displaying the number corresponding to the non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, the number or the alphabet corresponding to the non-set value may be displayed on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, and the non-set value explicit reach effect for specifying the non-set value may be executed in the symbol display section 341. As the non-set value explicit ready-to-win effect, when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win, it is conceivable to stop and display the decoration pattern with double numbers corresponding to the non-set value, for example. In this way, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 363, and the non-set value is clearly indicated on the symbol display part 341. By executing the non-set value explicit reach effect, not only whether the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win in the variable game, but also the player can see the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 362 or the second in the variable game. Paying attention to the numbers stopped and displayed in the special pattern display portion 363, and paying attention to the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the pattern display portion 341, the variation game can be enjoyed. Also, when the non-set value explicit ready-to-win performance is executed as one of the ready-to-win performances, it is conceivable to stop and display the numbers in the ready-to-win of the decoration pattern of the numbers corresponding to the set value as a misalignment without matching the numbers. For example, when the set value is 1, the decoration patterns can be stopped and displayed at ``222'', ``333'', ``444'', ``555'' and ``666'', but the display is not stopped at ``111'' and the reach when the decoration pattern is 1 is always lost. In this way, it is desirable that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers corresponding to the set values, but it is desirable that the decoration patterns are not stopped and displayed with double numbers, for example, 5 or 6, which negates the high set value, so that the ready-to-win performance can be enjoyed from a different point of view than the conventional one.

Also, it is conceivable that the display of numbers or the like corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 or the non-set value explicit ready-to-win effect can be executed only at a specific timing. Thus, by displaying numbers corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 363 only at the specific timing, or executing the non-set value explicit ready-to-win performance, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to the variable game executed at the specific timing.

As the specific timing, for example, in the variable game executed in the variable probability game state or the time reduction game state, the timing of notifying that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win in the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol display part 363 and the symbol display part 341 can be considered. By explicitly indicating or suggesting the non-set value in the variable game in the probability variable game state or the time reduction game state in this way, the hold is quickly digested by the high frequency support mode, and the variable game in the probability variable game state or the time reduction game state which tends to become monotonous can be enjoyed. In addition, it is conceivable to set the specific timing when the number of variable games executed after shifting to the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state is within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times range, when the number of variable games to be executed after shifting to the variable probability gaming state is small (eg 1 to 10 times) or large (eg 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more, etc.) It is conceivable to set. That is, when the jackpot occurs early after shifting to the variable probability gaming state, or when the number of times of variable games before reaching the jackpot becomes a hooked state, the non-set value may be specified or suggested. In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a privilege for the early jackpot after the end of the jackpot game, or as a remedy for the addiction. In addition, the predetermined number of times range is set when the number of variable games executed after shifting to the time saving game state is small (for example, 1 time to 10 times), or just before the time saving game state ends (for example, 90 times to 100 times). In this case, a non-set value is specified or suggested as a privilege for a big win early after the end of the big win game or a big win just before the end of the time saving.

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a specific period (period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot), and the number that satisfies the specific condition (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 within the specific period) is set, A case has been described where all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set.

By the way, as in the first embodiment described above, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, a plurality of specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set within the predetermined period. Therefore, in the jackpot series, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 for each ending of each jackpot game. In other words, all or part of the specific information is divided and presented a plurality of times in the jackpot series. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of the big win game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is presented in a plurality of times, it is difficult to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the big win game to be executed first unless the specific information to be presented at the ending of the big win game to be executed first is stored or recorded. That is, if the specific information presented in the past on the 7-segment display section 39 is not accurately stored or recorded, it is difficult to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), it is troublesome to accurately store or record the specific information presented in the 7-segment display section 39 in the past, and as a result, it is assumed that the player will give up on specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). In this case, the significance of improving the enjoyment of the game by being able to specify or guess the non-set value (set value) is lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period, unlike the first embodiment described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is presented only once for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inconvenience caused when the specific information is presented a plurality of times during the predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is resolved. That is, in the present embodiment, since the specific information is presented only once after the end of the predetermined period for one predetermined period, there is no specific information presented in the past during the predetermined period, and there is no specific information to be memorized or recorded by the player. As a result, a player can specify or guess a non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specified information presented only once in one predetermined period, and is freed from the trouble of accurately storing or recording the presented specified information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), and can enjoy the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), thereby improving the interest of the game.

In one example of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot, and the specific condition is that the game ball is entered into the special out ball mouth of the croon device. Further, in one example of the present embodiment, the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is only the ending (after the specified period ends) of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the specified period is set for one specified period. That is, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 only once after the predetermined period has ended. Therefore, in the present embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggesting process, the 7-segment display section control process, and the ending addition image control process are different from those in the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process carried out in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 48, and FIG. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Set value suggestion process]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the set value suggestion process in the present embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game is started (step S2201: Yes), unlike the set value suggestion process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40), the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the game ball entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 A process of controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 for receiving 99 and counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 for a predetermined period is executed (steps S2202 to S2213). Thus, in this embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 during the predetermined period is counted once in the 5R normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

Further, in the setting value suggesting process of the present embodiment, under the condition that the game is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes), the vertical movement control of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 and the processing of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 for a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display portion control processing (step S2502), and the ending addition image control. The processing (step S2503) is also executed on the condition that the game is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes) based on the stopper part downward movement flag set on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2203).

[7-segment display section control processing]
The 7-segment display unit control process in the present embodiment is executed when the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game is started as described above (when the opening/closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends). Also, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display section control processing in this embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display section control processing in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 41), but when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading the control order and already displayed information (see FIG. 42) of the 7-segment display section control information, only the control order of the 7-segment display section control information is read (step S2504). . That is, in the 7-segment display unit control process of the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled (specific information is presented) only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period (after the predetermined period ends), so there is no need to read out the already displayed information and control the 7-segment display unit 39.

[Ending addition image control processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, the ending addition image control processing in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending addition image control processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 46), but step S2404 at the end of the ending addition image control processing in the first embodiment is omitted. That is, since the ending addition image control processing of the present embodiment is triggered by the 5R normal jackpot (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion processing in FIG. 48), the already displayed information storage area is initialized in step S2405 without having to determine that the 5R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information (number) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past during the predetermined period, and there is no specific information to be memorized or recorded by the player. As a result, a player can specify or guess a non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specified information presented only once in one predetermined period, and is freed from the trouble of accurately storing or recording the presented specified information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value), and can enjoy the game while specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design changes in the above-described first embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after the specific period has passed (the ending of the jackpot game), a plurality of non-set values (set values) are specified or speculated. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the case where the numbers corresponding to the non-set values as the specific information are displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 according to the number display order (see FIG. 36) determined when the game machine 10 is turned on or when the set values are changed has been described. Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, the case where numbers are displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 is fixed is described.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, when a plurality of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values as specific information are displayed in the number display order (see FIG. 36) determined when the game machine 10 is powered on or when the set values are changed, the numbers are displayed in the same order unless the game machine 10 is powered off or the set values are changed, and the control order of the segments A to G when displaying each number on the 7-segment display section 39 is fixed. Therefore, when the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is less than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information than the already presented specific information can be obtained, and new specific information cannot be obtained. As a result, when it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, as in a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, there is concern that interest in whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in a specific period, the number of specific conditions to be satisfied, and specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed may decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order of presenting the specific information (number display order and segment display order) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order of presenting specific information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, new specific information may be obtained even when the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even when it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, as in a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, the player can be interested in whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period and the number of specific conditions to be satisfied, and can also be interested in the specific information presented after the elapse of the specific period. Thus, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest in the game by presenting specific information that can specify or guess the non-set value (set value) according to the number that satisfies a specific condition.

Predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order of presenting the specific information include, for example, winning a jackpot, starting the opening of the jackpot game, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of the jackpot game. By setting a predetermined condition in this manner, the order of presentation of the specific information is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, since the order of presentation of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly presented and the presentation of the specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time a jackpot game is executed. As a result, for example, the presentation order of the specific information in the jackpot game can be made interesting, so that the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is conceivable that a specific jackpot (for example, a variable probability jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low-probability mode) is won, a specific jackpot game (for example, a probability-variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low-probability mode) opening, an opening/closing execution mode, or an ending of the jackpot game is started. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the number of times the specific information presentation order is determined (changed) is reduced compared to when the predetermined conditions are not limited to specific jackpots or jackpot games. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information will be presented with respect to the previously presented specific information, it becomes more difficult to specify all non-set values (specify setting values), and early specification of all non-set values (specification of setting values) can be prevented. As a result, for example, when the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during play.

Further, the predetermined condition may be the start or end of a predetermined period or a specific period. By setting a predetermined condition in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made interesting, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is conceivable that a specific effect is determined or executed as a variable game effect. The specific effect in this case may be set to either a non-reach effect or a reach effect, for example. Typically, the specific effect includes a premium effect in which a jackpot or a probability variable jackpot is fixed among variable game effects. Furthermore, as a specific effect, it is conceivable that the decorative symbols in the pattern display section 341 are displayed in a specific combination to be stop-displayed or temporarily-stopped-displayed (intermediate stop-displayed). For example, in the pattern display part 341, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at ``777'', when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach pattern like ``767'', when it is stopped and displayed at a specific non-reach-out position (discrete pattern) like ``367'', etc., a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) can be considered that clearly indicates that a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as a ready-reach effect. As the temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development performance is to be executed, it is conceivable that the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in the ready-to-win state, such as "7 development 7", and that the middle pattern, such as "development", is temporarily stopped and displayed to clarify that the development performance is to be executed. Even when a predetermined condition is set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made interesting, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is conceivable that the one-shot jackpot is consecutive multiple times, or that the presentation order of the same specific information is consecutive multiple times. By setting a predetermined condition in this way, when it is difficult to obtain new information as the specific information, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed). Therefore, since it becomes easier to obtain new information as the specific information, it is possible to reduce the feeling of boredom when the new specific information cannot be obtained, and to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

If the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined period starts, for example, the order of presentation of the specific information that is determined (changed) for the predetermined condition that is met first may be prioritized, or the order of presentation of the specific information that is determined (changed) for the predetermined condition that is met last may be prioritized.

In one example of the present embodiment, the display order of numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values as the specific information and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined on the condition that the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started (the predetermined period is started, the first jackpot game is started), and the end of the predetermined period is set according to the display order. All or part of the identifying numbers are displayed.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, focusing on display order setting processing, which is different from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the display order setting process in the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game effect is started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in FIG. Then, when the jackpot game effect start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is OFF (step S2601: No), ends the display order setting process.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game effect is the jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot is the first win and the predetermined period has started. Whether or not the jackpot is in the low-probability mode, for example, when the jackpot game is started, probability mode information indicating whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is in the low-probability mode or in the high-probability mode is included in the jackpot game start command, and when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, a flag indicating that the jackpot is in the low-probability mode is set on or off based on the probability mode information in the command determination process of FIG. It can be determined by checking the flag with the MPU 51 . In addition, the probability mode information may be set as a command different from the jackpot game start command.

Then, if the MPU 51 is a low-probability mode jackpot (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the jackpot is the first hit (a jackpot that is the start of a predetermined period), the process proceeds to step S2603. On the other hand, the MPU 51 terminates the display order setting process when the jackpot is not in the low probability mode (step S2602: No), that is, when the jackpot is in the high probability mode (step S2602: No).

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If it is a low-probability mode jackpot (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further determines the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values in the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2604), sets the control order of the segments A to G for each number (step S2605), and ends the display order setting process.

Here, the display order of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in FIG. The determined display order of numbers is stored in the RAM 512 .

The control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table for segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 shown in FIG. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders for segments A to G are defined by the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt process in FIG. 35, and the probability of each control order being determined is set to be the same. Then, the control order of the segments A to G is determined from a plurality of control orders in the same order for each number by the value of the control order type counter when the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set. Also, the determined control order of segments A to G is stored in RAM 512 .

In this embodiment, when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers, but the control order of each number may be different. In other words, the control order of segments A to G may be determined individually for each of a plurality of numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined for each predetermined period. As a result, by determining the order of presenting specific information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even when it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, as in a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, the player can be interested in whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period and the number of specific conditions to be satisfied, and can also be interested in the specific information presented after the elapse of the specific period. As a result, by presenting the specific information in accordance with the number of times a specific condition for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is satisfied, it is possible to more effectively increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number that satisfies a specific condition in a specific period, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period (the ending of the jackpot game), and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is terminated when the jackpot game ends. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, all or part of the specific information is displayed for a predetermined specified period (after the specific period has passed).

By the way, when the player misses or forgets to present the specific information during the prescribed period, it is assumed that the player wishes to reconfirm the specific information in order to specify or guess a plurality of non-set values in consideration of the specific information displayed in the past. Also, when the player changes, it is assumed that the player after the change wishes to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, when the specific information is presented during the prescribed period, the specific information is not presented outside the prescribed period, so the specific information cannot be reconfirmed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during a special period other than the prescribed period. Thus, the specific information presented in the past during a special period other than the prescribed period can be presented, so that the player can confirm the specific information presented in the past during the special period. That is, the player can reconfirm the specific information displayed in the past when the player misses or forgets the presentation of the specific information in the specified period, and when the player changes, the player after the change can confirm the specific information presented to the past player. As a result, the player can specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the specific information presented to the players in the past, so the convenience of specifying or guessing the non-set values (set values) is improved.

Here, the special period includes, for example, a waiting state (customer waiting state) period in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is executed. Since the special period is the standby period, it is possible to check the specific information presented in the past while the game is not being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent obstruction of visual recognition of various effects executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable game effects and jackpot game effects.

In addition, when all or part of the specific information presented in the past can be presented during the standby state, it is conceivable that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed on a specific display screen that can be shifted to in the standby state. Passwords and commands may be made available by being displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the ending or the like in a jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. In addition, passwords and commands may be obtained by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code or the like on the pattern display unit 341 in the jackpot game, and reading the matrix type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smart phone or a mobile phone, thereby being transmitted from an external server to the mobile terminal.

In this way, all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state can be presented on the condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, so that only players who can enter the password or command, that is, only players who have been presented with all or part of the specific information, can confirm all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state. As a result, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior and free riding, in which all or part of the past specific information is confirmed by other players.

It is also conceivable to read a matrix-type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smart phone or a mobile phone on a specific display screen that can be shifted to in the standby state, thereby presenting all or part of the specific information presented in the past on the mobile terminal.

Also, it is conceivable to set the special period during the jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the opening/closing execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during the jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented in a state in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not specified or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the indication or suggestion of the result of the big winning lottery from being hindered by the presentation of the specific information. In addition, since the big winning game is executed after the result of the big winning lottery indicates the big winning by the variable game, the interest of the player tends to decrease, but the interest in the big winning game is improved by presenting the specific information presented in the past in such a big winning game.

Moreover, as a special period, setting during a variable game is also conceivable. Here, as a theoretical value, the execution time of the variation game is longer than the execution time of the jackpot variation game in the total time for the game to be executed (the time when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on minus the standby state time). Therefore, by enabling presentation of past specific information during a variable game, it is possible to set many timings at which past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during the variable game, it is preferable to limit the presentation of the specific information during a certain period before the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state where the ready-to-win performance is not executed as the variable game performance or when the variable time is short. As a result, it is possible to prevent visual recognition of the indication or suggestion of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the stationary display of the decoration pattern.

Further, the presentation of the past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's will.

When the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it is possible to present the past specific information at a timing not expected by the player. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can be provided with a playability with unexpectedness. Moreover, since the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the game machine 10 without the player performing any operation on the game machine 10, even a player who has little knowledge of the game machine 10 can know the specific information presented in the past. This ensures fairness among players.

Here, as an example of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, for example, presenting the specific information presented in the past as a demonstration screen in the standby state, presenting the specific information presented in the past before the reach production is executed at a certain rate (including 100%) when a specific reach production is scheduled to be executed in the variable game, and presenting the specific information presented in the past by a lottery executed at a specific timing of the variable game or jackpot game. For example, it is decided to present specific information based on the When specific information presented in the past is presented as a demonstration screen in a standby state, the player can select the game machine 10 for executing the game from an empty stand in consideration of the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen, so that the degree of freedom and convenience in selecting the game machine 10 for executing the game are improved. In addition, when execution of a specific ready-to-win performance is scheduled in a variable game, when specific information presented in the past is presented before the execution of the ready-to-win performance, presentation of the past specific information plays a role as an advance notice performance for execution of the specific ready-to-win performance, so interest in the variable game is improved. It is also conceivable to execute the presentation of the past specific information in the variable game as an expectation degree suggesting performance (including a confirmed performance indicating that it is a big win) that suggests the expectation (reliability) when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, or as a chance-up performance to improve the expectation (reliability). Also in this case, interest in the variation game is improved. In addition, when the specific information presented in the past is presented by the lottery executed at the specific timing of the variable game or the jackpot game, the past specific information is presented at the random specific timing determined by the game machine 10, so that the unexpectedness of the game can be particularly imparted. Also, when the player can know the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing, so that the interest in the game is improved.

On the other hand, when the past specific information is presented at the player's will during the special period, the player can positively confirm the past specific information at his/her favorite timing during the special period without passively waiting for the past specific information to be presented at the timing determined by the game machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, when specifying or estimating a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past specified information, convenience is improved because the player's own intention is reflected without being restricted by the game machine 10 with respect to the timing of presenting the past specified information.

Here, as an example of presenting the past specific information in the special period according to the intention of the player, the specific information presented in the past is presented when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the like in the special period set during the standby state, during the variable game, or during the jackpot game.

In one example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the plurality of non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed in the ending (specified period) of the jackpot game, and all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed in the last three endings of the jackpot game is displayed in the pattern display unit 341 by performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21 during the standby state period (special period). In one example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 without performing input operations such as passwords and commands.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 63, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 53 , the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment further includes a selection determining section 21 provided on the front frame 11 .

The selection determining unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that accepts the player's pressing operation in the standby state described later and shifts the display screen (see FIG. 60) of the symbol display unit 341 . The selection decision unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and decision buttons 21B.

A plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen in the waiting state screen transition processing of FIGS. Here, provisional selection means a state in which the content of the provisional selection is confirmed (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the enter button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 includes an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d for switching input signals to the sound lamp control device 5, as shown in FIG. These switches 211 a to 211 d are connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5 . Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not each selection button 211-214 has been operated based on the input signal of each switch 211a-211d.

Further, in this embodiment, when it is detected that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated, it is determined that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated. Of course, it may be determined that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated when it is detected that the selection buttons 211 to 214 are being operated continuously or the operation has ended.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also includes a decision operation switch 21Ba for switching input signals to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The determination operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

Also, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts the player's operations on the touch keys may be provided as operation means. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, it is conceivable to provide a translucent touch panel on the front side of the pattern display section 341 for accepting player's operations. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). Also, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact type switches or the like, but may be piezoelectric elements or the like as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of operations by the player.

Here, FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the secondary timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, in addition to the same processing (steps S2000 to S2005) as the secondary timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment, operation detection processing (step S2701) and standby state screen transition processing (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
The operation detection process is a process of detecting whether or not the various buttons 20, 21A, 21B have been operated. Here, FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes an operation button operation detection process (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), a selection button operation detection process (step S2803), a selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), an enter button operation detection process (step S2805), and an enter operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the operation history for the past three times is sequentially updated. In the game machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that whether or not the operation button 20 is operated is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. Here, FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Also, in step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903, the most recent three operation states at 1 msec intervals as the operation history of the operation button 20 are stored in the RAM 512 as the first to third detection flags. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the operation state immediately before is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two times before is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation Detection Pattern Judgment Processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2802 in the operation detection processing, an operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flags are composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38A). Also, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38A). Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38A). Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated (see FIG. 38A). Here, FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. FIG. 59A is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation states for the operation button 20. FIG. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, if the first operation detection flag is ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S3001: No), shifts the process to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3003 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3008 when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No).

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3004 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3010 when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No).

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59A) when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 continues. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the sound lamp control device 5 . As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued, and therefore can grasp the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. Therefore, since the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation button 20 is long-pressed based on the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated, it is possible to execute the operation button presentation based on the long-press operation.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not ON (step S3001: No), it determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is ON (step S3005). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3006, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), shifts the process to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is OFF (step S3006: No), shifts the process to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF. That is, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59A), and ends the detected operation pattern determination process. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected, so that the erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 caused by noise such as radio waves or static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at the timing unintended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), it determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3009 when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No).

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59A) when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the three operation states of the operation button 20 (see FIG. 59A). Note that the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes upper selection button operation processing, lower selection button operation processing, left selection button operation processing, and right selection button operation processing.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the upper selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag".

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the down selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operating state of the down selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the down selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the operation button operation detection process shown in FIG. 57, the operation detection flag of the operation button operation detection process shown in FIG. 57 may be read as the operation detection flag of the operation button.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the left selection button operation processing, in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag".

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag".

[Selection operation detection pattern determination process]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes up selection operation detection pattern determination process, down selection operation detection pattern determination process, left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the upper selection button 211 from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process can be performed by replacing the “operation detection flag” with the “upper selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” with the “upper selection operation pattern flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 58 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 59B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets the first upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

Further, when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started).

Further, when an operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended).

Further, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the bottom selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a bottom operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the bottom selection button 212 from the operation history of the bottom selection button 212 determined based on the first bottom selection operation detection flag, the second bottom selection operation detection flag, and the bottom selection operation detection flag. Here, since the downward selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58 , the “operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” can be read as “lower selection operation detection flag” and “lower selection operation pattern flag”, respectively.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(C), in the bottom selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets the first bottom selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second bottom selection operation pattern flag and the third bottom selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the bottom selection button 212 three times. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second bottom selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first bottom selection operation pattern flag and the third bottom selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the bottom selection button 212 three times. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has started).

Further, when an operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

Further, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third bottom selection operation detection flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the bottom selection button 212 three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the bottom selection button 212 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third bottom selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” can be read as “left selection operation detection flag” and “left selection operation pattern flag”, respectively.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF when an operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the left selection button 213 has been operated).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the left selection button 213 has been operated).

In addition, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above, such as ``OFF'', ``OFF'', and ``OFF'', occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the right selection operation detection pattern determination process can be performed by replacing the "operation detection flag" with the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" with the "right selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(E) , in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the right selection button 214 has been operated).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the right selection button 214 has been operated).

Further, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to off when an operation pattern other than the above such as ``OFF'', ``OFF'', and ``OFF'' occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[OK button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B, and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the enter button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the enter button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "enter button operation detection flag".

[Determination operation detection pattern determination process]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the determination button 21B from the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 58 may be replaced with the “determination operation detection flag”.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(F), in the enter operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets the first enter operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second enter operation pattern flag and the third enter operation pattern flag to OFF when an operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operating state of the enter button 21B three times. The first decision operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B is being operated continuously.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag to OFF when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times. The second enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated).

Further, when an operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the third enter operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first enter operation pattern flag and the second enter operation pattern flag to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated).

Further, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the enter button 21B is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third enter operation pattern flags are off.

[Waiting state screen transition processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 55, in the standby state screen transition processing executed in 2702 of the sub timer interrupt processing, in the standby state where neither the variable game nor the big win game is executed, the screen of the symbol display unit 341 is shifted in response to the operation of the operation button 20, the selection button 21A, or the determination button 21B, and processing that allows the player to make various selections and settings is executed. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pattern display section 341 in the standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the variable display of decorative patterns is stopped, the reserved number N and the reserved number M are '0', and the game is not shifted to a big win game state, the fluctuation stop screen in which the fluctuation of the decorative patterns is stopped is maintained. Then, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after the fluctuation stop screen is displayed, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and cursor images.

The plurality of screen transition images are images for selecting the display screen of the transition destination, and include a plurality of selectable items (display screen of the transition destination). The plurality of screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to the 7-segment display history selection screen displaying "7-segment display history", a character selection screen transition image for transitioning to the character selection screen displaying "character selection", a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to the character customization screen displaying "character customization", and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen displaying "return".

The cursor image is an image indicating which of a plurality of selectable items is currently temporarily selected, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image among the plurality of screen transition images is the temporarily selected item. The example shown in FIG. 60 indicates that "7-segment display history" is provisionally selected. In addition, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the plurality of screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the other screen transition images in order to emphasize that the item is temporarily selected. Note that the temporary selection item can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 .

On the top menu screen, the temporarily selected item (destination display screen) is determined by operating the determination button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is displayed. For example, when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history" and operates the decision button 21B, the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen.

The 7-segment display section history selection screen is a screen that can be shifted to a history screen on which the content of the specific information displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed for a predetermined period. This history screen shows the contents displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the three most recent predetermined periods, and includes a previous history screen that displays the contents of the specific information for the previous predetermined period, a second previous history screen that displays the contents of the specific information for the second predetermined period, and a third previous history screen that displays the contents of the specific information for the three previous predetermined periods. Each history screen includes a history image in the same form as the additional images (see FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2) and 47(C)) displayed on the symbol display portion 341 in the second half of the ending of the jackpot game. The history image indicates the display history of the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes 5 set value suggestive images imitating the 7-segment display section 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 60, the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in the predetermined period one time before, and then the segments A to C are lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display unit history selection screen includes a cursor image indicating that the temporary selection is made, a first previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the previous history screen displaying "history 1 (1 time before)", a second previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the second previous history screen displaying "history 2 (2 times before)", a third previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the third previous history screen displaying "history 3 (three times before)", and a change stop screen displaying "end". Includes a floating still screen transition image for transitioning. Then, on the 7-segment display history selection screen, the temporarily selected item (destination display screen) is determined by operating the enter button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is displayed. For example, when the game player temporarily selects the previous history screen transition image of ``history 1 (1 time before)'', when the enter button 21B is operated, the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display part history selection screen to the previous history screen. When ``history 2 (2 times before)'' is selected, the history selection screen of the 7-segment display part is shifted to the history screen of 2 times before, and when ``history 3 (3 times before)'' is selected, the history selection screen of the 7-segment display part is shifted to the history screen of 3 times before. When "end" is selected, the 7-segment display history selection screen is switched to the top menu screen.

In this way, it is possible to switch from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any one of the 1st previous history screen, the 2nd previous history screen, and the 3rd previous history screen according to the player's selection. That is, the player can check the history information desired by the player by shifting to the history screen desired by the player. As a result, the history can be effectively confirmed while avoiding the confirmation of history information such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the history can be efficiently confirmed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, information for specifying the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 different from the pattern display section 341 in which decorative patterns are variably displayed. Therefore, even when the information for specifying the non-set value is displayed, visual recognition of the image effect executed in the pattern display section 341 is not obstructed. On the other hand, in the standby state, the same history information as the information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the ending is displayed on the pattern display section 341 different from the 7-segment display section 39 . Here, since the pattern display portion 341 generally has a large display area, displaying the history information on the pattern display portion 341 improves the visibility of the history information. Also, the pattern display unit 341 may be used to set various settings such as effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine 10 . Therefore, if the display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 at the ending are displayed on the pattern display part 341, the history information can be confirmed by the same operation as the operation for performing various settings, so that the convenience of the confirmation work of the history information is improved.

In this embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by the player, but it is also conceivable to display a plurality of pieces of history information simultaneously on one screen. In this case, since many histories can be checked at once, it is possible to efficiently check the presentation contents in this case as well.

Also, in the top menu screen, when the character screen transition image of ``character selection'' is selected, the display screen is transitioned to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of ``character customization'' is selected, the display screen is transitioned to the character customization screen. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to select a character that appears in variable game effects, etc., and to customize the character's costume, accessories, hairstyle, and the like.

In the top menu screen, when the change stop screen transition image of "return" is selected, the display screen shifts to the change stop screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by operating the selection determination unit 21 (the selection button 21A and the determination button 21B) in the standby state, it is possible to check the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the last three predetermined periods. Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 when the player misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 at the ending of the jackpot game, and when the player changes, the player after the change can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display part 39.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39, thereby improving convenience for specifying or guessing the non-set values (set values).

Here, FIGS. 61 and 62 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 61 and 62, the procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55 will be described.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the waiting state screen transition processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the device is in the waiting state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to OFF during the variable game effect flag set to ON at step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 37 (step S3101: No), and when the flag during the jackpot game effect set to ON when the display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. I judge. On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that it is not in a standby state when the variable game effect flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or when the jackpot game effect flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes).

If the MPU 51 is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the process proceeds to step S3103, and if it is not in the standby state (Yes in step S3101 or S3102), the standby state screen transition processing ends.

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The fluctuation stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen in the pattern display section 341 is the fluctuation stop screen. This fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON in step S3120 of FIG. 62 to be described later when shifting from the fluctuation game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags other than the fluctuation stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state. The fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen other than the fluctuation stop screen is shifted to the fluctuation stop screen. Specifically, the fluctuation stop screen flag is set when the display screen shifts from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109 in FIG. It is also set to ON when the display screen shifts from the previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen. Incidentally, the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started.

Then, when the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3104, and when the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the process shifts to step S3108 in FIG.

<Step S3104>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the operation button 20 has started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, if the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3105, and if the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen for various selections and settings (step S3105) (see FIG. 60). That is, when the operation button 20 is operated while the display screen is the variable display screen, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets on the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3106), sets off the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen (step S3107), and terminates the standby state screen transition processing.

<Step S3108>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 51 determines whether the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in FIG. 61). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3109 if the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3110 if the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No).

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, an item to be provisionally selected is changed according to the operation of the selection button 21A. In the top menu screen processing, when the enter button 21B is operated, the display screen is shifted to the screen corresponding to the temporarily selected item, specifically, the fluctuation stop screen, the 7-segment display history selection screen, the character selection screen, or the character customization screen. Further, when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transition destination screen to ON and sets the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen is set to ON (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No), the process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes 7-segment history selection screen processing. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process executed when the 7-segment display history selection screen is displayed. The details of the 7-segment history selection screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3112>
When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Then, when the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3113, and when the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the process shifts to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
When the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "return" is selected, the display screen is changed from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display portion history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 turns off the previous history screen flag and turns on the 7-segment history selection screen flag.

<Step S3114>
When the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON (step S3114). The 2-time previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 2-time previous history screen in step S3215 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3115 when the second previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3116 when the second previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No).

<Step S3115>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 2nd previous history screen process and terminates the standby state screen transition process. In the 2nd previous history screen process, when "return" is selected, the display screen is changed from the 2nd previous history screen to the 7-segment display portion history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 2-time previous history screen flag to OFF and sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 3rd previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3rd previous history screen is set to ON (step S3116). The 6-time previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3-time previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3117 when the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3118 when the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No).

<Step S3117>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3rd previous history screen process, and terminates the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is changed from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7-segment display portion history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3-time previous history screen flag to OFF and sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
When the history screen flag three times before is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: Yes), other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen transition processing ends. On the other hand, when the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to ON (step S3120), and terminates the standby state screen transition processing. That is, when all the screen flags are off in the standby state, the MPU 51 shifts from the variable game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state and can determine that the display screen is the variable stop screen, so it sets the variable stop screen flag to ON.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen, the previous history screen, the previous history screen, or the previous history screen in response to the player's operation of the selection determination section 21 (the selection button 21A and the determination button 21B) (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the upper selection button 211 has started, and is set to ON in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3202 when the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3203 when the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No).

<Step S3202>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs processing to move the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. For example, if "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 1 (1 time before)" (see FIG. 60). If the upper selection button 211 is operated while "history 1 (one time before)" displayed at the top of the option images is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display may not be changed, or the temporary selection display may be changed to "end" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, if the operation of the upper selection button 211 has not started, the MPU 51 determines whether the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203). The second bottom selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the bottom selection button 212 has been operated, and is set to ON in the bottom selection operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204 when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3205 when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No).

<Step S3204>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes processing to change the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. For example, if "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 times before)" (see FIG. 60). If the lower selection button 212 is operated while "end" displayed at the bottom of the option images is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display may not be changed, or the temporary selection display may be changed to "history 1 (previous)" displayed at the top of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second enter operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the enter button 21B has been operated, and is set to ON in the enter button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated when the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen. Then, when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3206, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), the standby state screen transition processing ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and determines whether the item provisionally selected when the determination button 21B is operated is "end" (step S3207). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3208 if the provisionally selected item is "end" when the decision button 21B is operated (step S3207: Yes), and transfers the process to step S3210 if the provisionally selected item is not "end" when the decision button 21B is operated (step S3207: No).

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is "end" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen (step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets on the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen (step S3209), and terminates the standby state screen transition processing.

<Step S3210>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "end" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the provisionally selected item is "history 1 (previous)" (step S3210). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211 when the provisionally selected item is "history 1 (1 time before)" (step S3210: Yes), and transfers the process to step S3213 when the provisionally selected item is not "history 1 (1 time before)" (step S3210: No).

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the provisionally selected item is "history 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (step S3211) (see FIG. 60), sets the previous history screen flag to on (step S3212), and ends the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Step S3213>
If the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is not "History 1 (1 time ago)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected is "History 2 (2 times ago)" (step S3213). If the provisionally selected item is “history 2 (2 times before)” (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3214, and if the provisionally selected item is not “history 2 (2 times before)” (step S3213: No), the process proceeds to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the provisionally selected item is "history 2 (2nd time ago)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 2nd previous history screen (step S3214) (see FIG. 60), sets the 2nd previous history screen flag to ON (step S3215), and ends the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is not "History 2 (2nd time ago)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the item provisionally selected is "History 3 (3rd time ago)". 7) End the 7-segment history selection screen process.

In this way, on the 7 -segment history screen executed in the waiting state, the display screen shifted to either the history screen, twice a pre -history screen, and the pre -history screen twice from the 7 -segmented display site history selection screen, and entered the special out balls 373 of the croon device 37 for the prescribed period of the past three times. All or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non -set values displayed in the 7 -segment display portion 39 according to the number of gaming ball 99 can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 when the player misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display part 39 at the ending of the jackpot game, and when the player changes, the player after the change can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display part 39.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can specify or guess a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39, thereby improving convenience for specifying or guessing the non-set values (set values).

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable game is executed by launching the game ball 99, the display screen is not shifted to another screen such as a change stop screen from the history screen (1st previous history screen, 2nd previous history screen and 3rd previous history screen) except when the player intentionally performs a screen transfer operation. Therefore, the player can carefully and politely check the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 in the past at his/her own pace by stopping the launching of the game ball 99 and maintaining the standby state without being subject to time restrictions such as when the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. As a result, when a player specifies or guesses a plurality of non-set values (set values) based on past specified information, the player can consider them at his or her own pace, thereby improving the convenience of specifying or guessing a plurality of non-set values (set values).

In this embodiment, the past specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 that can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 by the operation (intention) of the player in the standby state is for the past three predetermined periods, but there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. That is, it may be possible to check specific information for a predetermined period of one, two, four or more times in the past.

Further, the display of past specific information is not limited to the pattern display section 341, and may be performed by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or may be a display unit different from the pattern display unit 341 or the 7-segment display unit 39, for example, a separate display unit for displaying the past specific information. In addition, when there is a display section provided for executing a part of effects such as variable game effects separately from the symbol display part 341, it is conceivable to display past information on the display part.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to third embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number that satisfies a specific condition during a specific period, all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is terminated when the jackpot game ends. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the specific information is displayed during the specified period set after the specified period elapses each time the specified period set as the specified period elapses.

By the way, when displaying numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values in the 7-segment display section 39, all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled, so that the numbers (non-set values) to be displayed can be specified. Also, it is possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all the segments A to G are to be controlled. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned off, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “1” and “4”. When segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. When segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2", "3", "5" and "6". When the segment B which is the second object to be controlled is turned on, it can be determined to be either "2" or "3", and when the segment B is turned off, it can be determined to be either "5" or "6". Furthermore, it can be recognized as "3" when segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when segment C is turned off. That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G become the control target, becomes the control target. Furthermore, it can be recognized as "6" when segment E, which is the fifth controlled object, is turned on, and can be recognized as "5" when segment E is turned off. That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth controlled object before all the segments A to G become the controlled object, becomes the controlled object. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third control object, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment E, which is the fifth control object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the segment F, which is the sixth control object, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled. Therefore, even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 can be recognized before all the segments A to G become control objects, the control of the segments A to G for displaying the next display object numbers is not started until after all the segments A to G become control objects. Therefore, even when the player recognizes the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 before all the segments A to G become control objects, the information for specifying the numbers already recognized by the player is displayed on the 7-segment display part 39 until the next display of the numbers to be displayed starts. In other words, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and there is concern that the player's interest in the game may decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game every time the specific period set for the jackpot game elapses, so that all or part of the numbers (specific information) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values are dispensed every time the specific period elapses. Therefore, if a number corresponding to any non-set value is displayed during the specific period that has passed earlier, it is assumed that the number may be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to specify or guess the set value from a plurality of non-set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in non-set value display means (lamp display units) having a plurality of information display units (six individual lamp units) that are equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), information (numbers) specifying non-set values is displayed by each information display unit. Each information display unit has two modes: a display state (lighting state) in which specific information is presented and a non-display state (light-out state) in which the specific information is not presented. When the information display unit is in the display state, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information displayed on the information display unit. By thus setting the information display section to one of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information presented on the information display section in the display state. That is, in the present embodiment, as the specific information, only information that allows the non-set value to be specified is displayed, and information that allows the non-set value to be estimated is not displayed. Therefore, since the specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information capable of specifying one non-set value is presented, the decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of the unnecessary specific information is prevented.

The non-set value display means is not particularly limited, but examples thereof include a display device having a plurality of groups of lamps that can be individually turned on and off, a display device having a plurality of 7-segment display units, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display, a plasma display, and the like. Further, as the non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means for variably displaying decorative patterns.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of information display parts corresponding to the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in the predetermined period is put into the display state, and at least the information display parts put into the display state earlier in the specific period are put into the display state until the jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set is finished. For example, the information display portion that was put into the display state during the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also put into the display state during the specific period after the predetermined period. In this way, the information display part that was put in the display state during the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also put in the display state during the specific period after the predetermined period, so that the information can be confirmed at any time during at least the specific period during the predetermined period. Therefore, the specified information displayed in the previous specified period in the same specified period is not forgotten, and the convenience is improved when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specified information, and further when specifying or estimating the set value.

The information display part put in the display state during the specific period may be maintained in the display state all the time until the predetermined period and the end of the predetermined period are set until the jackpot game is completed, may be maintained in the display state only during the jackpot game, or may be maintained in the display state only for the specific period.

In an example of the present embodiment, in a lamp display part having six individual lamp parts to which any number from 1 to 6 is attached, a lamp lighting lottery executed when a game ball is entered into a special out ball opening of a crew device during a specific period is won, so that the individual lamp part to which a number corresponding to a non-set value is attached is turned on at the stage when the lamp lighting lottery is won without waiting for the lapse of the specific period. In the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modifications of this embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 64, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a special out-ball discharge section 38A instead of the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment, and a lamp display section 35 is provided on the game board 31 instead of the 7-segment display section 39 of the first embodiment.

The special out ball discharge section 38A discharges the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 to the back side of the game board 31 . This special out ball discharge section 38A has a configuration in which the stopper section 383 is omitted from the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above, and has the same configuration as the game ball retention section 38 except that the stopper section 383 is omitted. In such a special out ball discharge section 38A, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying (stopped) in the special out ball discharge section 38A. Therefore, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after the specific period has elapsed as in the first embodiment, but is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 even during the specific period.

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information specifying non-set values, and includes a plurality of (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be turned on and off individually. The first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in rows (linearly) in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 65 , the lamp display section 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 . As a result, as can be understood from FIG. 66, the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 can be turned on and off individually.

The number 1 is attached to the first individual lamp part 351, and when the first individual lamp part 351 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 1, and the game set value 1 is negated as the set value. The number 2 is attached to the second individual lamp part 352, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 2 by turning on the second individual lamp part 352, and the game set value 2 is negated as the set value. A number 3 is attached to the third individual lamp part 353, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 3 by turning on the third individual lamp part 353, and the game set value 3 is negated as the set value. A number 4 is attached to the fourth individual lamp part 354, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 4 by turning on the fourth individual lamp part 354, and the game set value 4 is negated as the set value. A number 5 is attached to the fifth individual lamp part 355, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 5 by turning on the fifth individual lamp part 355, and the game set value 5 is negated as the set value. A numeral 6 is attached to the sixth individual lamp part 356, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 6 by turning on the sixth individual lamp part 356, and the game set value 6 is negated as the set value.

That is, in the lamp display portion 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 that are lit correspond to a plurality of non-set values, and the game set values corresponding to the numbers are negated as the set values. Then, when the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off, and the number corresponding to the one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 in the off state corresponds to the set value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are lit and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is extinguished, it is specified that the non-set values are 2 to 6 and the set value is 1. As shown in FIG. 66B, when the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are lit and only the second individual lamp unit 352 is extinguished, it is specified that the non-set values are 1 and 3 to 6, and the set value is 2. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354 to 356 are lit and only the third individual lamp unit 353 is extinguished, it is specified that the non-set values are 1, 2, 4 to 6 and the set value is 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth and sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 353, 355 and 356 are lit and only the fourth individual lamp portion 354 is extinguished, it is specified that the non-set values are 1 to 3, 5 and 6 and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 354 and 356 are lit and only the fifth individual lamp section 355 is extinguished, the non-set values are 1 to 4 and 6, and the set value is specified to be 5. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are lit and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is extinguished, the non-set values are 1 to 5, and the set value is specified to be 6. The first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 are controlled in the set value suggesting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

[Set value suggestion process]
In the set value suggesting process of the present embodiment, control for lighting and extinguishing the lamp display unit 35 (the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the lighting state or the extinguished state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Here, FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the set value suggesting process executed in the secondary timer interrupt process of FIG. In the set value suggesting process of the present embodiment, control for lighting and extinguishing the lamp display unit 35 (the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the lighting state or the extinguished state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. The procedure for setting value suggestion processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON at step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and when the ending effect start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), the process shifts to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON at step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3303, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), ends the setting value suggesting process.

<Step S3303>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp parts 351 to 356. That is, each time the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are to be lit.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, the set value can be recognized by displaying five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 before the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In the 7-segment display unit 39, in order to display 5 numbers, it is necessary to control each of the 7 segments A to G 5 times, so a specific condition must be satisfied 35 times (7×5 times) or more. That is, it is necessary to enter 35 game balls 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 in a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the non-set value is displayed by the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35, and the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are controlled in only two modes, the ON state and the OFF state. Therefore, in order to display five non-set values by the lamp display unit 35 so that the set values can be recognized, the specific condition needs to be satisfied five times or more. Further, in this embodiment, a crew device 37 similar to that in the first embodiment is employed. Therefore, if the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display the non-set values are clearly lit with a small number of big wins.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the lamp lighting lottery is won. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty in specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. As a result, the degree of difficulty of lighting the five individual lamp parts 351 to 356 displaying the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display part 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily identified, that is, the set values are prevented from being easily recognized.

The winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set so that the degree of difficulty for controlling lighting of the five individual lamp portions 351 to 356 is the same or substantially the same as the degree of difficulty for displaying five numbers by the 7-segment display portion 39 in the first embodiment. The winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same winning probability for five individual lamp parts 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, or the winning probability for at least one individual lamp part 351 to 356 may be different from the other individual lamp parts 351 to 356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp portions 351 to 356, a game feature is imparted in which the probability of lighting the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 corresponding to non-set values is stabilized. When the same winning probability is set for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100×(1/7)% (=14.3%) (for example, 10% or more and 20% or less). This is because, in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crew device 37, so that in this embodiment as well, when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373, about one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is lit on average. In addition, when the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% or more and 20% or less, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the lottery condition that triggers the execution of the lamp lighting lottery for lighting one individual lamp part 351 to 356 of the five individual lamp parts 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is a different lottery condition that the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set according to the difficulty of establishment of this lottery condition. That is, it is conceivable to set the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery low when the degree of difficulty in establishing the lottery condition is low, and to set the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery higher as the degree of difficulty in establishing the lottery condition becomes higher. By setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery in accordance with the degree of difficulty in establishing lottery conditions, the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition necessary for lighting one individual lamp part 351 to 356 can be made uniform regardless of the type of the specific condition. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (exactly as lottery triggers).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one of the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 is made different from that of the other individual lamp portions 351 to 356, the probability of lighting the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values varies. When the winning probability for at least one of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 is made different from that for the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356, for example, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 having a later control order may be set to have a lower winning probability. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356 having the earliest control order.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the MPU 51 has won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3305, and if the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the set value processing ends.

<Step S3305>
If the lottery for lighting the lamp is won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out the already lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the already lit lamp information is information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are being lit, and includes already lit lamp flag information as shown in FIGS. 68(B) and 68(C). The lit lamp flag information includes a first lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, a second lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, a third lit lamp flag indicating whether the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, a fourth lit lamp flag indicating whether the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, and a fifth lit lamp flag indicating whether the fifth individual lamp section 355 is lit. , and a sixth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit. Each lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit, and set to OFF when the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are extinguished. In the example shown in FIG. 68B, all lit lamp flags are set to OFF (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are extinguished. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second lit lamp flag is set to ON, the first, third to sixth lit lamp flags are set to OFF, indicating that the second individual lamp section 352 is lit and the first, third to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 353 to 356 are extinguished.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all lit lamp flags are set to ON in the lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 specifying non-set values are lit. Then, when all the lit lamp flags are set to ON in the lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the set value suggesting process. That is, when the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 specifying the non-set value are all turned on, there are no other individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be turned on, so the set value suggesting process ends. On the other hand, if there is an already lit lamp flag set to OFF in the already lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If there is an already lit lamp flag set to OFF in the already lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control order is set, for example, by a procedure similar to the display order setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, the lamp control order is determined by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the set values stored in the RAM 412 when the power is turned on or when the set values are changed. This lamp control order determination table is the same as the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment described above, and the numbers in the number display order determination table can be considered as numbers assigned to individual lamps. The number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp section 351, and similarly, the numbers 2 to 6 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp sections 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the display order A1 is determined when the setting value is 1, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is the second individual lamp unit 352→third individual lamp unit 353→fourth individual lamp unit 354→fifth individual lamp unit 355→sixth individual lamp unit 356. Further, in the numerical display order determination table of the first embodiment, the probability of selecting each display order is the same, and in the lamp control order determination table of the present embodiment, the probability of selecting each lamp control order is also the same.

The lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the set value is changed, but may be set when a predetermined period of time starts. Also, the lamp control orders need not have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read in step S3305 and the lit lamp information read in step S3307 (step S3308), and lights the individual lamp units 351 to 356 (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is executed each time a game ball 99 enters a special out ball opening 373 of a crew device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit to present specific information indicating a non-set value. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already lit lamp information (step S3310), and terminates the set value suggesting process. For example, when the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on when all the already lit lamp flags are set to OFF (initial state) as in the example shown in FIG.

Thus, in this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is executed each time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit, whereby the non-set value can be specified. That is, in this embodiment, the non-set value can be identified by turning on the individual lamps 351 to 356 even before the specific period elapses. By setting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in one of the two states of the lit state and the extinguished state in this manner, the non-set value can be specified by the number attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lit state. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that allows the non-set value to be specified is presented by lighting the individual lamps 351 to 356, and the information that allows the non-set value to be estimated is not presented. Therefore, since the specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information capable of specifying one non-set value is presented, the decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of the unnecessary specific information is prevented.

<Step S3311>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is set to ON in step S2118 of the command determination process in FIG. Then, when the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3312, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is OFF (step S3311: No), ends the set value suggesting process.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type to end is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the set value suggesting process ends.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51, if there are individual lamp portions 351 to 356 that are lit among the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35, turns off the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 (step S3313), clears (initializes) the already lit lamp information, and ends the set value suggestion process. That is, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 are extinguished when the 5R normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set. As a result, the lit individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are kept lit until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned on at any time until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, that is, the specific information specifying the non-set value. Therefore, the specified information previously presented in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and the convenience is improved when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specified information, and further when specifying or estimating the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is won, the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value in the lamp display part 35 are turned on. However, it is optional to perform the lamp lighting lottery. The individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the value may be turned on. When the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this way, the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37 is increased, or the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is divided into a route detected by the special out ball sensor 384 and a route not detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 that present the non-set values are set to either of the two states of the lit state and the extinguished state, and information specifying the non-set values is presented according to the type (number) of the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 that are in the lit state. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that allows the non-set value to be specified is presented by lighting the individual lamps 351 to 356, and the information that allows the non-set value to be estimated is not presented. Therefore, since the specific information for estimating the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information capable of specifying one non-set value is presented, the decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of the unnecessary specific information is prevented.

The lighted individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are immediately lighted by winning a lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, and the lighted individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are maintained in the lighting state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the specific information specifying the non-set value can be confirmed at any time based on whether the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit. Therefore, the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and convenience is improved when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specific information, and when specifying or estimating the set value.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, the condition is that the lamp lighting lottery is won. As a result, the degree of difficulty in meeting the specific condition is adjusted according to the winning probability of the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty in specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the degree of difficulty of lighting each of the five individual lamp portions 351 to 356 that display the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display portion 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily identified, that is, the set values are prevented from being easily recognized.

It should be noted that the lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball 373 of the crew device 37 will be lit immediately, but the execution of the lamp lighting lottery (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be indicated to the player on display means other than the lamp display unit 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), it is clearly indicated to the player that the lamp lighting lottery will be executed (that the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37), the result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly indicated to the player as shown in FIG. 69(B1) or FIG. It is clearly shown in the pattern display section 341 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crew device 37, there is a possibility that the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display portion 35 are lit. In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373) by the symbol display unit 341, even if the game ball 99 enters the special out ball 373, there is a possibility that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball 373 by the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341, that is, the individual lamps 351 to 356 are lit. can grasp.

Then, when winning the lamp lighting lottery, as shown in FIG. 69(B1), information regarding the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 to be turned on is clearly displayed. In the illustrated example, it is clearly shown that the second individual lamp portion 352 is lit. In this way, by clearly indicating the result of the lamp lighting lottery in the pattern display part 341, not only the lamp display part 35 but also the pattern display part 341 can grasp whether or not the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are lit, so that the convenience is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the pattern display section 341, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 being lit is continuously displayed during execution of the jackpot game (at least during execution of the opening/closing execution mode). That is, the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the individual lamp portion 35 that are lit are displayed in the pattern display portion 341 . It should be noted that, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, for example, in the jackpot game (at least the open/close execution mode), information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit may be displayed.

On the other hand, when the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning, an image is displayed clearly indicating that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning, as shown in FIG. 69(B1). In this way, the pattern display part 341 continuously displays the information about the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 that are lit during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode), so that the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 that are lit can be confirmed even in the pattern display part 341 without confirming the lamp display part 35, thereby improving the convenience.

Further, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only in the pattern display section 341 instead of the lamp display section 35 provided separately from the pattern display section 341 . In other words, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect in the symbol display section 341 regarding the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) described with reference to FIG.

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, an additional ending image for specifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the ending effect of the jackpot game. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, at the ending of the jackpot game, an image imitating the lamp display portion 35 is displayed in the symbol display portion 341 as the ending additional image. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), the lamp display section 35 clearly shows that only the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, and in the example shown in FIG. In this way, by displaying the lit/unlit state of the lamp display part 35 by the pattern display part 341 at the ending of the big win game, the lit/unlit states of the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 lit up to the big win game can be confirmed, thereby improving the convenience.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp display portion 35 in which the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (linearly) is employed, but the lamp display portion 35 is not limited to the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 arranged in a row, and other forms may be employed. For example, a lamp display portion 35 in which individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring as shown in FIG. 71(A), and a lamp display portion 35 in which individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. Further, the lamp display portion 35 may be one in which the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 are arranged in a zigzag pattern.

Further, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, staggered pattern, or the like may be employed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number that satisfies a specific condition during a specific period, all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is terminated when the jackpot game ends.

By the way, it is not preferable for the gaming machine to arouse the gambling spirit of the player by excessively increasing the number of paid balls. In addition, recent players tend not to want the game machine to excessively increase or decrease the number of paid balls in a short period of time, and especially players who want to enjoy a long game tend to want the game machine to gradually increase or decrease the number of paid balls.

As a method of moderating the increase and decrease of the number of balls released in the gaming machine, for example, setting the jackpot probability in the normal game state (low probability mode) high, setting the probability variable jackpot ratio in the probability variable game machine low (setting the probability variable continuation rate low), and setting the jackpot probability low in the probability variable game state (high probability mode). Especially these days, there is a tendency to set the jackpot probability low in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) in order to suppress a rapid increase in the number of balls released. Also, in order to suppress an excessive increase in the number of payout balls in the variable probability game state, it is conceivable to set the variation display time in the variation game relatively long (for example, 15 seconds or more). When the variable display time is set to be relatively long, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a ready-to-win performance pattern in which ready-to-win performance is executed after execution of high-speed variable performance is likely to be set as game performance in the variable game. This ready-to-win effect pattern is set based on the lottery result of the big win lottery, and suggests the degree of expectation for the big win in the high-speed fluctuation effect and the ready-to-win effect. Further, during the execution of the high-speed fluctuation effect and the ready-to-win effect, the advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win is appropriately executed.

However, even in the probability variable gaming state (high probability mode), most of the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are out. In addition, when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a loss, a performance pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be set, and a performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be set as the advance notice performance. Therefore, in the probability variable gaming state, the effect with low expectation for big win is likely to occur frequently, and the increasing speed of the paid out balls can be reduced. On the other hand, when a performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win is executed in a relatively long variable display time, the tempo of the variable rhythm of the variable games that are executed one after another is bad, and the player is likely to feel a sense of sluggishness, thereby reducing interest in the game. In particular, when the probability of big wins in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) is set low, the average number of times of games required until the next big wins increases and the average game time required until the next big wins becomes longer, so that the amusement of the games is further reduced.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to set the variable display time of the variable game short while setting the jackpot probability in the probability variable game state, for example, to set the variable display time to a short variable display time of about 3 seconds so that the short variable display time is easily selected. In this way, by facilitating the setting of the short fluctuation display time in the variable probability game state, for example, as shown in FIG.

However, in the short fluctuation display of about 3 seconds, although the tempo of the fluctuation games that are executed one after another is improved, it is difficult to execute a sufficient deviation effect during that time. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand what the effect is intended in the effect for the short-time fluctuation display, and it is also difficult for the player to understand the expectation that the lottery result of the big win lottery will be a big win. Therefore, even if the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm is given priority and an effect that is difficult to understand is repeated, the interest in the game may decrease. Further, if the short fluctuation display time is easily selected, the average playing time of the fluctuation game is shortened, and as a result, an excessive increase in the number of paid balls cannot be sufficiently suppressed, which hinders a gradual increase or decrease in the number of paid balls.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a predetermined game time (for example, 9 seconds) out of a plurality of game times can be set as the game time (variation display time) of the variable game for notifying that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is lost. Then, when a predetermined game time is set, as a game performance, a specific performance (for example, pseudo-continuous 3 performance) in which predetermined fluctuations (for example, pseudo fluctuations) are executed a specific number of times (for example, three times) without executing a predetermined performance (for example, advance notice performance) can be executed, or a performance in which a prescribed performance (for example, advance notice performance) is executed and predetermined fluctuations are executed less times than the specific times (for example, once) can be executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, as the game performance, a specific performance (e.g., pseudo consecutive 3 performance) in which a predetermined variation (for example, pseudo variation) is performed a specific number of times (for example, three times) without performing a predetermined performance (e.g., advance notice performance) is executed. Most of the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are failures, and when the failures continue, the specific effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, by repeating the predetermined variation, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation games to be executed one after another while preventing the delay of the game presentation, like the conventional game machine in which the short variation display time is likely to be selected. That is, in this embodiment, instead of the short-time variation display of about 3 seconds as the game time, by adopting a specific performance in which a predetermined variation is performed a specific number of times, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation games that are performed one after another.

Further, in the present embodiment, repetition of the predetermined variation makes it difficult for the player to recognize the discontinuity between the variation games (at the end of the variation game). Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ready-to-win effect has suddenly started. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is such that a predetermined variation such as a pseudo-variation is executed a specific number of times, thereby making it easier for the player to understand the intention of the effect and the degree of expectation for a big win. As a result, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-variation in the variation game can be executed with a good sense of rhythm, the tempo of the variation games to be executed one after another can be improved, the player can easily understand the intention of the performance, the degree of expectation for the big win, etc., and the decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by setting the predetermined game time to a time during which the predetermined variation can be executed a specific number of times, it is possible to prevent the average game time of the variation game from being shortened. Since this prevents the average playing time between jackpot games from being shortened, it is possible to sufficiently suppress an excessive increase in the number of paid balls and realize a gradual increase/decrease in the number of paid balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined performance (for example, notice performance) is executed as the game performance, and a performance for executing a predetermined variation less than a specific number of times (for example, once) is executed, so that when the variable games are executed one after another, the predetermined performance such as the notice performance is executed during the repetition of the predetermined variation. Here, when the predetermined variation is repeated in the variation games that are executed one after another, excessive repetition of the predetermined variation may make the progress of the game monotonous and reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, when a predetermined effect such as a notice effect is executed while the variable games executed one after another are executed at a good tempo, the variable rhythm is changed. This prevents the predetermined fluctuation from being repeated excessively, thereby preventing the progress of the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is, for example, the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, preferably the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times. Thus, by making the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation equal or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the prescribed game time by the specific number of times, the fluctuation time of each prescribed fluctuation is uniformed, and the fluctuation game time of each prescribed fluctuation in the specific performance is uniformized. As a result, it is possible to execute the predetermined variation of the specific number of times in the specific performance in the variation game at a good tempo. Therefore, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game. In particular, when the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, the time of each predetermined variation in the specific performance becomes the same, so that the tempo of the variable games executed one after another can be further improved, thereby further suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a predetermined game time (for example, 9 seconds) can be selected as the variable display time in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time-saving game state) with a high opening probability of the electric role that switches whether or not to limit the entry of balls into the (second) winning opening that triggers the jackpot lottery. Here, in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time-saving game state), when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the (second) starting port is the second probability, the transition determination is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, in the case of a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time-saving game state) in which the opening probability of the electric role object for switching the presence/absence of restriction on entering a ball into a (second) prize-winning hole, which triggers a big win lottery, is high, a predetermined game time (e.g., 9 seconds) can be selected as the variable display time, thereby facilitating repeated execution of a specific performance in which a predetermined number of times of predetermined fluctuation is executed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a predetermined game time (for example, 9 seconds) can be determined as the variable display time when the jackpot lottery is executed in the high-probability mode. In this way, when the big winning lottery is executed in the high probability mode, a predetermined game time (for example, 9 seconds) can be determined as the variable display time, so that when the big winning lottery is executed in the high probability mode, the tempo of the variable games to be executed one after another can be improved, thereby further suppressing the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, when the right to execute the variable game is reserved, a predetermined game time (for example, 9 seconds) can be determined as the variable display time. Here, when the right to execute the variable game is reserved and a predetermined game time can be determined as the variable display time, the big winning lottery and the variable game for informing the result thereof are likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, when the right to execute the variable game is reserved, a predetermined game time (e.g., 9 seconds) can be determined as the variable display time, thereby facilitating repeated execution of a specific performance in which a predetermined number of times of predetermined fluctuation is executed. This makes it possible to improve the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. In this way, the predetermined performance includes the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a big win, so that the specific performance in which the predetermined fluctuation is executed for a specific number of times is easily executed repeatedly. This makes it possible to improve the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 89, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a variation table used by the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment in the low frequency support mode and when there is no hold in the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the variation table used by the main controller 4 in the high frequency support mode with hold.

As shown in FIG. 72, the variation table A used in the low frequency support mode and when there is no hold in the high frequency support mode includes a normal jackpot variation table A (see FIG. 72 (A)), a probability variable jackpot variation table A (see FIG. 72 (B)), and an outlier variation table A (see FIG. 72 (C)), which are set according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The normal jackpot variation table A corresponds to the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15A) in the first embodiment described above, the probability variable jackpot variation table A corresponds to the probability variable jackpot variation table in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 15B), and the outlier variation table A corresponds to the outlier variation table in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 15C). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of the low-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is low, and in the case of the high-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game, the variation pattern is determined according to the lottery result of the big winning lottery as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73, the fluctuation table B used when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode includes a normal jackpot fluctuation table B (see FIG. 73 (A)), a probability variable jackpot fluctuation table B (see FIG. 73 (B)), and a loss fluctuation table B (see FIG. 73 (C)), which are set according to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery. Unlike the normal jackpot fluctuation table A (see FIG. 72(A)), the normal jackpot fluctuation table B includes a fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation display time is 9 seconds. Unlike the probability variable jackpot variation table A (see FIG. 72(B)), the probability variable jackpot variation table B includes a variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds. Unlike the deviation fluctuation table A (see FIG. 72B), the deviation fluctuation table B includes a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display time of 9 seconds. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation table B used when there is a reservation of the right to execute a variable game in the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time reduction game state) in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high includes a variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds, and 9 s can be selected as the variation display time.

In addition, in the deviation fluctuation table B (see FIG. 73(C)), in the case of deviation reach (front-rear deviation reach and reach other than front-rear deviation), there is no distribution of variation patterns with a variation display time of 9 seconds, but in the case of complete deviation, only the variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds is included. Here, in the failure type table (see FIG. 14(D)), the complete failure sorting is overwhelmingly more common than the failure reach sorting, and the perfect failure can be selected with a probability of about 84%. That is, in the deviation variation pattern table B (see FIG. 73) when there is a reservation of the right to execute a variation game in a high frequency support mode (probability variation game state and time reduction game state) in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high, a variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds can be selected with a high probability. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the reserve of the right to execute the variable game tends to accumulate up to the upper limit or a number close to it. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, a variable game with a variable display time of 9 seconds is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect is included as the variable game effect when the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display section 341 . This pseudo-continuous performance is a performance in which a pseudo-variation performance in which variation start (including re-variation start) and variation stop (including pseudo-stop) of the decoration pattern in the pattern display part 341 is set as one unit is executed once or more during one variation game. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-fluctuation effect that is executed for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) is executed once or multiple times with the upper limit number (specified number of times) set to 3 times. Therefore, by including the variation pattern of 9 seconds in the variation pattern B when the right to execute the variable game is reserved in the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time reduction game state), the pseudo continuous performance including the upper limit number of three times of the pseudo variable performance can be executed. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a variation pattern of 9 seconds is set, an effect pattern to be executed in a variable game is determined based on a jackpot pseudo-continuous effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 77) or a losing pseudo-continuous effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 78) according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. In the winning pseudo-continuous effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 78) used when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times is likely to be selected. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode in which the reservation of the right to execute the variable game tends to accumulate, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutive to lose, the pseudo-continuous performance including the pseudo-variation performance three times can be repeatedly executed, so in the high-frequency support mode in which the right to execute the variable game is likely to be held, the tempo of the variable games to be executed one after another can be improved as described above, so that the decline in the interest of the game is further suppressed.

Each pseudo-variation performance when the pseudo-variation performance is executed a plurality of times does not necessarily have to be executed in a uniform constant time, and the performance time of at least one pseudo-variation performance may be different from the performance period of other pseudo-variation performances. For example, an effect pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times in a variation pattern of 9 seconds may be executed with a combination of 2 seconds, 3 seconds and 4 seconds, a combination of 2.5 seconds, 3 seconds and 3.5 seconds, and a combination of 2.5 seconds, 2.5 seconds and 4 seconds. However, it is preferable that the execution time of each pseudo-fluctuation effect is approximately the same time, even if it is not uniform. For example, the execution time of the pseudo-variation effect is preferably -10% or more and +10% or less, more preferably -5% or more and +5% or less, based on the time obtained by dividing the variation pattern (variation display time) by the upper limit number (specific number of times) of the pseudo-variation effect. Specifically, when the variation display time of the pseudo-variation performance is 9 seconds, 3 seconds obtained by dividing this time by 3, which is the upper limit number of the pseudo-variation performance, is used as a reference, and the performance time of each pseudo-variation performance is preferably 2.7 seconds or more and 3.3 seconds, more preferably 2.85 seconds or more and 3.15 seconds. That is, the performance time of each pseudo-variation performance may be set within a range in which the pseudo-variation performance in the variation game can be executed with good tempo and the good tempo of the variation games to be executed one after another can be maintained.

Further, the variation pattern of 9 seconds in which the pseudo-variation effect is executed at least once may be set even in the low-probability mode or when there is no suspension. Also, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-variation performance is executed at least once does not necessarily have to be 9 seconds. That is, the effect variation pattern including at least one pseudo-variation effect may be set within a range that does not give the player a sense of delay, and may be, for example, 3 seconds or 6 seconds. In addition, the variation pattern of the effect including the pseudo-variation effect in which the pseudo-variation effect is at least one time does not need to be one type, and a plurality of types may be set. For example, variation patterns of 3 seconds, 6 seconds, and 9 seconds may be set, and at least one pseudo-variation effect may be executed in these variation patterns.

In addition, in the normal jackpot variation table B and the probability variable jackpot variation table B, the variation pattern with the variation display time of 9 seconds is small, and the variation pattern with the variation display time of 9 seconds is difficult to select. Since it is difficult to select the variation pattern with the variation display time of 9 seconds in the normal big win variation table B and the probability variable big win variation table B, it is difficult to select 9 seconds as the variation display time when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win (normal big win or variable probability big win). On the other hand, as described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the variation pattern with the variation display time of 9 seconds is likely to be selected. Therefore, when the variation display time in the variation game is 9 seconds, the player tends to think that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, and when the variation display time is 9 seconds, the player is informed that the lottery result is a big win, so that the player can be surprised by an unexpected event advantageous to the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the probability variable jackpot variation table B, the distribution of the variation pattern with the variation display time of 9 seconds is greatly doubled compared to the normal jackpot variation table B. In this way, in the probability variable big win variation table B, the variation display time of 9 seconds is more distributed than in the normal big win variation table B, so that when the lottery result in the big win lottery is the probability variable big win, 9 seconds is more likely to be selected as the variation display time than when the lottery result is the normal big win. Therefore, when it is notified that the lottery result is a big win when the variable display time is 9 seconds, the probability of the probability variable big win increases. As a result, when it is reported that the lottery result is a big win when the variable display time is 9 seconds, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to the subsequent trend because the expectation of the probability variable big win is increased.

In the present embodiment, the case where 9s can be selected as the variable display time regardless of whether the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win or a loss has been described, but the variation table may be set so that 9s can be selected as the variable display time at least when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a loss.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case of the high frequency support mode, that is, the case where 9 seconds can be selected as the variable display time in both the probability variable game state and the time-saving game state has been described, but at least when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the variation table should be set so that 9 seconds can be selected as the variable display time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where 9 seconds can be selected as the variable display time when the right to execute a variable game is not reserved in the low-frequency support mode and in the high-frequency support mode. However, in the low-frequency support mode, when there is no reservation of the right to execute a variable game in the high-frequency support mode, and when there are two or more or three or more reservations in the high-frequency support mode, the variation table may be set so that 9 seconds can be selected as the variable display time.

Also, the variable table may be set so that 9 seconds can be selected as the variable display time for the hold on the winning of the second starting port 315 .

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 74, the variation start processing of the present embodiment is basically the same as the variation start processing (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, but the variation pattern setting processing (step S3401) differs from the variation start processing of the first embodiment described above.

[Variation pattern setting process]
The variation pattern setting process of this embodiment differs from that of the above-described first embodiment in the variation pattern setting procedure when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, in the variation pattern setting process of the present embodiment, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, a variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds can be selected. Here, FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern setting process executed in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 75, in the variation pattern setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set (step S3501). Whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set is determined, for example, based on a flag that is set to ON based on a command transmitted from the main controller 4 when the high-frequency support mode is started, and is set to OFF based on the command transmitted from the main controller 4 when the high-frequency support mode is terminated. Then, when the MPU 41 is in the high frequency support mode (step S3501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode (step S3501: No), that is, if it is in the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3503.

<Step S3502>
If the high-frequency support mode (step S3501: Yes), MPU41, in addition to the variation game for which the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern setting process, determines whether or not there is a reservation of the right to execute a variation game (step S3502). Whether or not the right to execute the variable game is reserved can be determined by referring to the contents stored in the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area REB of the reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM412. And, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3503, and when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3502: No), shifts the process to step S3508.

<Step S3503>
If the low frequency support mode (step S3501: No), or if there is no hold in the high frequency support mode (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a normal jackpot (step S3503). Whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a normal jackpot is determined based on win/fail information stored in the execution area AE, for example. Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a normal jackpot (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3504, and when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a normal jackpot (step S3503: No), shifts the process to step S3505.

<Step S3504>
When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a normal jackpot (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern based on the normal jackpot variation table A (see FIG. 72A) (step S3504), and ends the variation pattern setting process.

<Step S3505>
When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is not a normal jackpot (step S3503: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a probability variable jackpot (step S3505). Whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a probability variable jackpot is determined based on win/fail information stored in the execution area AE, for example. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3506 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a probability variable jackpot (step S3505: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3507 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a probability variable jackpot (step S3505: No).

<Step S3506>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a probability variable jackpot (step S3505: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern based on the probability variable jackpot variation table A (see FIG. 72 (B)) (step S3506), and ends the variation pattern setting process.

<Step S3507>
If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a probability variable jackpot (step S3505: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is lost, so the change pattern is set based on the loss variation table A (see FIG. 72 (C)) (step S3507), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

<Step S3508>
When there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high-frequency support mode (step S3502: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a normal jackpot (step S3508). Whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a normal jackpot is determined, for example, on the basis of the success/failure information stored in the execution area AE. When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a normal jackpot (step S3508: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3509, and when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a normal jackpot (step S3508: No), shifts the process to step S3510.

<Step S3509>
When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a normal jackpot (step S3508: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern based on the normal jackpot variation table B (see FIG. 73A) (step S3509), and ends the variation pattern setting process.

<Step S3510>
When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is not a normal jackpot (step S3508: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a probability variable jackpot (step S3510). Whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a probability variable jackpot is determined based on win/fail information stored in the execution area AE, for example. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3511 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a probability variable jackpot (step S3510: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3512 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a probability variable jackpot (step S3510: No).

<Step S3511>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a probability variable jackpot (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern based on the probability variable jackpot variation table A (see FIG. 73 (B)) (step S3511), and ends the variation pattern setting process.

<Step S3512>
If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a probability variable jackpot (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is lost, so the change pattern is set based on the loss variation table A (see FIG. 73 (C)) (step S3512), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Thus, when the right to execute the variable game is reserved in the high-frequency support mode, the variation pattern is set based on the variation pattern table B including 9 seconds as the variation display time, and 9 seconds can be set as the variation display time according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery unlike the variation pattern as in the first embodiment.

[Production pattern determination process]
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the effect pattern determination process in step S2103 in the command determination process of FIG. 37 determines a special pseudo-continuous effect pattern when the variable display time is 9 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, since a special pseudo-continuous effect pattern is determined when the variable display time is 9 seconds, even in the normal ready-to-win effect pattern, the super ready-to-win effect pattern, and the special ready-to-win effect pattern, the effect pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect can be determined, which is also different from the above-described first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used by the sound ramp control device when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG.

As described above, the variation table B (see FIG. 73) used when there is a hold in the high frequency support mode includes a variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76, in the variation type table of this embodiment, unlike the variation type table of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38(B)), an effect pattern corresponding to a variation display time of 9 seconds is set. Specifically, the variation type table of the present embodiment includes a variation pattern command "A06" indicating that the variation display time is 9 seconds when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, a variation pattern command "B06" which indicates that the variation display time is 9 seconds when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and a variation pattern command "C06" which indicates that the variation display time is 9 seconds when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot. ", and a variation pattern command "D06" indicating that the variation display time is 9 seconds when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot pseudo-continuous effect pattern type selection table used in the sound ramp control device 5 when the fluctuation pattern command indicates that the fluctuation display time is 9 seconds and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win. FIG. The pseudo-continuous effect pattern will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, etc. First, the color of the decoration pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern will be described.

As described above, the decoration pattern is composed of numbers 1 to 9, for example. Of the numbers 1 to 9 (decorative patterns), for example, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" are displayed in blue (these are called "blue patterns"). Among the odd numbers, for example, "3" and "7" are displayed in red (these are called "red symbols"). Among the odd numbers, for example, "1", "5" and "9" other than "3" and "7" are displayed in yellow (these are referred to as "yellow symbols").

Further, the pseudo-continuous continuation item is a combination of temporary stop display of decorative symbols that clearly indicates that the pseudo-variation effect will be executed after the pseudo-variation effect (that the pseudo-continuous effect will continue). In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous continuation symbols are, for example, a combination of temporary stop display of the same color symbols other than the combination of jackpot symbols, and include pseudo-continuous continuation symbols of blue symbols, pseudo-continuous continuation symbols of yellow symbols, and pseudo-continuous continuation symbols of red symbols. In addition, the color of the number (decorative pattern) in the pseudo-continuous pattern suggests, for example, the degree of expectation for pseudo-continuous continuation, the degree of expectation for a big hit, the degree of reach generation expectation, the degree of production development expectation, etc. "Red pattern", "yellow design" and "blue design" suggest that the degree of expectation is high in this order. In other words, when the pseudo-continuation pattern of the red symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a chance-up effect is provided in which the degree of expectation for the pseudo-continuation is increased.

The pseudo-continuous continuation of blue patterns includes a pattern combination having specific regularity such as a combination of the same patterns such as ``244'', ``466'' and ``822'' in which the left pattern is a blue pattern and the middle and right patterns are different from the left pattern. Further, the pseudo-continuous continuation pattern does not necessarily have to be a combination of symbols of the same color, and as the pseudo-continuous continuation pattern of the blue pattern, for example, blue symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right patterns, and a special pattern indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect continues is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle symbol. As the special symbol, for example, an image including a character string indicating or suggesting continuation such as "NEXT", "one more time", or "continue", or an image including a character can be considered. In addition, it is conceivable that the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed after temporary stop display of a combination of symbols of the same color (separate stitches).

Pseudo-continuous continuations include quasi-continuous continuations with yellow symbols and quasi-continuous continuations with red symbols, but these quasi-continuous continuations differ from pseudo-continuous continuations with blue symbols only in the combination of numbers (colors), and the same idea is applied.

Here, returning to the explanation of FIG. 77, the jackpot pseudo-continuous performance pattern type selection table is used to determine the performance pattern when the variation display time is 9 seconds and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (when the variation pattern commands are 'A06', 'B06' and 'C06'). The failure pseudo-continuous performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 78 is used to determine the performance pattern when the variation display time is 9 seconds and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is failure (when the variation pattern command is 'D06').

In the jackpot pseudo-continuous effect pattern type selection table and the losing pseudo-continuous effect pattern type selection table, 27 effect patterns are defined by the value of the effect pattern type counter. As production patterns, there are 6 pseudo-ren 3 production patterns (pseudo-ren 3 normal production patterns A to C, pseudo-ren 3 chance production patterns A to C), 12 pseudo-ren 2 production patterns (pseudo-ren 2 normal production patterns A1 to C1, pseudo-ren 2 normal production patterns A2-C2, pseudo-ren 2 chance production patterns A1-C1, pseudo-ren 2 chance production patterns A2-C2), 6 pseudo-ren 1 production patterns (pseudo-ren 1 normal production patterns A to C). C, pseudo-run 1-chance effect patterns A to C), and three pseudo-run 0-chance effect patterns (pseudo-run 0 chance effect patterns A to C).

In the present embodiment, the pseudo-variation effect is an effect in which the pseudo-variation that completes the variation start (including the re-variation start) and the variation stop (including the pseudo-stop) of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 in one variation game in a certain time (3 seconds), and this pseudo-variation is performed once or multiple times. However, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern type selection table for the variable display time of 9 seconds from which the pseudo-continuous effect pattern can be selected is called the pseudo-continuous effect pattern type selection table. In other words, the pseudo-continuous performance pattern type selection table includes a pseudo-continuous non-continuous performance pattern of 9 seconds in which the pseudo-variable performance is not executed even once, and such a performance pattern is called a pseudo-continuous 0 performance pattern.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the pseudo-run 3 effect pattern, the pseudo-variable effect of 3 seconds is continuously executed in each of the three 3-second intervals (the first interval (0 to 3 seconds), the second interval (3 to 6 seconds) and the third interval (6 to 9 seconds)) obtained by equally dividing the 9-second variation display time of one time. The pseudo-run 3 effect patterns include pseudo-run 3 normal effect patterns A to C and pseudo-run 3 chance effect patterns A to C.

It should be noted that each section in the case of 9 seconds, which is one time of variable display time, does not necessarily have to be uniform, and at least one section may be different from the other sections. In this case, each section may be, for example, a combination of 2 seconds, 3 seconds and 4 seconds, a combination of 2.5 seconds, 3 seconds and 3.5 seconds, a combination of 2.5 seconds, 2.5 seconds and 4 seconds, or the like. However, it is preferable that each section has approximately the same time, even if it is not uniform. For example, each interval is preferably −10% or more and +10% or less, more preferably −5% or more and +5% or less, based on the time in the case of equalization (the time obtained by dividing the variable display time by the number of intervals). Specifically, when the variation pattern (variation display time) is 9 seconds and the number of segments is 3, each segment is preferably 2.7 seconds or more and 3.3 seconds, more preferably 2.85 seconds or more and 3.15 seconds, so as to be substantially the same as the standard 3 seconds. In other words, each interval can be set within a range in which the pseudo-variation in the variation game can be executed with a good sense of rhythm and the good tempo of the variation games executed one after another can be maintained.

Pseudo-run 3 normal performance patterns A to C are performance patterns in which three times of pseudo-variation performance is executed by one or both of a blue pattern and a yellow pattern, and pseudo-variation performance by a red pattern, which is a chance-up performance, is not executed.

In the pseudo-run 3 normal performance pattern A, the first pseudo-variation performance is executed with blue patterns in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the second pseudo-variation performance is executed with blue patterns in the second section (3-6 seconds), and the third pseudo-variation performance is executed with blue patterns in the third section (6-9 seconds).

Specifically, in the first pseudo-fluctuation production with blue symbols executed in the first section (0 seconds to 3 seconds), for example, as shown in FIG. A blue symbol "4", which is the same blue symbol as the right symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed as a middle symbol, thereby generating a blue symbol pseudo continuous continuation ("244" in the illustrated example).

Also, the second pseudo-variation effect with blue symbols executed in the second section (3 seconds to 6 seconds) is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-variation effect with blue symbols. For example, as shown in FIG. 80(B), in the second pseudo-fluctuation effect using blue symbols, a blue symbol "4" as the left symbol is temporarily stopped on the active line, and a blue symbol "6" different from the left symbol is temporarily stopped as the right symbol. is temporarily stopped, a pseudo-continuous blue symbol ("466" in the illustrated example) is generated.

In addition, in the third pseudo-fluctuation performance with blue patterns executed in the third section (6 to 9 seconds), after the pseudo-inciting performance is executed in the same manner as the first and second pseudo-fluctuation performances with blue patterns, decorative patterns are (mainly) stopped and displayed with a pattern combination according to the lottery result of the big win lottery for the variable game. For example, as shown in FIG. 80(C), in the third pseudo-fluctuation performance by the blue pattern, after the pseudo-inciting performance in which ``688'' as the symbol combination is likely to be stopped and displayed (main) is executed, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win, doubles (in the illustrated example, ``888''), which is the jackpot pattern combination, are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a loss, a combination of winning symbols, such as a loose pattern ("698" in the illustrated example), is stopped and displayed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 79, in the pseudo-run 3 normal effect pattern B, the first pseudo-variation effect is performed with blue symbols in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the second pseudo-variation effect is performed with blue symbols in the second section (3 to 6 seconds), and the third pseudo-variation effect is performed with yellow symbols in the third section (6 to 9 seconds).

Further, in the pseudo-run 3 normal performance pattern C, the first pseudo-variation performance is executed with blue patterns in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the second pseudo-variation performance is executed with yellow patterns in the second section (3-6 seconds), and the third pseudo-variation performance is executed with yellow patterns in the third section (6-9 seconds).

The pseudo-run 3 chance performance patterns A to C are basically the same as the pseudo-run 3 normal performance patterns A to C, but differ from the pseudo-run 3 normal performance patterns A to C in that a pseudo-variation performance with a red pattern as a chance-up performance is executed as at least one pseudo-variation performance out of three times of the pseudo-variation performance.

In the pseudo-run 3-chance performance pattern A, the first pseudo-variation performance is executed with blue patterns in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the second pseudo-variation performance is executed with yellow patterns in the second section (3-6 seconds), and the third pseudo-variation performance is executed with red patterns in the third section (6-9 seconds). That is, the pseudo-run 3-chance effect pattern A is a effect pattern in which the pseudo-fluctuation effect is stepped up in the order of blue symbol→yellow symbol→red symbol.

Specifically, the first pseudo-variation performance with blue symbols executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds) is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-variation performance with blue symbols in the pseudo-run 3 normal performance pattern A, as shown in FIG.

Further, in the second pseudo-fluctuation effect by the yellow symbol executed in the second section (3 seconds to 6 seconds), for example, as shown in FIG. A yellow symbol "5", which is the same yellow symbol as the right symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed, thereby generating a yellow symbol quasi-continuous pattern ("155" in the illustrated example).

In addition, in the third pseudo-variation production by the red symbol executed in the third section (6 seconds to 9 seconds), as shown in FIG. 81(C), for example, as shown in FIG. After that, (book) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with a symbol combination according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game. For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the combination of jackpot symbols ("888" in the illustrated example) is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is a loss, a combination of winning symbols, such as a loose pattern (“397” in the illustrated example), is stopped and displayed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 79, in the pseudo-run 3-chance effect pattern B, the first pseudo-variation effect is performed with blue symbols in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the second pseudo-variation effect is performed with blue symbols in the second section (3 to 6 seconds), and the third pseudo-variation effect is performed with red symbols in the third section (6 to 9 seconds).

Further, in the pseudo-run 3-chance performance pattern C, the first pseudo-variation performance is performed with blue symbols in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the second pseudo-variation performance is performed with red symbols in the second section (3-6 seconds), and the third pseudo-variation performance is performed with red symbols in the third section (6-9 seconds).

Further, in the pseudo-run 2 performance pattern, a 6-second pseudo-variation performance accompanied by a notice performance is executed in two sections of the first section (0-3 seconds) and the second section (3-6 seconds), or the second section (3-6 seconds) and the third section (6-9 seconds), and the pseudo-variation performance of 3 seconds is executed in the remaining section. That is, the pseudo-continuous 2 performance pattern includes a performance pattern in which a pseudo-variation performance of 6 seconds accompanied by an advance notice performance is continuously executed after a pseudo-variation performance of 3 seconds, and a performance pattern in which a pseudo-variation performance of 3 seconds is continuously executed after the pseudo-variation performance of 6 seconds accompanied by the notice performance. Specifically, the pseudo-run 2 effect patterns include pseudo-run 2 normal effect patterns A1-C1, pseudo-run 2 normal effect patterns A2-C2, pseudo-run 2 chance effect patterns A1-C1, and pseudo-run 2 chance effect patterns A2-C2.

Here, the advance notice performance is decided separately from the main performance (background performance) which is continuously executed from when the decoration pattern in the variable game performance is variably displayed until it is stopped and displayed, and is the performance which is executed in the middle of this main performance. This notice effect includes effects that indicate or suggest events that may occur in the future in the variable game, such as effects that suggest the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable game, and express or suggest the development destination of the effect in the variable game effect.

The advance notice effect includes, for example, a dialogue effect, a step-up effect, a mini character effect, a cut-in effect, a voice effect, an operation button effect, a character actuation effect, and a composite effect of two or more of these effects. Examples of compound effects include a step-up effect with dialogue, a cut-in effect with dialogue, a step-up effect with voice, a cut-in effect with voice, a dialogue effect by operating an operation button, a step-up effect by operating an operation button, a cut-in effect by operating an operation button, and a role actuation effect by operating an operation button.

In the pseudo-run 2 normal performance patterns A1 to C1, the first pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), and the second pseudo-variation performance of 6 seconds accompanied by the advance notice performance is executed in the two sections of the second section (3 to 6 seconds) and the third section (6 to 9 seconds). In the pseudo-run 2 normal performance patterns A1 to C1, two pseudo-variation performances are executed by one or both of the blue pattern and the yellow pattern, and the pseudo-variation performance by the red pattern, which is the chance-up performance, is not executed. For example, in the pseudo-run 2 normal performance pattern A1, the first pseudo-variation performance with blue symbols is performed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), and the second pseudo-variation performance of 6 seconds with blue symbols accompanied by advance notice performance is performed in the two sections of the second section (3 to 6 seconds) and the third section (6 to 9 seconds). The first pseudo-fluctuation effect with blue symbols in the pseudo-run 2 normal effect pattern A1 is executed in the same manner as the first pseudo-variation effect in the above-described pseudo-run 3 normal A effect pattern (see, for example, FIG. 80(A)). In addition, the second pseudo-fluctuation performance by the blue pattern accompanied by the advance notice performance in the pseudo-run 2 normal performance pattern A1 is executed at the same time as the start of the pseudo-influence performance by the blue pattern, or after the start of the pseudo-influence performance, and after the end of the advance notice performance, the doubles or the winning number are stop-displayed according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, the second pseudo-variation performance by the blue pattern accompanied by the advance notice performance in the pseudo-continuous 2 normal performance pattern A1 may be such that the notice performance of 3 seconds is executed first, and then the second pseudo-variation performance by the blue pattern is executed for 3 seconds after the end of this advance notice performance. That is, the pseudo-run 2 normal performance pattern may execute the first pseudo-variation performance in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the advance notice performance in the second section (3 to 6 seconds), and the second pseudo-variation performance in the third section (3 to 6 seconds). In addition, the pseudo-inciting effect in the second pseudo-fluctuation effect may be started during execution of the advance notice effect.

Here, FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the second pseudo-fluctuation effect of the blue symbol accompanying the advance notice effect in the pseudo-run 2 normal effect pattern A1. As shown in FIGS. 82(A), 82(B1) and 82(B2), in the second pseudo-fluctuation effect of 6 seconds of the pseudo-continuous 2 normal effect pattern A1, the notice effect is executed as a button operation effect at the same time as the start of the pseudo stir effect with the blue pattern or after the pseudo stir effect is started. In this button operation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 82(A), an image simulating the operation button 20 is displayed on the pattern display section 341, and when the operation button 20 is operated by the player while the image simulating the operation button 20 is being displayed (during the button operation acceptance period), the false notice effect shown in FIG. 82(B1) or the chance notice effect shown in FIG. 82(B2) is executed. In the false notice effect shown in FIG. 82(B1), an image of "..." is displayed, and in the chance notice effect shown in FIG. 82(B2), an image of "CHANCE" is displayed.

When the operation button 20 is not operated by the player during the display of the image simulating the operation button 20, the fake notice performance or the chance notice performance may not be executed. Also, in the false notice effect and the chance notice effect, an image different from that shown in FIG. 82 (B1) and FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 80(C), the pseudo-flashing effect by the blue pattern is continued even after the end of the button operation effect, and according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, double eyes (see FIG. 80(D1)) or losing eyes (see FIG. 80(D2)) are stop-displayed.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous 2 normal performance pattern B1, after the first pseudo-variation performance with the blue pattern is executed, the second pseudo-variation performance with the yellow pattern accompanied by the notice performance is executed for 6 seconds. Further, in the pseudo-continuous 2 normal performance pattern C1, after the first pseudo-variation performance with yellow symbols is executed, the second pseudo-variation performance with yellow symbols accompanied by notice performance is executed for 6 seconds.

Note that the advance notice effect in the second pseudo-fluctuation effect in the pseudo-run 2 normal effect patterns B1 and C1 is executed in the same manner as the pseudo-run 2 normal effect pattern A1.

Returning to the description of FIG. 79, in the pseudo-run 2 normal effect patterns A2-C2, the first pseudo-variation effect of 6 seconds is executed with the advance notice effect in the two zones of the first zone (0-3 seconds) and the second zone (3-6 seconds), and the second pseudo-variation effect is executed in the third zone (6-9 seconds). The pseudo-run 2 normal performance patterns A2 to C2 are performance patterns in which two pseudo-variation performances are executed by at least one or both of a blue pattern and a yellow pattern, and the pseudo-variation performance by a red pattern, which is a chance-up performance, is not executed. The notice effect in the first pseudo-fluctuation effect in the pseudo-run 2 normal effect patterns A2-C2 is executed in the same way as the notice effect in the second pseudo-variation effect in the above-described pseudo-continue 2 normal effect patterns A1-C1.

Further, in the pseudo-run 2 normal effect pattern A2, the first pseudo-fluctuation effect of 6 seconds is executed with blue symbols, and the second pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed with blue symbols. In the pseudo-run 2 normal presentation pattern B2, the first pseudo-fluctuation presentation of 6 seconds is performed with blue symbols, and the second pseudo-variation presentation is performed with yellow symbols. In the pseudo-run 2 normal presentation pattern C2, the first pseudo-fluctuation presentation of 6 seconds is performed with yellow symbols, and the second pseudo-variation presentation is performed with yellow symbols.

In the pseudo-continuous two-chance performance patterns A1 to C1, the first pseudo-variation performance is executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), and the second pseudo-variation performance of 6 seconds accompanied by the advance notice performance is executed in the two sections of the second section (3 to 6 seconds) and the third section (6 to 9 seconds). Further, in the pseudo consecutive 2-chance production patterns A1 to C1, at least one of the two pseudo-variation productions is a production pattern executed as a pseudo-variation production with red symbols, which is a chance-up production. The advance notice performance in the second pseudo-variation performance in the pseudo-run 2-chance performance patterns A1 to C1 is executed in the same manner as the advance notice performance in the second pseudo-variation performance in the above-described pseudo-run 2 normal performance patterns A1 to C1.

Further, in the pseudo consecutive 2-chance performance pattern A1, the first pseudo-variation performance is executed with a blue pattern, and the second pseudo-variation performance of 6 seconds is executed with a red pattern, which is a chance-up performance. In the pseudo-continuous two-chance performance pattern B1, the first pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed with a yellow pattern, and the second pseudo-variation performance of 6 seconds is executed with a red pattern that is a chance-up performance. In the pseudo-continuous two-chance performance pattern C1, the first pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed by the red symbol which is the chance-up performance, and the second pseudo-variation performance of 6 seconds is executed by the red symbol.

In the pseudo-continuous two-chance performance patterns A2 to C2, the first pseudo-fluctuation performance of 6 seconds accompanied by the advance notice performance is executed in the two segments of the first segment (0 to 3 seconds) and the second segment (3 to 6 seconds), and the second pseudo-variation performance is executed in the third segment (6 to 9 seconds). The advance notice performance in the first pseudo-fluctuation performance in the pseudo-run 2-chance performance patterns A2-C2 is executed in the same manner as the advance notice performance in the second pseudo-variation performance in the above-described pseudo-run 2 normal performance patterns A1-C1.

Further, in the pseudo consecutive 2-chance performance pattern A2, the first pseudo-variation performance of 6 seconds is executed with blue symbols, and the second pseudo-variation performance is executed with red symbols, which is a chance-up performance. In the pseudo-continuous two-chance performance pattern B2, the first pseudo-fluctuation performance of 6 seconds is executed with a yellow symbol, and the second pseudo-variation performance is executed with a red symbol, which is a chance-up performance. In the pseudo consecutive two-chance performance pattern C2, the first pseudo-fluctuation performance of 6 seconds is executed by the red pattern as the chance-up performance, and the second-time pseudo-variation performance is also executed by the red pattern as the chance-up performance.

In the pseudo-run 1 normal performance pattern, a pseudo-fluctuation performance with a blue pattern or a yellow pattern is executed in one of the first section (0 to 3 seconds) and the third section (6 to 9 seconds), and the notice performance is executed in the remaining two sections. The pseudo-run 1 normal effect pattern includes a pseudo-run 1 normal A effect pattern, a pseudo-run 1 normal B effect pattern, and a pseudo-run 1 normal C effect pattern.

In the pseudo-run 1 normal A performance pattern, after the pseudo-fluctuation performance with a blue pattern is executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the notice performance of 6 seconds is executed in the second section (3 to 6 seconds) and the third section (6 to 9 seconds). In the pseudo-run 1 normal B performance pattern, after the pseudo-fluctuation performance with a yellow pattern is executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the notice performance of 6 seconds is executed in the second section (3 to 6 seconds) and the third section (6 to 9 seconds). In the pseudo-run 1 normal C performance pattern, after the announcement performance of 6 seconds is executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds) and the second section (3 to 6 seconds), the pseudo variable performance by the blue pattern is executed in the third section (6 to 9 seconds).

The notice effect in the pseudo-run 1 normal effect pattern may be the same as the notice effect in the pseudo-run 2 effect pattern (see FIGS. 82(A), 82(B1) and 82(B2)), but may be another notice effect. For example, a roulette effect shown in FIG. 83 can be employed as the button operation effect. In this roulette effect, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a roulette effect is executed in which selection determination elements (dark colored portions in FIG. 83(A)) for determining a selected section among a plurality of divided sections sequentially change, for example, clockwise. Images of "...?"

Then, in the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a button operation effect is executed in which an image simulating the operation button 20 is displayed on the pattern display portion 341, and when the operation button 20 is operated by the player while the image simulating the operation button 20 is being displayed (during the button operation acceptance period), the selection determination element is stopped at "...?" ) is executed.

When the operation button 20 is not operated by the player during the display of the image simulating the operation button 20, the fake notice performance or the chance notice performance may not be executed, but when the image simulating the operation button 20 is not displayed (when the button operation reception period ends), it may be forcibly executed. Further, in the false notice effect and the chance notice effect, an image different from that shown in FIG. 83 (C1) and FIG.

Returning to the description of FIG. 79, in the pseudo consecutive 1-chance effect pattern, a pseudo-fluctuation effect with a red pattern as a chance-up effect is executed in one of the first section (0 to 3 seconds) and the third section (6 to 9 seconds), and in the remaining two sections, the advance notice effect or the chance background effect (the effect with a high expectation of big win among the effects executed behind the decorative numbers) is executed. The pseudo-run 1-chance effect pattern includes a pseudo-run 1-chance A effect pattern, a pseudo-run 1-chance B effect pattern, and a pseudo-run 1-chance C effect pattern.

In the pseudo consecutive 1-chance A performance pattern, after a pseudo-fluctuation performance with a red pattern as a chance-up performance is executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), a notice performance of 6 seconds is executed in the second section (3 to 6 seconds) and the third section (6 to 9 seconds). In the pseudo consecutive 1-chance B performance pattern, after a pseudo-fluctuation performance with a red pattern as a chance-up performance is executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the chance background performance A for 6 seconds is executed in the second section (3 to 6 seconds) and the third section (6 to 9 seconds). In the pseudo consecutive 1-chance C performance pattern, after the advance notice performance of 6 seconds is executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds) and the second section (3 to 6 seconds), the pseudo fluctuation performance by the red pattern as the chance up performance is executed in the third section (6 to 9 seconds).

In the pseudo consecutive 0-chance performance pattern, the pseudo fluctuation performance and the advance notice performance are not executed, and the chance background performance of 9s is executed over three sections of the first section (0 to 3 seconds) to the third section (6 to 9 seconds). The pseudo-run 0-chance performance patterns include a pseudo-run 0-chance A performance pattern in which the chance background performance A is executed, a quasi-run 0-chance B performance pattern in which the chance background performance B is executed, and a quasi-run 0-chance C performance pattern in which the chance background performance C is executed. Incidentally, the chance background effect is a effect with a high expectation of a big win among the effects executed behind the decorative numbers.

The pseudo consecutive 0 effect pattern does not necessarily have to be executed as a chance effect. Further, the pseudo consecutive 0 performance pattern may be a performance pattern in which a failure performance completed in each of the first section (0 to 3 seconds), the second section (3 seconds to 6 seconds) and the third section (6 seconds to 9 seconds) is executed, or a performance pattern in which the failure performance over two sections and the failure performance completed in one section are executed. When a pseudo-run 0 performance pattern in which such a loss performance is executed is included, or when the pseudo-run continues due to a loss, the pseudo-run continuation point of the same color pattern can be set as a chance eye (chance-up performance). That is, by setting the selection rate of pseudo-continuous continuation symbols of the same color to be low, the appearance rate of quasi-continuous continuation symbols of the same color can be lowered to achieve a chance-up effect.

Here, FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a normal reach effect pattern type determination table with variable display time of 30 seconds when there is a hold in the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state).

In the normal reach effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 84, effect patterns X6 to X32 are determined in addition to the effect patterns X1 to X5 (see FIG. 39A) in the first embodiment as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss). Effect patterns X6 to X32 are effect patterns in which a normal ready-to-win effect is executed after execution of a pseudo-continuous effect similar to the pseudo-continuous effect determined when the variable display time is 9 seconds.

In addition, in the normal reach effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 84, the distribution of the normal reach effect patterns X1 to X5 is set high, and the distribution of the normal reach effect patterns X6 to X32 is set to be small. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is the normal ready-to-win performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the normal ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result.

On the other hand, if there is no suspension in the high-frequency support mode (variable probability game state or short-time game state), and if the variable display time is 30 seconds in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the normal reach effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG.

That is, when there is a hold in a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), normal ready-to-win performance patterns X6 to X32 for executing pseudo-continuous performance can be selected with a low probability when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is either a big win or a loss. By thus selecting the normal ready-to-win performance patterns X6 to X32 for executing the pseudo-continuous performance, the pseudo-continuous performance can be executed not only when the variable display time is 9 seconds but also when the normal ready-to-win performance develops. As a result, even when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, development to the normal ready-to-win performance can be expected, and the continuation of the pseudo-continuous performance prevents the progress of the game from becoming monotonous when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode. In addition, since the normal ready-to-win performance patterns X6 to X32 in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed can be selected even when the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, even when the pseudo-continuous performance which is easily selected when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode is executed, it is possible to expect that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win. In particular, by selecting the normal ready-to-win performance patterns X6 to X32 in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed with a low probability, the pseudo-continuous performance which is likely to be selected when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode is executed, so that a surprise jackpot game can be given to the player who believes that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a failure, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, FIG. 85 is a diagram showing each normal ready-to-win effect pattern aspect. As shown in FIG. 85, the normal ready-to-win production patterns X1 to X5 are the same as the normal ready-to-win production patterns X1 to X5 in the first embodiment described above, and are productions in which, after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production in which decorative symbols are changed at high speed until reaching the ready-to-win pattern, the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state and the normal ready-to-win production is executed as an advanced production, and the final individual production type is the normal ready-to-win production (NR).

The normal ready-to-win effect patterns X6 to X8 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo consecutive 3 normal effect is executed. The pseudo-run 3 normal performance in the normal reach performance patterns X6 to X8 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 3 normal performance pattern in the above-mentioned pseudo-run 3 normal performance pattern in which the variable display time is 9 seconds, but in the pseudo-run 3 normal performance, the third pseudo-fluctuation performance is not terminated by the stop display of the decoration pattern, but ends in the ready-to-win state in which the left and right symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol and the middle symbol is variably displayed. This is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-ream 3 normal effect.

In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X6, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 3 normal A effect similar to the pseudo-run 3 normal A effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X7, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 3 normal B effect similar to the pseudo-run 3 normal B effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X8, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 3 normal C effect similar to the pseudo-run 3 normal C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The normal reach effect patterns X9 to X11 are effect patterns in which the normal reach effect is executed after the pseudo consecutive 3-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-run 3-chance performance in the normal ready-to-win performance patterns X9 to X11 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 3-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 3-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 3-chance performance pattern in which the variable display time is 9 seconds. It is different from the above-mentioned pseudo consecutive 3 chance production in that point.

In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X9, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 3-chance A effect similar to the pseudo-run 3-chance A effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X10, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 3-chance B effect similar to the pseudo-run 3-chance B effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X11, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 3-chance C effect similar to the pseudo-run 3-chance C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The normal ready-to-win effect patterns X12 to X17 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo consecutive 2 normal effect is executed. The pseudo-run 2 normal effect in the normal reach effect patterns X12 to X17 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 2 normal effect pattern in the above-mentioned pseudo-run 2 normal effect pattern in which the variable display time is 9 seconds. different from

In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X12, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal A1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal A1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X13, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal B1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal B1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X14, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal C1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal C1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X15, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal A2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal A2 effect pattern ends in the ready state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X16, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal B2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal B2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X17, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal C2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal C2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The normal ready-to-win effect patterns X18 to X23 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo consecutive 2-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-run 2-chance performance in the normal ready-to-win performance patterns X18 to X23 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 2-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 2-chance performance pattern in the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 2-chance performance in that the pseudo-running 2-chance performance is not terminated by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed with the same pattern and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X18, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance A1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance A1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X19, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance B1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance B1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X20, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance C1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance C1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X21, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance A2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance A2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X22, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance B2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance B2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the performance pattern X23, the normal ready-to-win performance is executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance C2 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance C2 performance pattern is completed in the ready-to-win state.

The normal ready-to-win effect patterns X24 to X26 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo consecutive 1 normal effect is executed. The pseudo-run 1 normal performance in the normal reach performance patterns X24 to X26 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 1 normal performance pattern in the pseudo-run 1 normal performance pattern in the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 1 normal performance in that the pseudo-run 1 normal performance is executed once, not by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed with the same pattern and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X24, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 1 normal A effect similar to the pseudo-run 1 normal A effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X25, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 1 normal B effect similar to the pseudo-run 1 normal B effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X26, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 1 normal C effect similar to the pseudo-run 1 normal C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The normal ready-to-win effect patterns X27 to X29 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo consecutive one-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-run 1-chance performance in the normal ready-to-win performance patterns X27 to X29 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 1-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 1-chance performance pattern of the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but it is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 1-chance performance in that it is not terminated by the stop display of the decoration pattern but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stopped and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X27, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 1-chance A effect similar to the pseudo-run 1-chance A effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X28, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run 1-chance B effect similar to the pseudo-run 1-chance B effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X29, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo-run one-chance C effect similar to the pseudo-run one-chance C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The normal ready-to-win effect patterns X30 to X32 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo consecutive 0-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-run 0-chance performance in the performance pattern normal reach X30 to X32 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 0-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 0-chance performance pattern of the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but it is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 1-chance performance in that it is not terminated by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed with the same pattern and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the normal ready-to-win performance pattern X30, the normal ready-to-win performance is executed after the pseudo-running 0-chance A performance similar to the pseudo-running 0-chance A performance pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win performance pattern X31, the normal ready-to-win performance is executed after the pseudo-running 0-chance B performance similar to the pseudo-running 0-chance B performance pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the normal ready-to-win effect pattern X32, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed after the pseudo consecutive 0-chance C effect similar to the pseudo consecutive 0-chance C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

Here, FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a super reach effect pattern type determination table with variable display time of 60 seconds when there is a hold in the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state).

In the super ready-to-win effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 86, in addition to the super ready-to-win effect patterns Y1 to Y5 (see FIG. 39B) in the first embodiment described above, super ready-to-win effect patterns Y6 to Y32 are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss). The super ready-to-win effect patterns Y6 to Y32 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-continuous effect similar to the pseudo-continuous effect determined when the variable display time is 9 seconds.

In addition, in the super ready-to-win effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 86, the allocation of the super ready-to-win effect patterns Y1 to Y5 is set high, and the allocation of the super ready-to-win effect patterns Y6 to Y32 is set to be small. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is the super ready-to-win performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the super ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result.

On the other hand, if there is no suspension in the high-frequency support mode (variable probability game state or short-time game state), and if the variable display time is 60 seconds in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the super ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result of the big hit lottery, referring to the super ready-to-win effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG.

That is, when there is a hold in a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y6 to Y32 for executing the pseudo-continuous performance can be selected with a low probability when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is either a big win or a loss. By thus selecting the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y6 to Y32 for executing the pseudo-continuous performance, the pseudo-continuous performance can be executed not only when the variable display time is 9 seconds but also when the super ready-to-win performance develops. As a result, even when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the development to the super ready-to-win performance can be expected, and the continuation of the pseudo-continuous performance prevents the progress of the game from becoming monotonous when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode. Further, the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y6 to Y32 for executing the pseudo-continuous performance can be selected even when the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, so that even when the pseudo-continuous performance which is easily selected when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode is executed, it is possible to expect that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win. In particular, by selecting the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y6 to Y32 in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed with a low probability, the pseudo-continuous performance which is likely to be selected when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode is executed, whereby a surprise jackpot game can be given to the player who believes that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a failure, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Moreover, FIG. 87 is a figure which shows each super ready-to-win production pattern aspect. As shown in FIG. 87, the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y1 to Y5 are the same as the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y1 to Y5 in the first embodiment described above, and are effects in which the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win state after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance in which the decorative symbols are changed at high speed, and the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed as development effects, and the final individual effect type is the super ready-to-win effect (SP).

The super ready-to-win effect patterns Y6 to Y8 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 3 normal effect is executed. The pseudo-run 3 normal performance in the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y6 to Y8 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 3 normal performance pattern in the pseudo-run 3 normal performance pattern in the above-mentioned pseudo-run 3 normal performance pattern in which the variable display time is 9 seconds. It is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-ream 3 normal effect.

In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y6, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 3 normal A effect similar to the pseudo-run 3 normal A effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y7, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 3 normal B effect similar to the pseudo-run 3 normal B effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y8, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 3 normal C effect similar to the pseudo-run 3 normal C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The super ready-to-win effect patterns Y9 to Y11 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive three-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-run 3-chance performance in the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y9 to Y11 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 3-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 3-chance performance pattern of the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 3-chance performance in that it is not terminated by the stop display of the decoration pattern but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y9, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 3-chance A effect similar to the pseudo-run 3-chance A effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win performance pattern Y10, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 3-chance B effect similar to the pseudo-run 3-chance B effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y11, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 3-chance C effect similar to the pseudo-run 3-chance C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The super ready-to-win effect patterns Y12 to Y17 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 2 normal effect is executed. The pseudo-run 2 normal performance in the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y12 to Y17 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 2 normal performance pattern in the pseudo-run 2 normal performance pattern in the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 2 normal performance in that the pseudo-running 2 normal performance is executed twice, not by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ends in the ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y12, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal A1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal A1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y13, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal B1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal B1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y14, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal C1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal C1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y15, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal A2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal A2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y16, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal B2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal B2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y17, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal C2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal C2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The super ready-to-win effect patterns Y18 to Y23 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive two-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-run 2-chance performance in the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y18 to Y23 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 2-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 2-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 2-chance performance pattern in which the variation display time is 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 2-chance performance in that the pseudo-variation performance is not terminated by the stop display of the decoration pattern but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y18, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance A1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance A1 effect pattern ends in the ready state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y19, normal ready-to-win effect and super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance B1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance B1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y20, normal ready-to-win effect and super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance C1 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance C1 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y21, normal ready-to-win effect and super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance A2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance A2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y22, normal ready-to-win effect and super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance B2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance B2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y23, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance C2 effect similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance C2 effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The super ready-to-win effect patterns Y24 to Y26 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 1 normal effect is executed. The pseudo-run 1 normal performance in the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y24 to Y26 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 1 normal performance pattern in the pseudo-run 1 normal performance pattern in the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 1 normal performance in that the pseudo-run 1 normal performance is executed once, not by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y24, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 1 normal A effect similar to the pseudo-run 1 normal A effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y25, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 1 normal B effect similar to the pseudo-run 1 normal B effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y26, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 1 normal C effect similar to the pseudo-run 1 normal C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The super ready-to-win effect patterns Y27 to Y29 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive one-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-run 1-chance performance in the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y27 to Y29 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 1-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 1-chance performance pattern in the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 1-chance performance in that the pseudo-variation performance is executed once, instead of being terminated by the stop display of the decoration pattern, but ending in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y27, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 1-chance A effect similar to the pseudo-run 1-chance A effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y28, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 1-chance B effect similar to the pseudo-run 1-chance B effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y29, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo-run 1-chance C effect similar to the pseudo-run 1-chance C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The super ready-to-win effect patterns Y30 to Y32 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 0-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-run 0-chance performance in the super ready-to-win performance patterns Y30 to Y32 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 0-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-running 0-chance performance pattern in the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 1-chance performance in that it is not terminated by the stop display of the decorative pattern but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y30, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 0-chance A effect similar to the pseudo consecutive 0-chance A effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y31, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 0-chance B effect similar to the pseudo consecutive 0-chance B effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the super ready-to-win effect pattern Y32, the normal ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 0-chance C effect similar to the pseudo consecutive 0-chance C effect pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

Here, FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a special reach production pattern type determination table with variable display time of 90 seconds when there is a hold in the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state).

In the special ready-to-win effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 88, special effect patterns Z6 to Z32 are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss), in addition to the special effect patterns Z1 to Z5 (see FIG. 39C) in the first embodiment. The special performance patterns Z6 to Z32 are performance patterns in which a normal ready-to-win performance, a super ready-to-win performance and a special ready-to-win performance are executed after execution of a pseudo-continuous performance similar to the pseudo-continuous performance determined when the variable display time is 9 seconds.

In addition, in the special ready-to-reach effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 88, the distribution of the special effect patterns Z1 to Z5 is set to be high, and the distribution of the special effect patterns Z6 to Z32 is set to be small. When determining that the variation type (performance pattern) is the special ready-to-win performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special ready-to-win performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result.

On the other hand, when there is no suspension in the high-frequency support mode (variable probability game state or short-time game state), and when the variable display time is 90 seconds in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the special reach effect pattern type determination table shown in FIG.

That is, when there is a hold in a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), the special performance patterns Z6 to Z32 for executing the pseudo-continuous performance can be selected with a low probability when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is either a big win or a loss. Thus, the performance patterns Z6 to Z32 for executing the pseudo-continuous performance can be selected, so that the pseudo-continuous performance can be executed not only when the variable display time is 9 seconds but also when the special ready-to-win performance develops. As a result, even when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, development to the special ready-to-win performance can be expected, and the continuation of the pseudo-continuous performance prevents the progress of the game from being monotonous when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode. Further, the special performance patterns Z6 to Z32 for executing the pseudo-continuous performance can be selected even when the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, so that even when the pseudo-continuous performance which is easily selected when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode is executed, it is possible to expect that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win. In particular, the special performance patterns Z6 to Z32 for executing the pseudo-continuous performance are selected at a low probability, so that the pseudo-continuous performance which is easily selected when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode is executed, whereby a surprise jackpot game can be awarded to the player who believes that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a failure, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Moreover, FIG. 89 is a figure which shows each special reach production|presentation pattern aspect. As shown in FIG. 89, the special production patterns Z1 to Z5 are the same as the special ready-to-win production patterns Z1 to CZ5 (see FIG. 39(C)) in the first embodiment described above, and after the high-speed fluctuation production of the decoration pattern until the ready-to-win pattern is completed, the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state and the normal ready-to-win production, the super ready-to-win production and the special ready-to-win production are executed as the development production, and the final individual production type is the special ready-to-win production (SPSP). There is.

The special effect patterns Z6 to Z8 are effect patterns in which a normal ready-to-win effect, a super ready-to-win effect, and a special ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 3 normal effect is executed. The pseudo-run 3 normal effect in the special effect patterns Z6 to Z8 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 3 normal effect pattern in the pseudo-run 3 normal effect pattern in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect pattern with a variable display time of 9 seconds. It is different from pseudo-ren 3 normal production.

In the special performance pattern Z6, the normal ready-to-win performance, the super ready-to-win performance, and the special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run 3 normal A performance similar to the pseudo-run 3 normal A performance pattern ends in the reach state. In the special performance pattern Z7, the normal ready-to-win performance, the super ready-to-win performance, and the special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run 3 normal B performance similar to the pseudo-run 3 normal B performance pattern ends in the reach state. In the special performance pattern Z8, the normal ready-to-win performance, the super ready-to-win performance, and the special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run 3 normal C performance similar to the pseudo-run 3 normal C performance pattern ends in the reach state.

The special effect patterns Z9 to Z11 are effect patterns in which a normal ready-to-win effect, a super ready-to-win effect, and a special ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 3-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-run 3-chance performance in the special performance patterns Z9 to Z11 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 3-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 3-chance performance pattern of the variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 3-chance performance in that the pseudo-variation performance of 3 seconds is executed three times instead of being terminated by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ending in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the special performance pattern Z9, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run 3-chance A performance similar to the pseudo-run 3-chance A performance pattern ends in the reach state. In the special performance pattern Z10, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance and special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run 3-chance B performance similar to the pseudo-run 3-chance B performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z11, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run 3-chance C performance similar to the pseudo-run 3-chance C performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state.

The special effect patterns Z12 to Z17 are effect patterns in which a normal ready-to-win effect, a super ready-to-win effect, and a special ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 2 normal effect is executed. The pseudo-run 2 normal performance in the special performance patterns Z12 to Z17 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 2 normal performance pattern in the pseudo-run 2 normal performance pattern in the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 2 normal performance in that it is not terminated by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the special performance pattern Z12, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal A1 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal A1 performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z13, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 2 normal B1 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal B1 performance pattern ends in ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z14, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 2 normal C1 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal C1 performance pattern ends in ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z15, the normal ready-to-win performance, the super ready-to-win performance, and the special ready-to-reach performance are executed after the pseudo-run 2 normal A2 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal A2 performance pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z16, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 2 normal B2 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal B2 performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z17, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 2 normal C2 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2 normal C2 performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state.

The special effect patterns Z18 to Z23 are effect patterns in which a normal ready-to-win effect, a super ready-to-win effect, and a special ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive two-chance effect is executed. The special performance patterns Z18 to Z23 are performances in which the pseudo-variable performance is executed twice basically in the same manner as the pseudo-run 2-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 2-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-run 2-chance performance pattern whose variable display time is 9 seconds, but are different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 2-chance performance in that they are not terminated by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but are terminated in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed with the same pattern and the middle pattern is variably displayed.

In the special performance pattern Z18, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 2-chance A1 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance A1 performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z19, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 2-chance B1 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance B1 performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z20, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 2-chance C1 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance C1 performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z21, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 2-chance A2 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance A2 performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z22, a normal ready-to-win performance, a super ready-to-win performance, and a special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run 2-chance B2 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance B2 performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z23, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 2-chance C2 performance similar to the pseudo-run 2-chance C2 performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state.

The special effect patterns Z24 to Z26 are effect patterns in which the normal ready-to-win effect, the super ready-to-win effect, and the special ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 1 normal effect is executed. The pseudo-run 1 normal performance in the special performance patterns Z24 to Z26 is basically the same as the pseudo-run 1 normal performance pattern in the pseudo-run 1 normal performance pattern in the above-mentioned variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-run 1 normal performance in that the pseudo-run 1 normal performance is executed once, not by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the special performance pattern Z24, the normal ready-to-win performance, the super ready-to-win performance, and the special ready-to-reach performance are executed after the pseudo-run 1 normal A performance similar to the pseudo-run 1 normal A performance pattern ends in the ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z25, the normal ready-to-win performance, the super ready-to-win performance, and the special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run 1 normal B performance similar to the pseudo-run 1 normal B performance pattern ends in the reach state. In the special performance pattern Z26, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 1 normal C performance similar to the pseudo-run 1 normal C performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state.

The special effect patterns Z27 to Z29 are effect patterns in which a normal ready-to-win effect, a super ready-to-win effect, and a special ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive one-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-continuous 1-chance performance in the special performance patterns Z27 to Z29 is basically the same as the pseudo-continuous 1-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-continuous 1-chance performance pattern of the variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous 1-chance performance in that the pseudo-variable performance is not terminated by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ends in a ready-to-win state in which the same pattern is stopped and the middle pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

In the special performance pattern Z27, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run 1-chance A performance similar to the pseudo-run 1-chance A performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z28, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after pseudo-run one-chance B performance similar to the pseudo-run one-chance B performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z29, the normal ready-to-win performance, the super ready-to-win performance and the special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-run one-chance C performance similar to the pseudo-run one-chance C performance pattern ends in the ready-to-win state.

The special effect patterns Z30 to Z32 are effect patterns in which a normal ready-to-win effect, a super ready-to-win effect, and a special ready-to-win effect are executed after the pseudo consecutive 0-chance effect is executed. The pseudo-continuous 0-chance performance in the special performance patterns Z30 to Z32 is basically the same as the pseudo-continuous 0-chance performance pattern in the pseudo-continuous 0-chance performance pattern with a variable display time of 9 seconds, but is different from the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous 1-chance performance in that the pseudo-variable performance is executed once, instead of being terminated by the stop display of the decorative pattern, but ending in a ready-to-win state in which the same left and right symbols are stop-displayed and the middle symbol is variably displayed.

In the special performance pattern Z30, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo-running 0-chance A performance similar to the pseudo-running 0-chance A performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z31, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo consecutive 0-chance B performance similar to the pseudo-to-run 0 chance B performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state. In the special performance pattern Z32, normal ready-to-win performance, super ready-to-win performance, and special ready-to-win performance are executed after the pseudo consecutive 0-chance C performance similar to the pseudo consecutive 0-chance C performance pattern ends in a ready-to-win state.

By the way, it is not preferable for the gaming machine to arouse the gambling spirit of the player by excessively increasing the number of paid balls. In addition, recent players tend not to want the game machine to excessively increase or decrease the number of paid balls in a short period of time, and especially players who want to enjoy a long game tend to want the game machine to gradually increase or decrease the number of paid balls.

As a method of moderating the increase and decrease of the number of balls released in the gaming machine, for example, setting the jackpot probability in the normal game state (low probability mode) high, setting the probability variable jackpot ratio in the probability variable game machine low (setting the probability variable continuation rate low), and setting the jackpot probability low in the probability variable game state (high probability mode). Especially these days, there is a tendency to set the jackpot probability low in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) in order to suppress a rapid increase in the number of balls released. Also, in order to suppress an excessive increase in the number of payout balls in the variable probability game state, it is conceivable to set the variation display time in the variation game relatively long (for example, 15 seconds or more). When the variable display time is set to be relatively long, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a ready-to-win performance pattern in which ready-to-win performance is executed after execution of high-speed variable performance is likely to be set as game performance in the variable game. This ready-to-win effect pattern is set based on the lottery result of the big win lottery, and suggests the degree of expectation for the big win in the high-speed fluctuation effect and the ready-to-win effect. Further, during the execution of the high-speed fluctuation effect and the ready-to-win effect, the advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win is appropriately executed.

However, even in the probability variable gaming state (high probability mode), most of the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are out. In addition, when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a loss, a performance pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be set, and a performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be set as the advance notice performance. Therefore, in the probability variable game state, performances with low expectations for big wins are likely to occur frequently, and if such performances with low expectations for big wins are executed in a relatively long variable display time, the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variable games that are executed one after another is bad, and the player tends to feel a sense of sluggishness, thereby reducing interest in the game. In particular, when the probability of big wins in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) is set low, the average number of times of games required until the next big wins increases and the average game time required until the next big wins becomes longer, so that the amusement of the games is further reduced.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to set the variable display time of the variable game in the variable probability game state short, for example, to set the variable display time to a short variable display time of about 3 seconds so that this short variable display time is easily selected. In this way, by facilitating the setting of the short fluctuation display time in the variable probability game state, for example, as shown in FIG.

However, in the short fluctuation display of about 3 seconds, although the tempo of the fluctuation games that are executed one after another is improved, it is difficult to execute a sufficient deviation effect during that time. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand what the effect is intended in the effect for the short-time fluctuation display, and it is also difficult for the player to understand the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the big win lottery will be a big win. Therefore, even if the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm is prioritized and an effect that is difficult to understand is repeated, the interest in the game may decrease. Further, when the short fluctuation display time is easily selected, the average playing time of the fluctuation game is shortened, and after all, an excessive increase in the number of paid balls cannot be sufficiently suppressed, which hinders a gradual increase or decrease in the number of paid balls.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time-saving game state), 9 seconds, which is a predetermined game time, can be set as the main variation pattern (variation display time) of the variable game for notifying that the lottery result of the big win lottery is lost. Then, when the variation pattern of 9 seconds is set, as a game performance, a pseudo-run 3 performance in which the notice performance as a predetermined performance is not executed and the pseudo-variation is executed three times as the upper limit number (specified number of times) can be executed, or a pseudo-run 2 performance or a pseudo-run 1 performance (excluding the pseudo-run 2 chance B performance) in which the foretell performance is executed and the pseudo fluctuations are executed less than the upper limit number can be executed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time-saving game state), 9 seconds is set as the main variation pattern, and as the game performance in this case, pseudo-continuous 3 performances in which the upper limit number of pseudo-variations are performed without executing the notice performance are performed, so that the tempo in the variable game is improved by the pseudo-variation three times. Most of the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are losers, and when the loses continue, the pseudo-run 3 performance can be repeatedly executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the tempo of variable games to be executed one after another while preventing the delay of game performance by repeating the pseudo-variation, similarly to the conventional game machine in which the short-variation display time is likely to be selected. That is, in this embodiment, the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another can be improved by adopting the pseudo-continuous 3 performance in which the pseudo-variation is executed three times instead of the short-time variation display of about 3 seconds as the game time.

Further, in the present embodiment, repetition of the predetermined variation makes it difficult for the player to recognize the discontinuity between the variation games (at the end of the variation game). Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ready-to-win effect has suddenly started. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the right to execute a variable game in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time-saving game state) is reserved, the pseudo-variation is repeated, making it easier for the player to understand the intention of the performance and the degree of expectation for the big win. As a result, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-variation in the variation game can be executed with a good sense of rhythm, the tempo of the variation games to be executed one after another can be improved, the player can easily understand the intention of the performance, the degree of expectation for the big win, etc., and the decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time reduction game state), 9 seconds is set as the main variation pattern, thereby preventing the average game time of the variable game from being shortened. Since this prevents the average playing time between jackpot games from being shortened, it is possible to sufficiently suppress an excessive increase in the number of paid balls and realize a gradual increase/decrease in the number of paid balls.

In this embodiment, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time reduction game state), 9 seconds is set as the main variation pattern, and as the game performance in this case, the notice performance is executed and the performance of executing the pseudo-variation less than the upper limit is executed, so that when the variable games are executed one after another, the notice performance is executed during the repetition of the pseudo-variation. Here, when the pseudo-variation is repeated in the variation games that are executed one after another, excessive repetition of the pseudo-variation may make the progress of the game monotonous and reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, when the advance notice performance is executed while the variable games executed one after another are executed at a good tempo, the variable rhythm is changed. As a result, excessive repetition of pseudo fluctuations is prevented, and as a result of preventing the progress of the game from becoming monotonous, the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to fifth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the production pattern is determined for each variable game, and when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), the pseudo-variation for a certain period of time is executed three times, so that the pseudo-variation in the variable game can be executed with a good sense of rhythm, and the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another.

However, in the sixth embodiment described above, the pseudo-variation in the variable game can be executed with a good sense of rhythm, and the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another can be improved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), at the start of the previously executed variable game, an effect (for example, advance notice effect) over the next continuously executed variable game is executed. Thus, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), at the start of the variable game to be executed first, performance (for example, advance notice performance) extending over the next variable game to be continuously executed is executed, so that the fluctuation rhythm of the variable games to be executed one after another is changed, and the progress of the game is prevented from becoming monotonous.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92, focusing on differences from the sixth embodiment.

Here, FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern determination processing executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 37 in the sound ramp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

[Production pattern determination process]
In the performance pattern determination processing of the present embodiment, the performance pattern for executing the variable game is determined, and if there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not to execute the performance over the next variable game.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 90, in the effect pattern determination process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode in which the support by the electric accessory 315b is high and the second start port 315 is easily opened (step S3601). Whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set is determined, for example, based on a flag that is set to ON based on a command transmitted from the main controller 4 when the high-frequency support mode is started, and is set to OFF based on the command transmitted from the main controller 4 when the high-frequency support mode is terminated. If the MPU 51 is in the high-frequency support mode (step S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3603, and if it is not in the high-frequency support mode (step S3601: No), that is, in the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
If it is not the high-frequency support mode (step S3601: No), that is, if it is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern in the variable game in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment (step S3602), and terminates the effect pattern determination process.

<Step S3603>
When the high-frequency support mode is set (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the straddle effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3603). The stride effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the stride effect is being executed, and is set to ON in step S3610 described later. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable game is a variable game capable of executing a straddle effect. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3611 when the stride effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3604 when the stride effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No).

Here, FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of a straddle pseudo continuous effect. Specifically, the stride performance shown in FIG. 91(A) is an example of a stride performance when the variation display time of the current variation game and the next variation game is 9 seconds, and the stride performance shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91(A) and 91(B), the straddling effect is, for example, a effect of 6 seconds, and is executed over the 3rd section (6s to 9s) of the variable game and the first 3 seconds of the next variable game (the 1st section (3s to 6s) in the pseudo-continuous variation pattern). The straddle effect is executed, for example, as an advance notice effect. The advance notice effect is the same as that of the sixth embodiment described above.

The straddle performance is not limited to the performance executed for the time (6 seconds) corresponding to two sections of the pseudo-continuous performance, but may be the performance executed for the time of three or more segments of the pseudo-continuous performance, or may be the performance executed irrespective of the time of the above-mentioned segments.

Here, FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of the advance notice effect executed as the straddle effect. As shown in FIG. 92, in the present embodiment, a straddle effect is executed as a roulette effect. This roulette performance is basically the same as the roulette performance (see FIG. 83) executed in the pseudo-run 1 performance pattern in the sixth embodiment described above, but differs in that, in addition to "...?" These selection determining elements are effects suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, and the degree of expectation for a big win is high in the order of “Decision”, “Extreme Heat”, “CHANCE” and “...?”.

It should be noted that during execution of the straddle effect, the variable display and stop display of the ornamental pattern are displayed on the end side of the pattern display section 341 in a visual mode that does not hinder the visual recognition of the advance notice effect as much as possible. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 92, the state of the decoration design can be visually recognized in the upper right part of the design display section 341, the decoration design is stopped and displayed when the variation game ends (see FIG. 92 (B)), and the decoration design is variably displayed when the next variation game is started. In this case, the decorative pattern must be visible, but it is preferable to display it in a manner that does not attract the player's attention as much as possible. In this way, the decoration pattern is displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to draw the player's attention, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the performance. In addition, since the decorative symbols are displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to attract the player's attention, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the variation game has ended, that is, the break of the variation game. These allow the player to concentrate on the straddling effect.

<Step S3604>
Returning to the description of FIG. 90, when the straddle effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern in the variable game in the same manner as in the above-described sixth embodiment (step S3604).

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined in step S3604 is the pseudo-run 3 effect pattern (see FIGS. 77 to 81). When the effect pattern determined in step S3604 is the pseudo-run 3 effect pattern (step S3605: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3606. On the other hand, if the effect pattern determined in step S3604 is not the pseudo-ream 3 effect pattern (step S3605: No), the MPU 51 ends the effect pattern determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is not the pseudo-continuous 3 effect pattern, the effect is executed based on the effect pattern determined in step S3604 without executing the straddle effect.

Note that the straddle effect may be executed when an effect pattern other than the pseudo-continuous 3 effect pattern is determined.

<Step S3606>
When the effect pattern determined in step S3604 is the pseudo-ream 3 effect pattern (step S3605: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3606). Whether or not there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game is determined by referring to a storage area for storing information contained in the first and second reservation commands transmitted from the main control device 4 set in the RAM 512, for example. And, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3607. On the other hand, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3606: No), the MPU 51 ends the effect pattern determination process. That is, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game, the straddle effect is not executed.

<Steps S3607 and S3608>
When there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a straddle production execution lottery for whether or not to execute a straddle production (step S3607). That is, the straddle performance is a performance executed when a pseudo consecutive 3 performance pattern is determined as a performance pattern when there is a suspension in the high-frequency support mode, but it is not a performance always executed when such a condition is satisfied, but an arbitrary performance determined by a stride performance execution lottery. Thus, by determining whether or not the stepping performance is executed by the stepping performance execution lottery, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, while the variable games executed one after another progress at a good tempo, the variation rhythm can be given by the stepping performance. As a result, in the progress of the game when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

Here, the probability of execution of the stride performance (winning probability in the stride performance execution lottery) is set within a range capable of maintaining the tempo of the progress of the game when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, for example, set within the range of 1/5 to 1/20, typically set to about 1/10.

Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stepping performance execution lottery for executing the stepping performance is won (step S3608), and when the stepping performance execution lottery is won (step S3607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3609, and when the stepping performance execution lottery is not won (step S3607: No), the performance pattern determination processing is terminated.

<Steps S3609 and S3610>
When the stepping effect execution lottery is won (step S3607: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the stepping effect as a 6-second effect starting from the third section (6s to 9s) in the pseudo-continuous 3 effect (step S3609), sets the stepping effect execution flag to ON (step S3610), and ends the effect pattern determination process.

As described above, the stepping effect is, for example, a notice effect such as a roulette effect, but when a plurality of types of stepping effect are set, the type of stepping effect is determined in step S3609, and the type of stepping effect is stored in the RAM 512.

<Step S3611>
When the straddle performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the performance pattern according to the stride performance type (step S3611), sets the stride performance execution flag to OFF (step S3612), and terminates the performance pattern determination processing.

Here, the effect pattern determined according to the stride effect type when the stride effect execution flag is set to ON is, for example, a pseudo continuous effect pattern in which the pseudo variable effect is executed in the second section (3s to 6s) and the third section (3s to 9s) when the variable display time is 9s (see FIG. 91 (A)), a ready-to-win effect pattern in which the ready-to-win effect is executed 3 seconds after the start of the variable game (see FIG. 91 (B)), and a pseudo-continuous effect pattern (see FIG. 91 (B)) in which the ready-to-win effect is executed 3 seconds after the start of the variable game. A ready-to-win effect pattern or the like in which a ready-to-win effect is executed after a similar variation effect is executed once or twice is conceivable.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), at the start of the previously executed variable game, an effect (for example, advance notice effect) over the next continuously executed variable game is executed. Thus, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), at the start of the variable game to be executed first, performance (for example, advance notice performance) extending over the next variable game to be continuously executed is executed, so that the fluctuation rhythm of the variable games to be executed one after another is changed, and the progress of the game is prevented from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to sixth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Eighth embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the production pattern is determined for each variable game, and when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), the pseudo-variation for a certain period of time is executed three times, so that the pseudo-variation in the variable game can be executed with a good sense of rhythm, and the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another.

However, in the sixth embodiment described above, the pseudo-variation in the variable game can be executed with a good sense of rhythm, and the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another can be improved. In addition, in the sixth embodiment described above, since the performance pattern is determined for each variable game, when the stepping performance is determined in the previous variable game, it is necessary to determine the performance pattern of the later variable game according to the type of the stepping performance, and the determination of the performance pattern of the later variable game is complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time reduction game state), at the start of the previously executed variable game, a production pattern to be executed in series for two variable games, the previously executed variable game and the next variable game, can be determined and executed. In this way, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time reduction game state), performance patterns to be executed in succession for two variable games can be determined and executed, so that the fluctuation rhythm of the variable games to be executed one after another is changed, and the progress of the game is prevented from becoming monotonous. Further, by determining and executing the effect pattern to be executed in series for two times of the variable game, it is possible to prevent the determination of the effect pattern of the subsequent variable game from becoming complicated.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95, focusing on differences from the sixth embodiment.

[Variation pattern setting process]
In the variation pattern setting process of this embodiment, when there is a reservation of the right to execute a variation game in the high-frequency support mode, not only the variation pattern in the variation game but also the variation pattern setting process for the next variation game is executed.

Here, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern setting process executed by the main controller 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 93, in the fluctuation pattern setting processing of the present embodiment, when the frequency support mode is in high -frequency support mode (step S3501: YES), there is a suspension for gaming to execute a variable gaming (step S3502: YES), set the floating pattern in the same way as the 6th embodiment (Step S350). 8 to S3512), set a fluctuation pattern for the next floating gaming (step S3701), and terminate the fluctuation pattern setting process. That is, in this embodiment, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, a variation pattern for the variation game and a variation pattern for the next variation game are set for two variation games.

When the variation pattern of the next variation game is set, the variation pattern command for the next variation game is set, and the variation pattern command for the next variation game is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with the variation pattern command for the variation game. On the other hand, when the voice ramp control device 5 receives the variation patterns of the variation game for two times of the variation game and the next variation game, it determines the series performance pattern to be executed in succession for the two variation games on the condition that the lottery for execution of the series performance is won as described later.

[Production pattern determination process]
In the performance pattern determination processing of the present embodiment, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high frequency support mode, a series of performance patterns in which the performance is successively executed by one performance pattern from the start of the variable game to the end of the next variable game are determined under the condition of winning the lottery.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 94, in the effect pattern determination process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode in which the support by the electric accessory 315b is high and the second start port 315 is easily opened (step S3801). Whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set is determined, for example, based on a flag that is set to ON based on a command transmitted from the main controller 4 when the high-frequency support mode is started, and is set to OFF based on the command transmitted from the main controller 4 when the high-frequency support mode is terminated. If the MPU 51 is in the high-frequency support mode (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3803, and if it is not in the high-frequency support mode (step S3801: No), that is, in the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3802.

<Step S3802>
If it is not the high-frequency support mode (step S3801: No), that is, if it is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern in the variable game in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment (step S3802), and terminates the effect pattern determination process.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
When it is high frequency support mode (step S3801: Yes), MPU51 judges whether the series production|presentation execution flag is set to ON (step S3803). The series effect execution flag is a flag indicating that a series of effects is being executed, and is set to ON in step S3809 to be described later. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable game is a variable game capable of executing a series of effects. Then, when the series effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3803: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the series effect execution flag to OFF (step S3804), and terminates the effect pattern setting process. That is, when the series performance execution flag is set to ON, the MPU 51 can determine that the variation game corresponds to the later variation game in the series performance, and thus terminates the performance pattern determination processing without determining the performance pattern for the variation game. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to step S3805, when the series production|presentation execution flag is set to OFF (step S3803: No).

Here, FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of a series of effect patterns. The example shown in FIG. 95 is a series of performance patterns when 9 seconds is set as the variable display time of the variable game.

Specifically, in the series effect pattern shown in FIG. 95(A), after the pseudo variation is executed in the first section (0s to 3s) and the second section (3s to 6s) in the variable game, the notice effect is executed in a total of 6 seconds including the third section (6s to 9s) in the variable game and the first 3 seconds of the next variable game. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 95(A), the notice effect is executed across the variation game and the next variation game. Then, the ready-to-win effect is executed after the end of the advance notice effect. This series of effect patterns is the same as the effect pattern shown in FIG. 91(B) in the above-described seventh embodiment from the player's point of view.

In the series production pattern shown in FIG. 95 (B), after the pseudo fluctuation is executed in the first section (0s to 3s) in the variable game, the second section (3s to 6s) and the third section (6s to 9s) in the variable game. Then, the ready-to-win effect is executed from the start of the next variable game after the end of the advance notice effect. That is, the advance notice effect does not necessarily need to be executed across the variation game and the next variation game.

In the series effect pattern shown in FIG. 95 (C), after the pseudo variation is executed in the first section (0s to 3s) in the variable game, the second section (3s to 6s), the third section (6s to 9s) in the variable game, and the ready-to-win effect are executed in the entirety of the next variable game.

During execution of the series of performances, similarly to the case of the straddle performance in the seventh embodiment, the variable display and stop display of the decorative patterns on the end side of the pattern display part 341 are displayed in a visual mode that does not impede the visual recognition of the advance notice performance as much as possible, preferably in a mode that attracts the player's attention as little as possible. In this way, the decorative symbols are displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to draw the player's attention, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the series of effects. In addition, since the decorative symbols are displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to attract the player's attention, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the variation game has ended, that is, the break of the variation game. These allow the player to concentrate on a series of effects.

<Step S3805>
Returning to the description of FIG. 94, when the series effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3803: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3805). Whether or not there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game is determined by referring to a storage area for storing information contained in the first and second reservation commands transmitted from the main control device 4 set in the RAM 512, for example. And, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3806. On the other hand, when the right to execute the variable game is not reserved (step S3805: No), the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment (step S3802), and terminates the effect pattern determination process. That is, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game, a series of effects are not executed.

<Step S3806>
When there is a reservation of the right to execute the variation game (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation display time in the variation game is 9 seconds (step S3806). Whether or not the variation display time in the variation game is 9 seconds is determined, for example, based on the contents stored in the storage area of the RAM 412 for storing information notified by the variation pattern command for the variation game. Then, when the variation display time in the variation game is 9 seconds (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3807. On the other hand, when the variation display time in the variation game is not 9 seconds (step S3806: No), the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment (step S3802), and terminates the effect pattern determination process. That is, when the variation display time of the variation game is not 9 seconds, a series of effects are not executed.

Incidentally, the series of effects may be determined and executed even when the variable display time of the variable game is other than 9 seconds.

<Steps S3807 and S3808>
When the variable display time in the variable game is 9 seconds (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a series of performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute a series of performances (step S3807). That is, the series performance is a performance executed when the variation display time of the variable game is 9 seconds when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, but it is not a performance always executed when such a condition is established, but an arbitrary performance determined by a series performance execution lottery. In this way, by determining whether or not the series of performances are executed by the series performance execution lottery, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to change the variation rhythm by the series of performances while progressing the variable games executed one after another at a good tempo. As a result, in the progress of the game when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

Here, the probability of executing the series of performances (the winning probability in the lottery for executing the series of performances) is set within a range capable of maintaining the tempo of the progress of the game when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, for example, set within the range of 1/5 to 1/20, typically set to about 1/10.

Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a series of performance item lottery for executing a series of performances is won (step S3808), and when the series of performance execution lottery is won (step S3808: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3809. On the other hand, when the series of effect execution lottery is not won (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment (step S3802), and terminates the effect pattern determination process.

<Steps S3809 and S3810>
When the series performance execution lottery is won (step S3808: Yes), the series performance pattern (see FIG. 95) to be executed in series from the start of the variable game to the end of the next variation game is determined (step S3809), the series performance execution flag is set on (step S3810), and the performance pattern determination processing is terminated.

Here, for the series of performance patterns, for example, it is conceivable to set the time until the ready-to-win performance is executed first, determine the performance corresponding to the time, and determine the ready-to-win performance corresponding to the remaining time to determine the entire performance pattern. Also, the series of performance patterns may be determined from the dedicated series of performance patterns according to the total time of the variable display time of the variable game and the variable display time of the next variable game, by previously preparing a plurality of performance patterns dedicated to the series performance for each variable display time.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time reduction game state), at the start of the previously executed variable game, the performance pattern to be executed in series for two variable games, the previously executed variable game and the next variable game, can be determined and executed. In this way, when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time reduction game state), performance patterns to be executed in succession for two variable games can be determined and executed, so that the fluctuation rhythm of the variable games to be executed one after another is changed, and the progress of the game is prevented from becoming monotonous. Further, by determining and executing the effect pattern to be executed in series for two times of the variable game, it is possible to prevent the determination of the effect pattern of the subsequent variable game from becoming complicated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to seventh embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the production pattern is determined for each variable game, and when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), the pseudo-variation for a certain period of time is executed three times, so that the pseudo-variation in the variable game can be executed with a good sense of rhythm, and the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another.

However, in the sixth embodiment described above, the pseudo-variation in the variable game can be executed with a good sense of rhythm, and the variable games that are executed one after another can be performed at a good tempo.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as a variation pattern when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern (3 seconds) corresponding to one section (pseudo variation performance execution time) of a 9-second pseudo-continuous production pattern (execution time of pseudo-variable production) and a variation pattern (6 seconds) corresponding to two sections are included. In this way, by including a variation pattern corresponding to one section (execution time of pseudo variation performance) or two sections of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern of 9 seconds, the rhythm of the progress of the variation game which is continuously performed is changed, and the progress of the game is prevented from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern (3 seconds) corresponding to one section (execution time of pseudo variation performance) is selected as a variation pattern when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, performance (for example, advance notice performance) over the next variable game is executed. Thus, when a variation pattern (three seconds) corresponding to one section (execution time of a pseudo-variation performance) is selected as a variation pattern, the execution of a performance (for example, advance notice performance) across the next variation game also gives a change to the rhythm of the progress of the continuously executed variable game, preventing the progress of the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation patterns of 6 seconds and 3 seconds are less likely to be selected than the variation pattern of 9 seconds. In this way, since the variation patterns of 6 seconds and 3 seconds are less likely to be selected than the variation pattern of 9 seconds, the average game time required between the jackpot games is extremely shortened, that is, the excessive increase in the number of balls paid out is suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the right to execute the variable game is reserved in the high-frequency support mode and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost, the main variation pattern is 9 seconds, and the main performance in this case is the pseudo consecutive 3 performance. Therefore, a player skilled in the game machine can recognize a break between variable games (at the end of the variable game) by counting the number of pseudo-continuous performances, and can count the number of variable games after shifting to the high-frequency support mode. However, if the 3-second performance or the 6-second performance is executed while the 9-second pseudo-continuous 3-performance is repeated, it becomes difficult to recognize the gap between the variable games by counting the number of times of the pseudo-continuous performance, and it is possible to cause a deviation between the number of variable games counted by the player and the actual number of variable games. This makes it difficult for the player to comprehend the start and end times of the variable game, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is recognized as suddenly started. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99, focusing on differences from the sixth embodiment.

[Variation table]
Here, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a variation table used by main controller 4 when there is a hold in the high frequency support mode. The variation table A used in the low frequency support mode and in the high frequency support mode without holding is the same as the variation table A in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96, the variation table B used when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode includes a normal jackpot variation table B (see FIG. 96A), a probability variable jackpot variation table B (see FIG. 96B), and a loss variation table B (see FIG. 96C). The normal jackpot variation table B is different from the normal jackpot variation table B (see FIG. 72(A)) of the sixth embodiment described above, and includes a variation pattern of 6 seconds and a variation pattern of 3 seconds in addition to the variation pattern whose variation display time is 9 seconds. Unlike the probability variable jackpot variation table B (see FIG. 72 (B)) of the sixth embodiment described above, the probability variable jackpot variation table B includes a variation pattern of 6 seconds and a variation pattern of 3 seconds in addition to the variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds. The deviation variation table B is different from the deviation variation table B (see FIG. 72(C)) of the sixth embodiment described above, and includes a variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds, a variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds, and a variation pattern with a variation display time of 3 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, the variation table B used when there is a reservation of the right to execute a variable game in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time-saving game state) in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high includes a variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds, a variation pattern of 6 seconds and a variation pattern of 3 seconds, and 9 seconds, 6 seconds, and 3 seconds can be selected as the variation display time.

In addition, in the deviation fluctuation table B (see FIG. 96(C)), in the case of deviation reach (front-rear deviation reach and reach other than front-rear deviation), there is no distribution of variation patterns with variation display times of 9 seconds, 6 seconds, and 3 seconds, but in the case of complete deviation, only the variation patterns with variation display times of 9 seconds, 6 seconds, and 3 seconds are included. Here, in the failure type table (see FIG. 14(D)), the complete failure sorting is overwhelmingly more common than the failure reach sorting, and the perfect failure can be selected with a probability of about 84%. In other words, in the off-variation pattern table B (see FIG. 96 (C)) when there is a reservation of the right to execute a variable game in a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time-saving game state) in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high, any variation pattern with a variation display time of 9 seconds, 6 seconds, and 3 seconds can be selected with a high probability. In addition, in the outlier variation pattern table B (see FIG. 96(C)) of this embodiment, the distribution of the variation pattern of 9 seconds is set overwhelmingly high, and the distribution of the variation patterns of 6 seconds and 3 seconds is set extremely low. Therefore, when the right to execute a variable game is reserved in the high-frequency support mode, the 6-second and 3-second variation patterns are less likely to be selected, while the 9-second variation pattern is more likely to be selected. In this way, since it is difficult to select the 6-second and 3-second variation patterns, extremely shortening of the average game time required between big winning games, ie, an excessive increase in the number of paid balls is suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main variation pattern is 9 seconds when the right to execute the variable game is reserved in the high-frequency support mode, and the main effect in this case is the pseudo consecutive 3 effect. Therefore, a player skilled in the game machine can recognize a break between variable games (at the end of the variable game) by counting the number of pseudo-continuous performances, and can count the number of variable games after shifting to the high-frequency support mode. However, if the 3-second performance or the 6-second performance is executed while the 9-second pseudo-continuous 3-performance is repeated, it becomes difficult to recognize the gap between the variable games by counting the number of times of the pseudo-continuous performance, and it is possible to cause a deviation between the number of variable games counted by the player and the actual number of variable games. This makes it difficult for the player to comprehend the start and end times of the variable game, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is recognized as suddenly started. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

In this embodiment, 9 seconds, 6 seconds, and 3 seconds can be selected as the variable display time regardless of whether the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win or a loss. However, the variation table should be set so that 9 seconds, 6 seconds, and 3 seconds can be selected as the variable display time at least when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a loss.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display time of 9 seconds, 6 seconds and 3 seconds can be selected in the high frequency support mode, that is, in both the variable probability game state and the short time game state. However, at least in the variable probability game state, the variation table should be set so that 9 seconds, 6 seconds and 3 seconds can be selected as the variable display time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display time of 9 seconds, 6 seconds and 3 seconds can be selected when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high frequency support mode, but the variation table may be set so that 9 seconds, 6 seconds and 3 seconds can be selected as the variable display time in the low frequency support mode and when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high frequency support mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high-frequency support mode, 6 seconds and 3 seconds can be selected as the variable display time in addition to 9 seconds, but at least one of 6 seconds and 3 seconds may be selected as the variable display time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high-frequency support mode, 6 seconds and 3 seconds can be selected as the variable display time in addition to 9 seconds.

[Production pattern determination process]
In the performance pattern determination processing of the present embodiment, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game in the high frequency support mode, and when the advance notice performance is set for the variable game, it is determined whether or not to execute this notice performance. Further, in the effect pattern determination process of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and 3 seconds is set as the variable display time, the advance notice effect is executed. This makes it possible to execute the notice performance even when a variation pattern is set in which the notice performance cannot be executed in terms of variable display time. Then, when the execution time of the notice performance exceeds 3 seconds, the notice performance is continuously executed until the next variation game. That is, since the advance notice performance is executed straddled until the start of the variable game and the time-variable game, the rhythm of the progress of the continuously executed variable game is changed by the notice performance, the progress of the game is prevented from becoming monotonous, and the advance notice performance can be given significance as a look-ahead performance, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Here, FIGS. 97 and 98 are a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of production pattern determination processing executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 37 in the sound ramp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 97, in the production pattern determination process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode in which the support by the electric accessory 315b is high and the second start port 315 is easily opened (step S3901). Whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set is determined, for example, based on a flag that is set to ON based on a command transmitted from the main controller 4 when the high-frequency support mode is started, and is set to OFF based on the command transmitted from the main controller 4 when the high-frequency support mode is terminated. If the MPU 51 is in high-frequency support mode (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3903, and if not in high-frequency support mode (step S3901: No), ie, in low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3902.

<Step S3902>
If the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (step S3901: No), i.e., if the mode is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern in the variable game in accordance with the variable display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (step S3902), and terminates the effect pattern determination process.

<Step S3903>
When the high-frequency support mode is set (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the look-ahead stride effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3903). The look-ahead stride effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the look-ahead stride effect is being executed, and is set to ON in step S3922 of FIG. 98 to be described later. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable game is a variable game capable of executing the look-ahead stride effect. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3923 when the prefetching straddle effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3903: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3904 when the prefetching straddle effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3903: No).

Here, FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead stride effect pattern. The example shown in FIG. 99 is a look-ahead cross effect pattern when 3 seconds is set as the variable display time of the variable game.

Specifically, in the look-ahead straddle effect pattern shown in FIG. 99(A), the loss effect is executed in the variation game (3 seconds), and the notice effect (6 seconds) is started by the start of the variation game. When the 3-second deviating performance ends, the pseudo-continuous 3 performance is executed as the next variation game. In this case, the 6-second advance notice effect started with the previous out-of-order effect is continuously executed until the end of the first section (0 to 3 seconds) of the pseudo-continuous 3 effect in the next variation game. As a result, even when the variable display time is set to 3 seconds, the advance notice effect can be executed. In addition, the notice performance is started in the losing performance, and the notice performance is executed straddling to the next variation game, and the next variation game is executed as the pseudo consecutive 3 performance, so that the notice performance can be recognized as the look-ahead performance.

Note that the notice performance and the pseudo-variation performance are executed in the first section (0 to 3 seconds) of the next variable game, but the pseudo-variation performance in the first section (0 to 3 seconds) may or may not be visible to the player. Also, the pseudo-variation performance may be executed in the next variation game by executing the pseudo-variation performance in the second segment (3-6 seconds) and the third segment (6-9 seconds) without executing the pseudo-variation performance in the first segment (0 to 3 seconds) of the next variation game.

In the look-ahead straddle performance pattern shown in FIG. 99(B), the deviation performance is executed in the variation game (3 seconds), and the notice performance (6 seconds) is started by the start of the variation game. When the 3-second deviation performance ends, the ready-to-win performance is executed as the next variation game. In this case, the notice effect of 6 seconds, which is started in the preceding loss effect, is continuously executed until the first 3 seconds of the ready-to-win effect in the next variation game. As a result, even when the variable display time is set to 3 seconds, the advance notice effect can be executed. In addition, the advance notice performance is started in the losing performance, and the notice performance is executed until the next variation game, and the next fluctuation game is executed as the ready-to-win performance, so that the notice performance can be recognized as the look-ahead performance.

In the first three seconds of the next variable game, the notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed, but the ready-to-win effect in the first three seconds may or may not be visible to the player. Alternatively, the ready-to-win effect may be started after the end of the advance notice effect without starting the ready-to-win effect in the first three seconds.

During execution of the look-ahead stride performance, similarly to the straddle performance in the seventh embodiment, the variable display and stop display of the decoration pattern on the end side of the pattern display part 341 are displayed in a visual mode that does not impede the visual recognition of the advance notice performance as much as possible, preferably in a mode that hardly draws the player's attention. In this way, the decoration pattern is displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to draw the player's attention, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the look-ahead crossing effect. In addition, the decorative symbols are displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to attract the player's attention, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the variable game has ended, that is, the break of the variable game. These allow the player to concentrate on the look-ahead stride effect.

<Step S3904>
Returning to the description of FIG. 97, when the look-ahead straddle effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3903: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3904). Whether or not there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game is determined by referring to a storage area for storing information contained in the first and second reservation commands transmitted from the main control device 4 set in the RAM 512, for example. And, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3904: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3917 of FIG. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3905 when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game (step S3904: No).

<Step S3905>
When there is no reservation of the right to execute the variation game (step S3904: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation display time in the variation game is 3 seconds (step S3905). Whether or not the variation display time in the variation game is 3 seconds is determined, for example, based on the contents stored in the storage area of the RAM 412 that stores the information notified by the variation pattern command for the variation game. Then, when the variation display time in the variation game is 3 seconds (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3906, and when the variation display time in the variation game is not 3 seconds (step S3905: No), the process moves to step S3911.

<Steps S3906 and S3907>
When the variation display time in the variation game is 3 seconds (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a notice effect is set for the variation game (step S3906). When the notice effect is set for the variable game (step S3906: Yes), the MPU 51 cancels the notice effect (step S3907), and shifts the process to step S3908. This prevents the execution of the advance notice effect in the 3-second variation pattern in which the advance notice effect cannot be executed. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to step S3908, when the notice production|presentation is not set with respect to the said variable game (step S3906: No).

<Steps S3908 to S3910>
In step S3908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. Whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is determined, for example, based on the contents stored in the storage area of the RAM 412 that stores the information notified by the variation pattern command for the variation game. Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big win (step S3908: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a 3-second big win performance pattern (step S3909), while when the lottery result of the big win lottery is not a big win (step S3908: No), that is, when the lottery result is a loss, the MPU 51 determines a 3-second off performance pattern (step S3910), and terminates the performance pattern determination processing.

<Step S3911>
When the variation display time in the variation game is not 3 seconds (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the variation display time in the variation game is 6 seconds (step S3911). Whether or not the variation display time in the variation game is 6 seconds is determined, for example, based on the contents stored in the storage area of the RAM 412 that stores the information notified by the variation pattern command for the variation game. Then, when the variation display time in the variation game is 6 seconds (step S3911: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3912. On the other hand, when the variation display time in the variation game is not 6 seconds (step S3911: No), the MPU 51 determines the performance pattern in the variation game according to the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (step S3902), and terminates the performance pattern determination process.

<Steps S3912 and S3913>
When the variation display time in the variation game is 6 seconds (step S3911: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S3912). Whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is determined, for example, based on the contents stored in the storage area of the RAM 412 that stores the information notified by the variation pattern command for the variation game. Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S3912: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a 6-second jackpot effect pattern (step S3909), and terminates the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3914 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a big hit (step S3912: No), that is, when the lottery result is lost.

<Steps S3914 to S3916>
When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a big hit (step S3912: Yes), that is, when the lottery result is a loss, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a notice effect is set for the variable game (step S3914).

MPU51, when the notice production is set to the particular fluctuation game (step S3914: Yes), sets the deviation production pattern without pseudo fluctuation (step S3915). On the other hand, the MPU 51 sets a pseudo-double-off effect pattern in which a pseudo-fluctuation of 3 seconds is executed twice (step S3916), when the notice effect is not set for the variable game (step S3914: No).

In this way, when a six-second variation pattern corresponding to two sections of the pseudo-variation performance is set, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, a pseudo-two-continuous failure performance pattern in which the pseudo-variation of three seconds is executed twice is set, or the advance notice performance is executed without executing the pseudo-variation. As a result, the pseudo variation in the variation game can be performed with a good sense of rhythm by executing the pseudo variation for a fixed time three times, and not only can the variation game to be performed one after another be progressed at a good tempo, but also the variation rhythm of the variation game to be successively performed is changed by the 6-second performance (pseudo 2-run performance or non-pseudo-run advance notice performance) to prevent the progress of the game from becoming monotonous, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

<Steps S3917 and S3918>
When the look-ahead straddle performance is not executed in the high-frequency support mode and the right to execute the variable game is reserved (step S3904: Yes), as shown in FIG. 98, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S3917). Whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is determined, for example, based on the contents stored in the storage area of the RAM 412 that stores the information notified by the variation pattern command for the variation game. Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S3917: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a jackpot effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time (step S3918), and terminates the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a big hit (step S3917: No), that is, when the lottery result is lost, the process proceeds to step S3919.

<Steps S3919 and S3920>
When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a big hit (step S3917: No), that is, when the lottery result is out, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation display time in the variation game is 3 seconds (step S3919). Whether or not the variation display time in the variation game is 3 seconds is determined, for example, based on the contents stored in the storage area of the RAM 412 that stores the information notified by the variation pattern command for the variation game. Then, when the variation display time in the variation game is 3 seconds (step S3919: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3921. On the other hand, when the variable display time in the variable game is not 3 seconds (step S3919: No), the MPU 51 determines the outlier effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time (step S3920), and ends the effect pattern determination process.

<Steps S3921 and S3922>
When the variation display time in the variation game is 3 seconds (step S3919: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a notice effect is set for the variation game (step S3921). MPU51, when the notice production is not set vis-a-vis the particular fluctuation game (step S3921: No), sets the 3 seconds off production pattern (step S3920), ends the production pattern decision processing. On the other hand, when the notice effect is set for the variable game (step S3921: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the look-ahead straddle effect flag to ON (step S3922), and ends the effect pattern determination process.

Here, when the advance notice performance is set for the variable game, a look-ahead crossing performance flag is set to ON, whereby the notice performance is started in the fluctuation of 3 seconds, and the notice performance is executed over the next variable game, and it can be grasped that the notice performance is executed at the start of the next variable game (see step S3903 in FIG. 97).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state) includes a variation pattern (3 seconds) corresponding to one section of the 9-second pseudo-continuous production pattern (execution time of pseudo-variable production) and a variation pattern (6 seconds) corresponding to two sections. In this way, by including a variation pattern corresponding to one section (execution time of pseudo variation performance) or two sections of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern of 9 seconds, the rhythm of the progress of the variation game which is continuously performed is changed, and the progress of the game is prevented from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern (3 seconds) corresponding to one section (execution time of pseudo variation performance) is selected as a variation pattern when there is a hold in the high-frequency support mode, performance (for example, advance notice performance) over the next variable game is executed. Thus, when a variation pattern (three seconds) corresponding to one section (execution time of a pseudo-variation performance) is selected as a variation pattern, the execution of a performance (for example, advance notice performance) across the next variation game also gives a change to the rhythm of the progress of the continuously executed variable game, preventing the progress of the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to eighth embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

[Tenth embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, as a game effect, a specific effect (for example, pseudo-repeated 3 effects) in which a predetermined variation (for example, pseudo-variation) is performed a specific number of times (for example, three times) is executed as a game effect (for example, pseudo-repeated 3 effects). By repeating the predetermined variation, it becomes possible to improve the tempo of the variable games that are executed one after another, and the break between the variable games (at the end of the variable game) becomes difficult for the player to recognize. A case where it is possible to improve interest has been described.

By the way, in the island facility of the game hall, a data display is generally provided above each game machine. This data display displays various game information such as the number of big wins on the day and the number of variable games from the previous big win to the current variable game.

Here, in the game hall, a hall computer is generally installed, and game information is signal-output from the game machine to the hall computer via the output terminal (external output terminal board) of the game machine, and based on the game information, the game status such as the number of big wins of the day, the number of variable games from the previous big win to the current variable game, the total number of variable games, etc. are managed. Then, game information relating to the game machine corresponding to the data display is transmitted from the hall computer to the data display, and various types of game information such as the number of big wins on the day and the number of variable games from the previous big win to the current variable game are displayed on the data display.

Also, the game machine transmits a pattern determination signal indicating that the variation game is terminated to the hall computer each time the variation game is terminated, and the hall computer transmits a variation game termination signal indicating that the variation game is terminated to the data display each time the pattern determination signal is received. On the other hand, on the data display, when the variable game end signal is received, the number of times obtained by adding 1 to the current number of variable games is displayed as the number of variable games from the previous big hit to the current variable game. That is, the current number of variable games on the data display is updated each time a variable game is completed.

In the sixth embodiment described above, as the game effect, a specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous 3 effect) in which a predetermined variation (for example, pseudo-variation) is performed a specific number of times (for example, three times) is executed as a game effect, making it difficult for the player to recognize the break between the variable games (at the end of the variable game). However, when the current number of variable games on the data display is updated each time the variable game is finished, the player can recognize that the variable game is finished by confirming that the current number of variable games on the data display is updated, so that the player can grasp the break between the variable games. Therefore, it is expected that the player will pay attention to the data display device, and in that case, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. In addition, there is a conventional game machine in which a series of performances are executed over a plurality of variable games, that is, a plurality of variable games are made to look like one variable game and the performance is executed to improve the interest of the game, but even in such a game machine, if a break between the variable games is recognized, the intention of the performance may be lost and the interest in the game may be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the first condition is satisfied, game information related to the game including variable games such as symbol determination signals for a plurality of variable games is output as a signal from the main control device of the gaming machine via the output terminal, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, one piece of game information is output as a signal from the main control device of the gaming machine via the output terminal. In this way, when the first condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of game information (for example, informational game end information) are collectively output as a signal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, one game information is output as a signal, for example, when the second condition is satisfied, the number of variable games since the previous jackpot is updated in the data display every time one variable game is executed, and when the first condition is satisfied, the data is displayed each time a variable game is performed. The number of variable games in the device is not updated. Therefore, when one variable game is executed, the current number of variable games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of variable games on the data display and the actual number of variable games. As a result, when the variable game is executed continuously, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the variable games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game caused by the gap between the variable games being grasped from the data display device, and it is possible to execute various performances (for example, look-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of times of the variable game.

Here, the phrase "to output a signal collectively" for a plurality of pieces of game information includes the case where a plurality of pieces of game information are signal-outputted as at least one piece of data of a plurality of bytes, and also includes the case where each piece of game information is individually converted into data and the data is signal-outputted by serial communication or parallel communication.

Further, when the game-related state changes, even if the first condition is not satisfied, a plurality of pieces of game information (for example, information game end information) may be collectively output as a signal. For example, when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state different from the first game state, even if the first condition is not satisfied, a plurality of pieces of game information (for example, information game end information) may be collectively output as a signal. Here, the first game state and the second game state include a game state in which a variable game is executed, and include at least a probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this case, the transition from the first game state to the second game state includes transition from the variable probability game state to the reduced time game state, transition from the variable probability game state to the normal game state, transition from the reduced time game state to the variable probability game state, transition from the reduced time game state to the normal game state, transition from the normal game state to the variable probability game state, and transition from the normal game state to the reduced time game state. Also, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may include a latent probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode). That is, in the present embodiment, in the last variation game in the game state before transition, if there is a plurality of unoutputted game information, the unoutputted plurality of game information may be collectively output as a signal. This prevents the game information in the game state before transition from being output as a signal in the game state after transition. That is, in the game state after the transition, the signal output of the game information in the different game state before the transition is prevented.

Further, even when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state via a third game state different from the first game state and the second game state, a plurality of pieces of game information (for example, information game end information) may be collectively output as a signal when the first condition is not satisfied. The third game state includes, for example, a game state in which no variation game is executed, typically a big hit game state, and also a small hit game state. Specifically, when the first game state and the second game state are game states in which a variable game is executed, and the third game state is a game state in which a variable game is not executed (for example, a jackpot game state), for example, when shifting from a normal game state (first game state) to a probability variable game state (second game state) via a jackpot game state (third game state), even if the first condition is not satisfied, a plurality of game information (for example, an information game) end information) may be collectively output as a signal. In other words, the transition from the first game state to the second game state may mean the transition between the game states in which the variable game is executed, and in this case, a third game state such as a jackpot game in which the variable game is not executed may intervene between the transition from the first game state to the second game state.

In addition, the "output terminal" through which the game information is output from the main control device includes an output terminal dedicated to the main control device, an output terminal shared by the main control device and other devices (e.g., a sound lamp control device, a control device for a frame such as the front frame 11), an output terminal provided in the main control device, an output terminal provided outside the main control device, an output terminal for outputting a signal to the outside of the game machine, and a signal output from the main control device to the outside of the main control device (e.g., sound lamp control device, display control). output terminal for outputting to a device).

As the game information, in addition to the information indicating the end of the variable game such as the pattern determination signal, the end of the variable game, the start of the variable game, the start of the big win game, the end of the big win game, the lottery result in the big win lottery, the variable game time, etc. can be considered. In addition, the game information is triggered by, for example, the end of the variable game, the start of the variable game, the start of the jackpot game, and the end of the jackpot game, and is output as a signal from the main control device via the output terminal.

Further, in one example of the present embodiment, the first condition is that there is a hold at the start of variation of the variation game. Thus, since the first condition is that the right to execute the variable game is reserved at the start of the fluctuation of the variable game, the variable game that is held after the end of the variable game can be executed, so that at least for two variable games including the variable game, after the variable game related to the hold is completed, the game information related to the variable game such as the pattern determination signal can be collectively output from the main control device via the output terminal. Thus, by setting the first condition to hold the right to execute the variable game at the start of the variation of the variable game, it is possible to collectively output, for example, the pattern determination signal from the main control device via the output terminal.

Further, in one example of the present embodiment, the first condition is that the variable display times for a plurality of variable games are collectively set. Thus, since the first condition is that the variable display times for a plurality of variable games are collectively set, the number of symbol determination signals collectively output from the main control device via the output terminal can be set equal to or less than the number of the multiple variable games whose variable display times are collectively set. As a result, it is possible to reliably collectively output the symbol determination signal from the main control device via the output terminal.

Further, in one example of the present embodiment, the first condition is that the high-frequency support mode has a high opening probability of the electric accessory that restricts the opening and closing of the second winning opening. Here, in the high-frequency support mode, since the probability of opening the electric accessory is high, game balls are likely to enter the second winning hole, and variable games are likely to be executed continuously. Therefore, since the first condition is the high-frequency support mode, the right to execute the variable game is likely to be reserved, so it becomes easy to collectively set the variable display time for a plurality of variable games. As a result, for example, it becomes easy to collectively output the symbol determination signals of a plurality of variable games from the main control device via the output terminal.

Further, in one example of the present embodiment, the first condition is that the reservation of the right to execute the variable game includes the reservation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Thus, the first condition is that the reservation of the right to execute the variable game includes the reservation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and when the reservation of the jackpot is executed as the variable game, it is possible to output a plurality of pattern determination signals from the main control device via the output terminal upon completion of the variable game. Further, when a big win is held as the variation game, a plurality of pattern confirmation signals are outputted from the main control device through the output terminal at the time of completion of the variation game, thereby preventing the main control device from outputting the symbol confirmation signal for the big winning variation game through the output terminal after the big winning game executed after the completion of the big winning variation game. As a result, the number of variable games after the big winning game is prevented from becoming different from the actual number of variable games, and for example, the number of variable games after the big winning game displayed on a data display device is prevented from being different from the actual number of variable games after the big winning game.

Further, the first condition may be that a predetermined variation game is started (executed). As the predetermined variable game, for example, the last variable game of the preset specified number of times (see the eleventh and twelfth embodiments described later), the last variable game in the high frequency support mode, the variable game that informs that the jackpot game is executed, the last variable game in the game state before the transition when the game state (probability variable game state, time saving game state, normal game state, etc.) is transferred. In this way, when the first condition is that a predetermined variable game is started (executed), the timing of collectively outputting game information such as a plurality of symbol determination signals is diversified. For example, when the first condition is that a specified number of variable games is started (executed) (see eleventh and twelfth embodiments described later), the number of variable games (timing) at which a plurality of symbol determination signals are collectively output from the main control device via the output terminal can be adjusted by the set number of specified times. As a result, for example, a plurality of pattern confirmation signals can be collectively output from the main control device via the output terminal at various timings, so that the timing of collectively outputting the game information such as the plurality of pattern confirmation signals is diversified.

Further, the first condition includes, for example, that the high-frequency support mode ends (probability variable game state ends, time-saving game state ends). Specifically, the first condition includes execution of the final variable game in the variable game of the prescribed number of times (the number of times of the time-saving game, the number of times of ST) determined for the variable game in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), and completion of the variable game that notifies the big win in the jackpot lottery.

As the prescribed number of times, for example, one predetermined fixed number of times (see an eleventh embodiment described later) and a number determined by lottery (see a twelfth embodiment described later) can be considered. In this way, since the prescribed number of times is one predetermined fixed number of times, it is possible to output a fixed number of symbol determination signals regularly from the main control device through the output terminal in the high-frequency support mode. In addition, since the prescribed number of times is determined by lottery, it is possible to output a plurality of pattern determination signals irregularly from the main control device through the output terminal in the high-frequency support mode.

Further, in one example of the present embodiment, when game information such as a plurality of symbol determination signals is collectively output from the main control device via the output terminal, one game effect is determined and executed for the collectively output game information. Further, in one example of the present embodiment, one game effect (for example, look-ahead effect, continuous effect, straddle effect) is determined and executed for a plurality of variable games under conditions such as that the right to execute the variable game is reserved, that the variable display time for the plurality of variable games is collectively set, and that the high-frequency support mode is set. In other words, one game performance can be varied according to the contents of signals collectively output from the main control device through the output terminal and the type (length) of the variation pattern (variation display time), and various game performances can be executed.

By the way, as described above, a gradual increase or decrease in the number of paid balls is desired for the gaming machine, so it is conceivable to moderate the increase in the number of paid balls by suppressing the probability of a big hit in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) and lengthening the time of the variable probability game state. However, since one performance is generally executed for each variable game, if the probability of a big win is suppressed, it is difficult for the lottery result to become a big win, and the repetition of the losing performance may make the player feel irritated and uncomfortable, and possibly reduce the interest and amusement in the game.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when game information such as a plurality of symbol determination signals are collectively output from the main control device via the output terminal, one game effect is determined and executed for the collectively output game information. In this way, when game information such as a plurality of pattern determination signals are collectively output from a main control device through an output terminal, one game performance is determined and executed for the game information collectively output as a signal, so that the number of apparent failure performances can be reduced even when failure performances are repeated. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration and the player's discomfort caused by the repetition of the losing performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest and amusement of the game. Further, when game information such as a plurality of symbol determination signals are collectively output from the main control device via the output terminal, one game performance is determined and executed for the collectively signal-output game information. In this way, when game information such as a plurality of pattern determination signals is collectively output from a main control device via an output terminal, one game performance is determined and executed for the collectively signal-outputted game information, so that a variation game in which a plurality of pattern determination signals are output and a variation game in which one game performance for the plurality of variation games is completed can be matched. This makes it possible to execute one game effect (straddle effect) in which a plurality of variable games are made to look like one variable game. Then, for example, the first condition is that the variable display time is collectively set for a plurality of variable games, and that a plurality of pattern determination signals for the variable games are collectively output from the main control device via the output terminal, so that the break between the variable games can be made difficult to grasp from the data display. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gaps between the plurality of variable games are grasped from the data display device, and it is possible to execute various performances (for example, look-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) over the plurality of variable games.

As the second condition, for example, the first condition is not satisfied, and in addition to this condition, the end of the variable game, the start of the variable game, the start of the jackpot game, the end of the jackpot game, etc. are conceivable.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 115, focusing on differences from other embodiments.

[Processing of main controller 4]
First, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 109, the processing of main controller 4 will be described, focusing on differences from other embodiments.

Here, FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the main part of the gaming machine system according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101, the gaming machine system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 10, a hall computer 102 and a data display 103. FIG.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an external output terminal board 101 for signal-outputting game information of the gaming machine 10 to the outside. The external output terminal plate 101 has, for example, a plurality of output terminal portions (not shown), and each output terminal portion (not shown) is connected to an input/output I/F 42 for data communication with the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 by wiring (not shown) so that data can be communicated (received). Thereby, the game information of the gaming machine 10 can be output as a signal to the outside through the output terminal section (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101 . Further, each output terminal portion (not shown) is connected to the hall computer 102 on the game hall side by wiring or the like so as to be capable of data communication (transmission). As a result, the hall computer 102 can obtain the game information of the gaming machine 10 that is signal-output from each output terminal section (not shown) of the gaming machine 10 . As a result, it is possible for the game hall side to grasp the game situation, game state, and the like of each game machine 10 .

The data display 103 displays, for example, the game status of the gaming machine 10, and is provided, for example, above each gaming machine 10 in the island facility of the gaming hall. The data display device 103 is connected to the hall computer 102 by wiring or the like so as to be capable of data communication (receiving), and by receiving game information or the like output as a signal from the hall computer 102, it is possible to display the game state and the game state based on the game information.

Here, the game information signal output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 and the game information signal output from the hall computer 102 to the data display device 103 include, for example, the number of jackpots for the current day and the past several days, the total number of variable games for the current day and the past several days, the number of variable games between the jackpots for the current day and the past several days, the number of variable games from the previous big win to the current variable game, and the game state of the gaming machine 10 (normal game state, probability variable game state, and time reduction). game state) can be specified, and the like.

Here, FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of the variation table used by main controller 4. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(C), three variation tables C (for normal jackpots, probability variable jackpots, and misses) used by the main controller 4 in the low frequency support mode with a low opening probability of the electric role object 315b, and as shown in FIG. The variation table C shown in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(C) is the same as the variation table (see FIG. 15) used by the main controller 4 in the first embodiment described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the variation table D used by the main controller 4 in the high-frequency support mode shown in FIG. 102 (D) has a similar variation pattern for any lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot and loss) regardless of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

In the variation table D, the variation pattern is set regardless of the lottery result of the big win lottery, but as in the variation table C (see FIGS. 102(A) to 102(C)), the variation pattern may be set in correspondence with the lottery result.

In the variation table D shown in FIG. 102(D), one of the variation patterns 09 to 12 is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. The variation pattern 09 is a variation pattern selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 79, and the variation display time is 5 seconds. A variation pattern 10 is a variation pattern selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 80 to 139, and the variation display time is 10 seconds. A variation pattern 11 is a variation pattern selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 140 to 189, and the variation display time is 15 seconds. A variation pattern 12 is a variation pattern selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 190 to 199, and the variation display time is 20 seconds. That is, variation pattern 09 (5 seconds), variation pattern 10 (10 seconds), variation pattern 11 (15 seconds), and variation pattern 12 (20 seconds) are likely to be selected in this order, and in the high-frequency support mode, a short variation display time is more likely to be selected. In this way, in the high-frequency support mode, the short variation display time is more likely to be selected, so that the average variation display time in each variation game is shortened. Therefore, as will be described later, the sense of sluggishness in performance when executing one performance in a plurality of variable games is suppressed, and the decrease in interest in the game due to the sense of sluggishness is suppressed.

[Variation game control process]
The variation game control process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the variation game control process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 24), but the procedure of the variation start process differs from the variation game control process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 24). Also, in the variable game control process of the present embodiment, in the variable stop process (see FIG. 103), a plurality of symbol determination signals (signals indicating that special symbols have been stopped and displayed) for a plurality of variable games may be output together, which is different from the variable game control process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 24).

[Variation start processing]
In the variation start processing of the present embodiment, the variation display time setting processing for setting the variation display time of the special symbols in the variation game, and the variation pattern command setting processing for setting the variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time of the special symbols in the variation game are different from the variation game control processing (see FIG. 24) of the above-described first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing of this embodiment. An example of the procedure of the change start process according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 104 .

<Steps S4101 and S4102>
As shown in FIG. 104, in the variation start process of the present embodiment, when the validity determination is performed (steps S1601 to S1603), the MPU 41 executes the variation display time setting process and the variation pattern command setting process (steps S4101 and S4102), starts the variation display of the special symbol (step S1606), and ends the variation start process. Details of the variable display time setting process and the variable pattern command setting process will be described later.

[Variable display time setting process]
In the variable display time setting process of the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is reserved for the right to execute the variable game in which the stop display symbol of the second special figure is reserved, the variable game and the reserved variable display time are collectively set. Here, FIGS. 105 to 107 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the variable display time setting process of this embodiment. The procedure of the variable display time setting process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. FIG.

<Steps S4201 to S4206>
As shown in FIG. 105, in the variable display time setting process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 41 is not in the high frequency support mode (step S4201: No), that is, in the low frequency support mode, the variable display time for the variable game is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment (steps S4202 to S4206). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 based on the normal jackpot variation table C (see FIG. 102A) when the lottery result is a normal jackpot (step S4202: Yes) (step S4203), and when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot (step S4204: Yes), the variation type counter CS1 based on the probability variation jackpot variation table C (see FIG. 102B). A change display time is set according to the value (step S4205), and if the lottery result is a loss (both steps S4202 and S4204 are No), a change display time is set according to the value of the change type counter CS1 based on the loss change table C (see FIG. 102C) (step S4206).

On the other hand, if it is the high frequency support mode (step S4201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4209.

<Steps S4207 and S4208>
When the setting of the variation display time for the variation game is completed according to the jackpot lottery result (steps S4202 to S4206), the MPU 41 sets 1 as the variation pattern setting number (step S4207).

The variation pattern setting number indicates the number of variation games for which the variation display time is set in the high-frequency support mode, and when the variation pattern setting number is 1, it indicates that only the variation display time of the variation game is set. In addition, the maximum number of variation patterns to be set is 4, and in the case of 2 to 4, it indicates that the variation display time for a plurality of variation games is collectively set. The set number of fluctuation patterns is referenced by the MPU 41 to determine the number of pattern confirmation signals to be output when the pattern confirmation signals are output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 (see step S4406) in the fluctuation stop processing in the high-frequency support mode in FIG. 109, which will be described later. That is, the set number of variation patterns corresponds to the number of symbol determination signals output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 . Therefore, when the variation pattern setting number is 1, only the symbol determination signal for the variation game is output to the outside of the game machine 10, and when the variation pattern setting number is 2 to 4, the symbol determination signals for a plurality of variation games are collectively output to the outside of the game machine 10.例文帳に追加

Then, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time setting flag to ON (step S4208), and terminates the variable display time setting process. The variation display time setting flag is a flag indicating that the variation display time has been set in the variation game, and is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to set the variation pattern command in step S4301 of the variation pattern command setting process in FIG. 108 described later.

<Step S4209>
When the high-frequency support mode is set (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is 0 (step S4209). MPU41, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is 0 (step S4209: Yes), moves the process to step S4210 in FIG. 106, and sets the variation display time for one or more variation games. On the other hand, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is not 0 (step S4209: No), the MPU 41 ends the variation display time setting process without setting the variation display time for the variation game.

Here, the value of the variation pattern setting number counter indicates the number of variation games in which the second special symbol is undetermined (unstopped display) among the variation display time set in the high frequency support mode, and is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting number when the variation display time is set in steps S4212, S4219, S4224, and S4227 of the variation display time setting process described later (steps S4210, S4216, S4221, S 4226). In addition, the variation pattern setting number counter is not set in the low frequency support mode, and its value remains 0. Then, the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S4403) when the second special symbol is determined (stopped display) in the variation stop processing in the high-frequency support mode of FIG. 109 described later (step S1404). That is, when the value of the variable pattern setting number counter is not 0, it indicates that there is a variable game in which the second special symbol is undetermined (unstopped display) in the variable game in which the variable display time is set. Therefore, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is not 0 (in the case of 1 to 3) in the variation start processing in the high-frequency support mode (step S4209: No), at least it can be determined that the variation display time for the variation game has already been determined, so the variation display time setting processing ends without setting the variation display time for the variation game. On the other hand, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is 0 in the variation start processing in the high frequency support mode (step S4209: Yes), it can be determined that there is no variation game in which the variation display time has already been set, so in subsequent steps, the variation display time is set based on the number of reservations for the second special figure and the result of the jackpot lottery.

<Steps S4210 and S4211>
When the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is 0 (step S4209: Yes), as shown in FIG. 106, based on the variation table D (see FIG. 102 (D)) for the high frequency support mode, the variation display time for the variation game is set (step S4210), and it is determined whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a jackpot. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4212 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a jackpot (step S4210: Yes), and shifts the process to step S4214 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is not a jackpot (step S4211: No), that is, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a loss.

<Steps S4212 and S4213>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a jackpot (step S4211: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the variation pattern setting number counter and the variation pattern setting number to 1 (steps S4212 and S4213), sets the variation display time setting flag indicating that the variation display time is set to ON (step S4208 in FIG. 105), and ends the variation display time setting process.

Here, as described later, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure in the high-frequency support mode (when the number of reservations M is 1 to 3), the variable display time for the reserved variable game can be set in addition to the variable game. On the other hand, when the lottery result for the variation game is a big hit, 1 is set as the value of the variation pattern setting number counter and the variation pattern setting number without judging whether or not there is a hold. Thus, when the lottery result for the variable game is a big hit, the value of the variable pattern setting number counter is decremented by 1 in the variable stop processing of FIG. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game is a jackpot, the pattern confirmation signal is forcibly output at the end of the variation game even if there is a hold for the second special symbol. Thus, when the result of the big winning lottery for the variable game is a big win, the symbol determination signal is forcibly output at the end of the variable game even if there is a hold for the second special symbol, so that the symbol determination signal is output to the variable game that notifies the big win, so that the symbol determination signal for the variable game that is the big win is prevented from being output after the end of the big winning game executed after the end of the variation game that reports the big win. As a result, the number of variable games after the big winning game is prevented from becoming different from the actual number of variable games, and for example, the number of variable games after the big winning game displayed on the data display 103 is prevented from being different from the actual number of variable games after the big winning game.

<Steps S4214 and S4215>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is not a big hit (step S4211: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is a loss, the MPU 41 acquires the number M of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 (step S4214), and whether the number of reservations M is 1 or more, that is, the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure is pending (step S4215).

MPU41, when the number M of reservations is 1 or more, that is, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure (step S4215: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4216 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not 1 or more, that is, if there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure (step S4215: No), the MPU 41 sets 1 as the value of the variation pattern setting number counter and the variation pattern setting number (steps S4212 and S4213), sets the variation display time setting flag indicating that the variation display time is set to ON (step S4208 in FIG. 105), and ends the variation display time setting process.

<Step S4216>
If the number of reservations M is 1 or more, that is, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure (step S4215: Yes), as shown in FIG. The same time as the variable display time set for the variable game set in 10 is set (step S4216). That is, the variable game time for the suspension 1 variable game in the high frequency support mode is determined based on the variable display time set for the variable game without referring to the variable table D (see FIG. 102(D)).

In addition, the variable game time for the pending 1 variable game in the high frequency support mode may be set to a time different from the variable display time set for the variable game. For example, the variation table for the variation game and the variation table for the reservation 1 variation game may be set as different ones, or the variation game time for the suspension 1 variation game may be set in variation start processing in the main processing different from the variation display time for the variation game.

<Step S4217>
In step S4217, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big hit lottery for the holding 1 variation game is a big hit. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4219 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the holding 1 variable game is a big hit (step S4217: Yes), and shifts the process to step S4218 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the holding 1 variable game is not a big hit (step S4217: No), that is, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the holding 1 variable game is a loss.

<Step S4218>
If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the hold 1 variation game is not a big hit (step S4217: No), that is, if it is out, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of holds M obtained in step S4214 in FIG. 106 is 2 or more (step S4218). When the number M of reservations is 2 or more (step S4218: Yes), that is, when the number M of reservations is 2 or 3, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4221. On the other hand, when the number M of reservations is not 2 or more (step S4218: No), that is, when the number M of reservations is 1, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4219.

<Steps S4219 and S4220>
If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the pending 1 variable game is a big hit (step S4217: Yes), or if the pending number M is not 2 or more (step S4218: No), that is, if the pending number M is 1, 2 is set as the value of the variable pattern setting number counter and the variable pattern setting number (steps S4219 and S4220), and the variable display time setting flag indicating that the variable display time is set is set to ON (step S42 in FIG. 105). 08), the variable display time setting process ends.

That is, when the reserved number M of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure in the high-frequency support mode is 1, when the lottery result of the big win lottery for the variable game is lost, the variable display times of the two variable games of the variable game and the reserve 1 variable game are collectively set at the same time, and the value of the variable pattern setting number counter is set to 2. Here, the value of the fluctuation pattern setting number counter is decremented by one in the fluctuation stop processing of FIG. 109, which will be described later. Therefore, when the holding 1 variation game is executed as the variation game, since the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is 1, even when the holding 1 variation game starts the variation of the second special figure as the variation game, the variation display time of the suspension 1 variation game is prevented from being set. Thereby, it is prevented that the variable display time is set redundantly for the holding 1 variable game.

In addition, when the reserved number M of the right to execute the variable game by the second special symbol in the high-frequency support mode is 1 or more (1 to 3), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game is lost, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the reserved 1 variable game is a big win, the value of the fluctuation pattern set number counter is set to 2. As a result, for the same reason as when the lottery result for the variable game is a big win, even if the number of reservations M for the second special symbol is 2 or more, the pattern confirmation signal is forcibly output at the end of the reservation 1 variation game that informs the big win, so that when the reservation 1 variation game is executed as the variation game, the pattern confirmation signal is output at the end of the variation game. Therefore, when a holding 1 variation game for informing a big win is executed as the variation game, output of a symbol determination signal for the holding 1 variation game is prevented after the end of the big winning game to be executed thereafter. As a result, the number of variable games after the big winning game is prevented from becoming different from the actual number of variable games, and for example, the number of variable games after the big winning game displayed on the data display 103 is prevented from being different from the actual number of variable games after the big winning game.

<Step S4221>
MPU41, when the number of reservations M is 2 or more (step S4218: Yes), that is, when the number of reservations M is 2 or 3, MPU41, the variable game set in step S4210 of FIG. The same time as the variable display time set for is set (step S4221). That is, the variable game time for the pending 2 variable game in the high frequency support mode is determined based on the variable display time set for the variable game in the same manner as the variable game time for the pending 2 variable game without referring to the variable table D (see FIG. 102(D)).

In addition, the variable game time for the hold 2 variable game in the high frequency support mode may be set to a time different from the variable display time set for the variable game. For example, the variation table for the variation game and the variation table for the reservation 2 variation game may be set as different ones, or the variation game time for the suspension 2 variation game may be set in variation start processing in the main processing different from the variation display time for the variation game.

<Step S4222>
In step S4222, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big hit lottery for the hold 2 variation game is a big hit. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4224 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the holding 2 variation game is a big hit (step S4222: Yes), and shifts the process to step S4223 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the holding 2 variation game is not a big hit (step S4222: No), that is, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the holding 2 variation game is a loss.

<Step S4223>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the hold 2 variation game is not a big hit (step S4217: No), that is, if it is out, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds M obtained in step S4214 of FIG. 106 is 3 (step S4223). MPU41 transfers a process to step S4226, when the number M of reservations is 3 (step S4223: Yes). On the other hand, when the number M of reservations is not 3 (step S4223: No), that is, when the number M of reservations is 2, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4224.

<Steps S4224 and S4225>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the hold 2 variable game is a big hit (step S4222: Yes), or if the number of reservations M is not 3 (step S4223: No), that is, when the number of reservations M is 2, 3 is set as the value of the variation pattern setting number counter and the variation pattern setting number (steps S4224 and S4225), and the variation display time setting flag indicating that the variation display time is set is set to ON (step S420 in FIG. 105) 8) End the variable display time setting process.

That is, when the reserved number M of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure in the high-frequency support mode is 2, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variable game is lost, the variable display times of the three variable games, ie, the variable game, the retained 1 variable game and the retained 2 variable game are collectively set at the same time, and the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is set to 3. Here, the value of the fluctuation pattern setting number counter is decremented by 1 in the fluctuation stop processing in FIG. 109, which will be described later. Therefore, when the holding 1 variation game is executed as the variation game, the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is 2, and when the holding 2 variation game is executed as the variation game, the value of the variation pattern setting number counter is 1. Therefore, even when the variation of the second special figure is started as the suspension 1 variation game and the suspension 2 variation game as the variation game, the variation display time of the suspension 1 variation game and the suspension 2 variation game is prevented from being set. Thereby, it is prevented that the variable display time is set redundantly for the pending 1 variable game and the pending 2 variable game.

In addition, when the reserved number M of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure in the high-frequency support mode is 2 or more (2 or 3), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game and the reserved 1 variable game is a loss, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the reserved 2 variable game is a big win, the value of the fluctuation pattern set number counter is set to 3. As a result, for the same reason as when the lottery result for the variation game is a big win, even if the number M of reservations for the second special symbol is 3, the pattern confirmation signal is forcibly output at the end of the reservation 2 variation game for informing the big win, so that when the reservation 2 variation game is executed as the variation game, the pattern confirmation signal is output at the end of the variation game. Therefore, when a holding 2 variation game for informing a big win is executed as the variation game, output of a symbol determination signal for the holding 2 variation game is prevented after the end of the big winning game to be executed thereafter. As a result, the number of variable games after the big winning game is prevented from becoming different from the actual number of variable games, and for example, the number of variable games after the big winning game displayed on the data display 103 is prevented from being different from the actual number of variable games after the big winning game.

<Step S4226>
When the number of reservations M is 3 (step S4223: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the same time as the variable display time set for the variable game set in step S4210 of FIG. ). That is, the variable game time for the hold 3 variable game in the high-frequency support mode is determined based on the variable display time set for the variable game in the same manner as the variable game time for the hold 1 variable game and the hold 2 variable game without referring to the variable table D (see FIG. 102 (D)).

In addition, the variable game time for the pending 3 variable game in the high frequency support mode may be set to a time different from the variable display time set for the variable game. For example, the variation table for the variation game and the variation table for the suspension 3 variation game may be set as different ones, or the variation game time for the suspension 3 variation game may be set in variation start processing in the main processing different from the variation display time for the variation game.

<Steps S4227 and S4228>
When the variable display time of the pending 3 variable game is set, the MPU 41 sets the value of the variable pattern setting number counter and the variable pattern setting number to 4 (steps S4227 and S4228), sets the variable display time setting flag indicating that the variable display time is set to ON (step S4208 in FIG. 105), and ends the variable display time setting process.

[Variation pattern command setting process]
In the variation pattern command setting process of the present embodiment, in addition to the variation display time for the variation game, when the variation display time for the reservation of the right to execute the variation game in which the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is notified by the stop display pattern of the second special figure is set (when the variation display time is collectively set for a plurality of variation games), the variation pattern command for each variation game is collectively set. Here, FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern command setting process of this embodiment. The procedure of the variable display time setting process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 108 .

<Step S4301>
As shown in FIG. 108, in the variation pattern command setting process of the present embodiment, as step S4301, it is determined whether or not the variation display time setting flag indicating that the variation display time is set in the variation game is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation game is a variation game for setting the variation pattern command based on the variation display time setting flag. If the variable display time setting flag is set to ON (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4302, and if the variable display time setting flag is set to OFF (step S4301: No), the variation pattern command setting process ends.

<Steps S4302 to S4304>
When the variable display time setting flag is set to ON (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 41 acquires the variable display time and winning/failure information of the variable game (steps S4302 and S4303), and sets the variable pattern command for the variable game (step S4304).

<Steps S4305 to S4308>
In step S4305, the MPU 41 acquires the variation pattern setting number set in the variation display time setting process of FIGS. 105 to 107, and further sets the variation pattern setting number command for notifying the variation pattern setting number to the sound lamp control device 5 (step S4306). Moreover, MPU41 judges whether the number of variation pattern setting is 1 (step S4307). When the variation pattern setting number is 1 (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the variation display time setting flag to OFF (step S4308), and terminates the variation pattern command setting process. On the other hand, MPU41, if the number of variation pattern setting is not 1 (step S4307: No), that is, if the number of variation pattern setting is 2 to 4, the process proceeds to step S4309.

<Step S4309>
If the variation pattern setting number is not 1 (step S4307: No), that is, if the variation pattern setting number is 2 to 4, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation pattern setting number is 2 (step S4309). MPU41, if the number of variation pattern settings is 2 (step S4309: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4310, if the number of variation pattern settings is not 2 (step S4309: No), i.e., if the number of variation pattern settings is 3 or 4, the process proceeds to step S4313.

<Steps S4310 to S4312>
When the variation pattern setting number is 2 (step S4309: Yes), the MPU 41 acquires the variation display time and win/loss information of the hold 1 variation game (steps S4310 and S4311), and sets the variation pattern command for the hold 1 variation game (step S4312). And, when the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command for the pending 1 variation game (step S4312), it sets the variation display time setting flag to OFF (step S4308), and terminates the variation pattern command setting process.

<Step S4313>
When the variation pattern setting number is not 2 (step S4309: No), that is, when the variation pattern setting number is 3 or 4, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation pattern setting number is 3 (step S4313). MPU41, if the number of variation pattern setting is 3 (step S4313: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4314, if the number of variation pattern setting is not 3 (step S4313: No), that is, if the number of variation pattern setting is 4, the process proceeds to step S4317.

<Steps S4314 to S4316>
When the variation pattern setting number is 3 (step S4313: Yes), the MPU 41 acquires the variation display time and winning information of the hold 2 variation game (steps S4314 and S4315), and sets the variation pattern command for the hold 2 variation game (step S4316). And, when the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command for the hold 2 variation game (step S4316), it sets the variation display time setting flag to OFF (step S4308), and terminates the variation pattern command setting process.

<Step S4317>
When the variation pattern setting number is not 3 (step S4313: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation pattern setting number is 4 (step S4317). If the number of variation pattern settings is 4 (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4318, and if the number of variation pattern settings is not 4 (step S4313: No), sets the variation display time setting flag to off (step S4308), and ends the variation pattern command setting process.

<Steps S4318 to S4320>
When the variation pattern setting number is 4 (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 acquires the variation display time and win/loss information of the hold 3 variation game (steps S4318 and S4319), and sets the variation pattern command for the hold 3 variation game (step S4320). And, when the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command for the pending 3 variation game (step S4320), it sets the variation display time setting flag to OFF (step S4308), and terminates the variation pattern command setting process.

In the variation pattern command setting process of the present embodiment, the number of variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of variation pattern settings set in the above-described variation display time setting process is set. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable display time is collectively set for a plurality of variable games, a variable pattern command including information on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variable game time is set for each of the variable games. Then, the variation pattern command including a plurality of information regarding each variation game is output as a signal from the main controller 4 (MPU 41) to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. That is, when the variable display time is collectively set for a plurality of variable games, a plurality of individual variable pattern commands for those variable games are collectively output from the main control unit 4 (MPU 41) to the sound lamp control unit 5. Therefore, when the variable display time is collectively set for a plurality of variable games, the voice lamp control device 5 can collectively receive the variable pattern commands of these variable games, and can individually determine the variable display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for each variable game. As a result, it becomes possible to execute an effect based on one effect pattern for a plurality of variable games for which the change patterns are collectively transmitted. That is, it becomes possible to execute a series of one effect for a plurality of variable games.

A plurality of variation pattern commands are signal-output as one data of multiple bytes. Also, the plurality of variation pattern commands may be signal-output from the main control unit 4 (MPU 41) to the sound lamp control device 5 as individual data through serial communication or parallel communication.

[Variation stop processing]
In the variation stop processing of this embodiment, when the variation display time for the variation game has elapsed, the processing of stopping and displaying the special symbol and outputting the symbol confirmation signal to the outside of the gaming machine 10 is executed. Here, FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation stopping process of this embodiment. The procedure of the variable display processing of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S4401 and S4402>
As shown in FIG. 109, in the variation stop processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbols when the variation display time for the variation game has elapsed, similarly to the first embodiment described above, and sets the variation display flag to OFF (steps S1403 to S1405). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the high-frequency support mode (step S4401). When the MPU 41 is in the high frequency support mode (step S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4403. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode (step S4401: No), that is, in the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 outputs a symbol determination signal for the variation game to the outside of the gaming machine 10 (step S4402), and terminates the variation stop processing.

<Step S4403 and Step S4404>
If the high-frequency support mode (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation pattern setting number counter indicating the number of undetermined (unstopped display) variation games among the variation games for the second special figure in which the variation display time is set (step S4403), and determines whether the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4404). MPU41 shifts a process to step S4405, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4404: Yes). On the other hand, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4404: No), the MPU 41 ends the variation stop processing. That is, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4404: Yes), there is an undetermined (unstopped display) variation game among the variation games for the second special figure in which the variation display time is set.

<Steps S4405 to S4407>
If the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 41 acquires the variation pattern setting number indicating the number of variation games for which the variation display time is set in the above-described variation display time setting process (step S4405), and outputs a number of symbol determination signals corresponding to the variation pattern setting number from the main control device 4 to the outside of the gaming machine 10 through the external connection terminal board 101 (step S4406). That is, the MPU 41 outputs a number of symbol determination signals corresponding to the set number of variation patterns from the main control device 4 to the outside of the gaming machine 10 via the external connection terminal plate 101 when the variation game ends. Then, the MPU 41 clears the set number of fluctuation patterns (step S4407), and terminates the fluctuation stop processing.

Here, in the gaming system of this embodiment, as described above, the external connection terminal board 101 of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the hall computer 102 installed on the gaming hall side so as to be able to transmit data, and the hall computer 102 is connected to the data display 103 so as to be able to transmit data (see FIG. 101). Therefore, a symbol determination signal corresponding to one piece of game information is transmitted to the hall computer 102 . Therefore, when the number of symbol confirmation signals corresponding to the number of variation pattern settings is output to the outside of the gaming machine 10, the hole computer 102 receives the number of symbol confirmation signals corresponding to the number of variation pattern settings. Then, the hole computer 102 that has received the number of pattern confirmation signals corresponding to the number of variation pattern settings transmits the number of received pattern confirmation signals to the data display device 103 . Further, the data display 103 which receives the number of pattern confirmation signals updates the number of variable games from the last big hit to the present displayed on the data display 103 to the number of times obtained by adding the number of the received pattern confirmation signals. In this case, for example, when the number of received symbol determination signals is 1, the number of variable games from the previous big win to the present displayed on the data display 103 is updated to the number of times incremented by one. In addition, when the number of received symbol confirmation signals is 2, the number of variable games from the previous big win to the present is 2, and when the number of received symbol confirmation signals is 3, the number of variable games from the previous big win to the present is 3, and when the number of received symbol confirmation signals is 4, the number of variable games from the previous big win to the present is added to the number of times of variable games from the previous big win to the present, which is displayed on the data display 103. Updated. That is, the number of variable games displayed on the data display device 103 from the last big hit to the present is not necessarily updated for each variable game in the high-frequency support mode, but is updated after the execution of the plurality of variable games when a plurality of pattern determination signals are collectively output when a plurality of variation pattern setting numbers are set. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, it is possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of variable games on the data display 103 and the actual number of variable games. Thereby, when the variable game is continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode, it becomes difficult to grasp the break between the variable games from the data display 103 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game caused by the fact that the data display device grasps the break between the variable games when the variable games are continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode, and it is possible to execute various look-ahead performances (straddle performances) over a plurality of times of the variable games. For example, when a read-ahead performance (crossover performance) is executed to make a plurality of variable games look like one variable game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that it is a crossover performance, so that the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol confirmation signals for a plurality of variable games are output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 in the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state and time gaming state), but only in the probability variable gaming state. Of course, a plurality of pattern confirmation signals may be output to the outside of the game machine 10 in the normal game state, and in this case, a plurality of pattern confirmation signals may be output to the outside of the game machine 10 in at least one of the probability variable game state and the time-saving game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of variable games for which the variable display time is set in the variable display time setting process is completed, a plurality of symbol confirmation signals are output. However, if the variable game for which the variable display time is set includes a game in which the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win, the symbol confirmation signal may be output after the variable game that is a big win is completed (when the game is shifted to the big win game state). Further, when the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) is shifted to the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) after the end of any of the variable games in which the variable display time is set, the pattern determination signal may be output after the final variable game in the game state (high-frequency support) before the shift is completed. In these cases, in the last variation game in the gaming state before the transition, if there are a plurality of unoutputted symbol determination signals, the unoutputted symbol determination signals may be output. As a result, the symbol determination signal in the game state before transition is prevented from being output in the game state after transition. That is, in the game state after the transition, it is possible to prevent the symbol confirmation signal from being output in a different game state before the transition.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115, the processing of the audio ramp control device 5 will be described, focusing on differences from other embodiments.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, when the variation pattern commands for a plurality of variation games are collectively transmitted from the main control board 4, one effect pattern is set for those variation games. Here, FIGS. 110 to 113 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. An example of the procedure of command determination processing according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. FIG.

<Steps S4501 and S4502>
As shown in FIG. 110, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51, when receiving a command (step S2101: Yes), determines whether the received command is a variation pattern setting number command indicating the number of variation games in which the variation display time is set in the high frequency support mode (step S4501). If the received command is a variation pattern setting number command (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a variation pattern setting number counter to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting number (step S4502), and ends the command determination process.

Here, the variation pattern setting number counter is a counter that defines the timing of setting the effect pattern. The value of this variation pattern setting number counter is decremented by 1 each time a variation pattern is received as will be described later, and the effect pattern is determined at the timing when the value becomes 0. That is, the voice ramp control device 5 determines the production pattern at the stage when all the variation patterns for the variation game in which the variation display time is set in the high frequency support mode are confirmed.

On the other hand, when the received command is not the variation pattern setting number command (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4503.

<Step S4503>
If the received command is not a variation pattern setting number command (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command for the variation game (step S4503). MPU51, if the received command is a variation pattern command for the variation game (step S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4504, if the received command is not a variation pattern command for the variation game (step S4503: No), the process proceeds to step S4510 of FIG.

<Steps S4504 to S4509>
When the received command is a variation pattern command for the variation game (step S4503: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variation display time for the variation game and the stop display combination of a plurality of decorative symbols (steps S4504 and S4505). Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation pattern setting number counter (step S4506), and determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4507).

When the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4507: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. That is, MPU51, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4507: No), does not determine the effect pattern for the variation game. Thus, when the variable display time is collectively set for a plurality of variable games, performance can be executed for the plurality of variable games by one performance pattern without individually determining performance patterns for the variable games. That is, it becomes possible to execute a look-ahead effect (straddle effect) in which a plurality of variable games are disguised as one variable game. And, in this embodiment, when the variable display time is collectively set for a plurality of variable games as described above, a plurality of symbol determination signals for those variable games are collectively output, making it difficult to grasp the breaks between the variable games from the data display. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gaps between the plurality of variable games are grasped from the data display device, and it is possible to execute various look-ahead performances (straddle performances) across the plurality of variable games.

Even if the variable display time is collectively set for a plurality of variable games, it is not always necessary to set one effect pattern for the plurality of variable games. For example, when the variable display time is collectively set for the variable games of the specified number of times, one performance pattern may be set for the variable games of the specified number of times, or whether or not one performance pattern is set for a plurality of variable games may be determined by lottery.

On the other hand, the MPU51 is a production pad for the floating pad that supports the floating patterns based on the high -frequency support mode variable table shown in FIG. The turn is determined (step S4508), and the display fluctuation pattern command is sent to the display control device 6 (step S4509), and the command judgment process is terminated. Further, the display control device 6 causes the pattern display section 341 to execute an image effect corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Here, FIGS. 114 and 115 are diagrams showing an example of the variation type table used by the audio ramp control device 5 in high-frequency support. Specifically, FIG. 114(A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used when the number of variation pattern settings is 1, FIG. 114(B) is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation type table used when the number of variation pattern settings is 2, FIG. 115(A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation type table used when the number of variation pattern settings is 3, and FIG. There is. In the variation type table shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the battle ready-to-win effect pattern is set as the effect pattern, but the effect pattern in the high-frequency support mode does not necessarily have to be the battle ready-to-win effect pattern. In addition, although the variation type table in the case of the high-frequency support mode is common to the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, different performance patterns may be set for the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 114 (A), in the variation type table used when the number of variation patterns set is 1 in the high-frequency support mode, the variation display time and variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command for the variation are defined. For example, the variation pattern command 'A09' whose variation pattern is '09' when the lottery result is '5R normal jackpot' is associated with the variation display time '5s' and the variation type 'battle winning reach A1 performance pattern'. Further, the variation pattern command 'A10' of the 'ordinary jackpot' is associated with a 'battle winning reach A2 performance pattern' with a variation display time of '10 s', the variation pattern command 'A11' is associated with a 'battle winning reach A3 performance pattern' with a variation display time of '15 s', and the variation pattern command 'A12' is associated with a 'battle winning reach A4 performance pattern' with a variation display time of '20 s'.

Also, in the high-frequency support mode, if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" when the number of variation patterns set is 1, the variation pattern command "B09" has a "battle win reach A1 effect pattern" with a variation display time of "5 s", the variation pattern command "B10" has a "battle win reach A2 effect pattern" with a variation display time of "10 s", the variation pattern command "B11" has a "battle win reach A3 effect pattern" with a variation display time of "15 s", and the variation pattern command "B". 12” is associated with a “battle winning reach A4 production pattern” with a variable display time of “20 s”.

In addition, when the number of variation patterns set is 1 in the high frequency support mode, if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern command "C09" has a "battle win reach A1 effect pattern" with a variation display time of "5 s", the variation pattern command "C10" has a "battle win reach A2 effect pattern" with a variation display time of "10 s", the variation pattern command "C11" has a "battle win reach A3 effect pattern" with a variation display time of "15 s", and the variation pattern command " C12” is associated with a “battle winning reach A4 effect pattern” with a variable display time of “20 s”.

In addition, if the lottery result is "lost" when the number of variation patterns set is 1 in the high-frequency support mode, the variation pattern command "D09" has a "battle loss reach A1 effect pattern" with a variation display time of "5s", the variation pattern command "D10" has a "battle loss reach A2 effect pattern" with a variation display time of "10s", the variation pattern command "D11" has a "battle loss reach A3 effect pattern" with a variation display time of "15s", and the variation pattern command "D12" varies. A "battle losing reach A4 production pattern" with a display time of "20 s" is associated with each.

As shown in FIG. 114 (B), in the variation type table used when the variation pattern setting number is 2 in the high frequency support mode, the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the combination of variation pattern commands for the variation game and the hold 1 variation game is defined. For example, if the lottery result of the variable game is "out", the lottery result of the pending 1 variable game is "5R normal jackpot", and the combination of the variable pattern commands for the variable game and the pending 1 variable game is "D09" and "A09" ("D09"-"A09"), the total variable display time of the variable game and the pending 1 variable game is "10s", so the variable type "battle win reach B1 production pattern" of the variable display time "10s" ” is associated.

In addition, among the combinations of variation pattern commands for the variation game and the pending 1 variation game, the variation pattern command combination ``D10''-``A10'' in which the variation game is ``off'' and the suspension 1 variation game is ``5R normal jackpot'' has a ``battle winning reach B2 production pattern'' with a fluctuation display time of ``20s'', and the combination ``D11''-``A11'' has a ``battle winning reach B3 production pattern'' with a fluctuation display time of ``30s'', and the combination ``D12''-`` A12” is associated with a “battle winning reach B4 effect pattern” with a variable display time of “40 s”.

In addition, among the combinations of variation pattern commands for the variation game and the pending 1 variation game, the variation pattern command combination ``D09''-``B09'' in which the variation game is ``off'' and the suspension 1 variation game is ``5R probability variable jackpot'' is a ``battle winning reach B1 production pattern'' with a fluctuation display time of ``10s'', and ``D10''-``B10'' is a ``battle winning reach B2 production pattern'' with a fluctuation display time of ``20s'', and the combination ``D11''-`` B11" is associated with a "battle winning reach B3 effect pattern" with a variable display time of "30s", and the combination "D12"-"B12" is associated with a "battle winning reach B4 effect pattern" with a variable display time of "40s".

Also, among the combinations of variation pattern commands for the variation game and the pending 1 variation game, the variation pattern command combination ``D09''-``C09'' in which the variation game is ``off'' and the suspension 1 variation game is ``16R probability variable jackpot'' is ``battle winning reach B1 production pattern'' with variation display time ``10s'', ``D10''-``C10'' is ``battle winning reach B2 production pattern'' with variation display time ``20s'', and the combination ``D11''- 'C11' is associated with a 'battle winning reach B3 effect pattern' with a variable display time of '30s', and the combination 'D12'-'C12' is associated with a 'battle winning reach B4 effect pattern' with a variable display time of '40s'.

In addition, among the combinations of the variation pattern commands for the variation game and the pending 1 variation game, the variation pattern command combination ``D09''-``D09'' in which the variation game is ``losing'' and the suspension 1 fluctuation game is ``losing'' has a ``battle losing reach B1 production pattern'' with a fluctuation display time of ``10s'', ``D10''-``D10'' has a ``battle losing reach B2 production pattern'' with a fluctuation display time of ``20s'', and the combination ``D11''-``D11''. A "battle losing reach B3 production pattern" with a variable display time of "30s" and a "battle losing reach B4 production pattern" with a variable display time of "40s" are associated with the combination "D12"-"D12".

Thus, when the number of variation pattern setting is 2, that is, when the variation display times for two variation games are collectively set in the high frequency support mode, one performance pattern executed across the two variation games is associated with the variation type table of the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 115 (A), in the variation type table used when the number of variation patterns set is 3 in the high-frequency support mode, the contents of the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the combination of variation pattern commands for the variation game, the hold 1 variation game and the hold 2 variation game are defined. For example, if the lottery result of the variable game and the pending 1 variable game is "out", the lottery result of the pending 2 variable game is "5R normal jackpot", and the combination of the variable pattern commands for the variable game and the pending 1 variable game is "D09", "D09" and "A09" ("D09"-"D09"-"A09"), the total variable display time of the variable game, the pending 1 variable game and the pending 2 variable game is "15s" , the variation type “battle winning reach C1 effect pattern” with the variation display time “15 s” is associated.

Also, among the combinations of variation pattern commands for the variation game, the hold 1 variation game and the hold 2 variation game, the variation pattern command combination "D10"-"D10"-"A10" in which the variation game and the hold 1 variation game are "out" and the hold 2 variation game is "5R normal jackpot" is "battle winning reach C2 production pattern" with a variation display time of "30 s", and the combination "D11"-"D11"-"A11" is a variation display time " 45s”, and the combination “D12”-“D12”-“A12” is associated with a “battle-winning reach C4 effect pattern” with a variable display time of “60s”.

Also, among the combinations of the variation pattern commands for the variation game, the hold 1 variation game and the hold 2 variation game, the variation pattern command combination "D09"-"D09"-"B09" in which the variation game and the hold 1 variation game are "off" and the hold 2 variation game is "5R probability variable jackpot" "Battle win reach C1 production pattern" with a variation display time "15 s", "D10"-"D10"-"B10" is a variation display time " 30 s", the combination ``D11'' - ``D11'' - ``B11'' is associated with the ``battle winning reach C3 presentation pattern'' with variable display time ``45 s'', and the combination ``D12'' - ``D12'' - ``B12'' is associated with the ``battle winning reach B4 presentation pattern'' with variable display time ``60 s''.

In addition, among the combinations of variation pattern commands for the variation game, the hold 1 variation game and the hold 2 variation game, the variation pattern command combination "D09"-"D09"-"C09" in which the variation game and the hold 1 variation game are "off" and the hold 2 variation game is "16R probability variable jackpot" "Battle winning reach C1 production pattern" of the variation display time "15 s", "D10"-"D10"-"C10" is the variation display time. A "battle winning reach C2 production pattern" of "30 s", a combination "D11"-"D11"-"C11" is associated with a "battle winning reach C3 production pattern" of variable display time "45 s", and a combination of "D12"-"D12"-"C12" is associated with a "battle winning reach B4 production pattern" of variable display time "60 s".

In addition, among the combinations of variation pattern commands for the variation game, the suspension 1 variation game and the suspension 2 variation game, the variation pattern command combination "D09"-"D09"-"D09" in which all of the variation game, the suspension 1 variation game and the suspension 2 variation game are "off" "Battle loss reach C1 production pattern" with variation display time "15 s", "D10"-"D10"-"D10" "battle" with variation display time "30 s" The combination ``D11''-``D11''-``D11'' is associated with a ``battle-losing reach C3 presentation pattern'' with a variable display time of ``45 s'', and the combination ``D12''-``D12''-``D12'' with a ``battle-losing reach B4 presentation pattern'' with a variable display time of ``60 s''.

Thus, when the number of variation pattern settings is 3, that is, when variation display times for three variation games are collectively set in the high-frequency support mode, one performance pattern executed over the three variation games is associated with the variation type table of the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 115 (B), in the variation type table used when the number of variation patterns set is 4 in the high-frequency support mode, the content of the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the combination of variation pattern commands for the variation game, the hold 1 variation game, the hold 2 variation game, and the hold 3 variation game is defined. For example, the lottery result of the variable game, the pending 1 variable game and the pending 2 variable game is "miss", the lottery result of the pending 3 variable game is "5R normal jackpot", and the combination of the variable pattern command for the variable game, the pending 1 variable game, the pending 2 variable game and the pending 3 variable game is "D09", "D09", "D09" and "A09" ("D09"-"D09"-"D09"-"A09" ), the total variable display time of the variable game, the pending 1 variable game, the pending 2 variable game, and the pending 3 variable game is "20 s", so the variable type "battle winning reach D1 effect pattern" of the variable display time "20 s" is associated.

Also, among the combinations of variation pattern commands for the variation game, the suspension 1 variation game, the suspension 2 variation game, and the suspension 3 variation game, the variation game, the suspension 1 variation game, and the suspension 2 variation game are “off”, and the suspension 3 variation game is the “5R normal jackpot”. '-'D11'-'D11'-'A11' is associated with a 'battle winning reach D3 effect pattern' with a variable display time of '60s', and the combination 'D12'-'D12'-'D12'-'A12' is associated with a 'battle winning reach D4 effect pattern' with a variable display time of '80s'.

Also, among the combinations of variation pattern commands for the variation game, the suspension 1 variation game, the suspension 2 variation game, and the suspension 3 variation game, the variation game, the suspension 1 variation game, and the suspension 2 variation game are “off”, and the suspension 3 variation game is the “5R probability variable jackpot”. 0"-"D10"-"D10"-"B10" has a "battle win reach D2 production pattern" with a variable display time of "40s", the combination "D11"-"D11"-"D11"-"B11" has a "battle win reach D3 production pattern" with a variable display time of "60s", and the combination "D12"-"D12"-"D12"-"B12" has a "battle win" with a variable display time of "80s". Reach D4 effect pattern” are associated with each other.

Also, among the combinations of the variation pattern commands for the variation game, the hold 1 variation game, the hold 2 variation game and the hold 3 variation game, the variation game, the hold 1 variation game and the hold 2 variation game are "off" and the hold 3 variation game is "16R probability variable jackpot". 10"-"D10"-"D10"-"C10" has a "battle winning reach D2 production pattern" with a variable display time of "40s", the combination "D11"-"D11"-"D11"-"C11" has a "battle winning reach D3 production pattern" with a variable display time of "60s", and the combination "D12"-"D12"-"D12"-"C12" has a "battle" with a variable display time of "80s". Win reach D4 effect pattern” are associated with each other.

In addition, among the combinations of the variation pattern commands for the variation game, the hold 1 variation game, the hold 2 variation game and the hold 3 variation game, the variation pattern command combination "D09"-"D09"-"D09"-"D09" in which all of the variation game, the hold 1 variation game, the hold 2 variation game and the hold 2 variation game are "off" are the "battle losing reach D1 production pattern" with the variation display time "20 s", and the combination "D10"-"D10. "-"D10"-"D10" has a "battle losing reach D2 effect pattern" with a variable display time of "40s", the combination "D11"-"D11"-"D11"-"D11" has a "battle losing reach D3 effect pattern" with a variable display time of "60s", and the combination "D12"-"D12"-"D12"-"D12" has a "battle losing reach D4 effect pattern" with a variable display time of "80s". are associated with each other.

Thus, when the number of variation pattern settings is 4, that is, when variation display times for four variation games are collectively set in the high-frequency support mode, one performance pattern executed across the four variation games is associated with the variation type table of the high-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the variation type table of the high-frequency support mode, when the variation display times for a plurality of variation games are collectively set, one effect pattern executed over a plurality of variation games is associated. That is, when the fluctuation display time for a plurality of fluctuation games is collectively set, it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuation games appear as one fluctuation game. Therefore, compared with the case where one performance pattern is set for one variable game, it is possible to execute various look-ahead performances (straddle performances), and to improve the amusement of the game in the high-frequency support mode in which the player tends to feel bored. In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display times for a plurality of variable games are collectively set, and a plurality of symbol determination signals are collectively output, so that it is difficult to judge the breaks between variable games from the data display device 103, so that the decrease in interest in the game due to recognition of the breaks between variable games is also prevented.

<Step S4510>
Returning to the description of the procedure of the command determination process of the present embodiment, if the received command is not a variation pattern command for the variation game (step S4503: No), as shown in FIG. MPU51, if the received command is a variation pattern command for the pending 1 variation game (step S4510: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4511, if the received command is not a variation pattern command for the pending 1 variation game (step S4510: No), the process proceeds to step S4517 of FIG.

<Steps S4511 to S4516>
When the received command is a variation pattern command for the hold 1 variation game (step S4510: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variation display time for the hold 1 variation game and the stop display combination of a plurality of decorative symbols (steps S4511 and S4512). In addition, the variable display time for the pending 1 variable game is set to the same time as the variable game as described above, and the stop display combination of a plurality of decorative symbols is set based on the jackpot lottery result for the pending 1 variable game. Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation pattern setting number counter (step S4513), and determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4514).

MPU 51, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4514: Yes), based on the high frequency support mode variation type table shown in FIG. Step S4516), the command determination process ends. In addition, the display control device 6 causes the symbol display section 341 to execute an image effect across two variation games corresponding to the display variation pattern command. Thus, when the variable display time is collectively set for the two variable games, the performance can be executed by one performance pattern for the two variable games without individually determining performance patterns for the variable games. That is, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (straddle effect) in which two variable games are disguised as one variable game. In this embodiment, when the variable display time is collectively set for the two variable games as described above, two symbol determination signals for the variable games are collectively output, making it difficult to grasp the gap between the two variable games from the data display. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the two variable games is grasped from the data display, and to execute various prefetch performances (straddle performance) across the two variable games.

On the other hand, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4514: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. That is, MPU51, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4514: No), does not determine the production pattern for the suspension 1 variation game even if it receives the variation pattern command for the suspension 1 variation game.

In addition, when the variable display time is collectively set for the two variable games, the performance pattern may be determined individually for those variable games. In this case, the two performance patterns that are individually set are preferably set to have relevance and continuity with each other, and are preferably set to have continuity throughout the two fluctuation games.

<Step S4517>
When the received command is not a variation pattern command for the hold 1 variation game (step S4510: No), as shown in FIG. 112, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command for the hold 2 variation game (step S4517). If the received command is a variation pattern command for the pending 2 variation game (step S4517: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4518, and if the received command is not a variation pattern command for the pending 2 variation game (step S4517: No), moves the process to step S4524 of FIG.

<Steps S4518 to S4523>
When the received command is a variation pattern command for the hold 2 variation game (step S4517: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variation display time for the hold 2 variation game and the stop display combination of a plurality of decorative symbols (steps S4518 and S4519). The variable display time for the pending 2 variable game is set to the same time as the variable game as described above, and the stop display combination of a plurality of decoration symbols is set based on the jackpot lottery result for the pending 2 variable game. Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation pattern setting number counter (step S4520), and determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4521).

MPU 51, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4521: Yes), based on the high-frequency support mode variation type table shown in FIG. A pattern command is transmitted (step S4523), and the command determination process ends. In addition, the display control device 6 causes the symbol display section 341 to execute an image effect spanning three times of variation games corresponding to the display variation pattern command. Thus, when the variable display time is collectively set for the three variable games, the performance can be executed by one performance pattern for the three variable games without individually determining the performance patterns for the variable games. That is, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (straddle effect) in which three variable games are disguised as one variable game. Then, in this embodiment, when the variable display time is collectively set for the three variable games as described above, three symbol determination signals for the variable games are collectively output, making it difficult to grasp the break between the three variable games from the data display. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the three times of the variable game is grasped from the data display, and to execute various prefetching performances (straddle performances) over the three times of the variable game.

On the other hand, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4521: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. That is, MPU51, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4521: No), does not determine the production pattern for the suspension 2 variation game even if it receives the variation pattern command for the suspension 2 variation game.

Incidentally, when the variable display time is collectively set for three variable games, the performance pattern may be determined individually for at least one variable game among those variable games. In this case, the individually set performance patterns are preferably set to have relevance and continuity with other performance patterns, and are preferably set to have continuity over the entirety of three variable games.

<Step S4524>
If the received command is not a variation pattern command for the hold 2 variation game (step S4517: No), as shown in FIG. 113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command for the hold 3 variation game (step S4524). MPU51, when the received command is a variation pattern command for the pending 3 variation game (step S4524: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4525. On the other hand, MPU51, if the received command is not a variation pattern command for the pending 3 variation game (step S4524: No), executes processing based on other commands (steps S2106 to S2122), and ends the command determination processing.

<Steps S4525 to S4530>
When the received command is the variation pattern command for the pending 3 variation game (step S4524: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variation display time for the pending 3 variation game and the stop display combination of a plurality of decorative symbols (steps S4525 and S4526). The variable display time for the pending 3 variable game is set to the same time as the variable game as described above, and the stop display combination of a plurality of decorative symbols is set based on the jackpot lottery result for the pending 3 variable game. Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation pattern setting number counter (step S4527), and determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4528).

MPU 51, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4528: Yes), based on the high frequency support mode variation type table shown in FIG. A display variation pattern command is transmitted to the control device 6 (step S4530), and the command determination process ends. Thus, when the variable display time is collectively set for the four variable games, the performance can be executed by one performance pattern for the four variable games without individually determining the performance patterns for the variable games. That is, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (straddle effect) in which four variable games are disguised as one variable game. Then, in the present embodiment, when the variable display time is collectively set for the four variable games as described above, the four symbol determination signals for the variable games are collectively output, making it difficult to grasp the breaks between the four variable games from the data display. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the break between the four times of the variable game is grasped from the data display, and to execute various prefetching performances (straddle performances) over the four times of the variable game.

On the other hand, when the value of the variation pattern setting number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4521: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

Incidentally, when the variable display time is collectively set for the four variable games, the effect pattern may be determined individually for at least one variable game among those variable games. In this case, the individually set performance patterns are preferably set to have relevance and continuity with other performance patterns, and are preferably set to have continuity throughout the four fluctuation games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, production is executed by one production pattern for a plurality of variable games in the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state and time game state), but it is conceivable to execute production by one production pattern for a plurality of variable games only in the probability variable game state, and to execute production by one production pattern for a plurality of variable games only in the time reduction game state. Also, in addition to or instead of at least one of the variable probability game state and the time game state, an effect may be executed by one effect pattern for a plurality of variable games in the normal game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of pattern confirmation signals to be output to the outside in the high-frequency support mode in which the right to execute the variable game is likely to be reserved is set in advance in consideration of the holding status of the variable game by the second special figure, and when a plurality of pattern confirmation signals are output in the high-frequency support mode, the look-ahead effect (straddle effect) is determined and executed for the plurality of variable games corresponding to these pattern confirmation signals.

In this way, when the symbol determination signals for a plurality of variable games are collectively output from the game machine, the current number of variable games on the data display 103 is not updated for each variation, so that the current number of variable games on the data display 103 and the actual number of variable games can be inconsistent. Thereby, when the variable game is executed continuously, it becomes difficult to grasp the break between the variable games from the data display 103.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the break between the variable games is grasped from the data display 103, and it is possible to execute various look-ahead performances (straddle performances) over a plurality of times of the variable games.

In addition, when there is a hold at the start of the variation of the variation game, the variation display times for a plurality of variation games can be collectively set, so that the number of the plurality of pattern determination signals to be output can be surely set to the number that can be collectively output. Thereby, it becomes possible to set one effect pattern (prefetch effect pattern) corresponding to the number of variable games corresponding to the number of symbol determination signals output collectively. As a result, it becomes easy to execute a look-ahead effect (straddle effect) in which a plurality of variable games are made to look like one variable game.

In addition, in the case of a high-frequency support mode in which the right to execute a variable game is likely to be reserved, the variable display times for a plurality of variable games can be collectively set, thereby facilitating the collective setting of the variable display times for a plurality of variable games. This makes it easier to collectively output the symbol determination signals of a plurality of variable games.

Further, when a plurality of pattern determination signals are collectively output, one look-ahead performance (straddle performance) across a plurality of variation games is determined and executed, thereby making it possible to match a variation game outputting a plurality of pattern determination signals with a variation game ending one performance across the plurality of variation games. This makes it possible to execute a look-ahead effect (straddle effect) in which a plurality of variable games are made to look like one variable game. Then, for example, the predetermined condition is that the variable display time is collectively set for a plurality of variable games, or that a plurality of pattern determination signals for the variable games are collectively output, thereby making it difficult to grasp the gap between the variable games from the data display. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gaps between the plurality of variable games are grasped from the data display device, and it is possible to execute various look-ahead performances (straddle performances) across the plurality of variable games. In addition, when a plurality of pattern determination signals are collectively output, one look-ahead performance (crossing performance) across a plurality of variable games is determined and executed, so that the number of apparent loss performances can be reduced even if loss performances are repeated in a high-frequency support mode, for example. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration and discomfort caused by the repetition of the failure effect, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest and interest in the game.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to ninth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Eleventh embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment described above, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special symbol in the high-frequency support mode, the symbol confirmation signal of the total number of the variable game and the number of reservations is collectively output to the outside of the gaming machine 10, and the look-ahead performance (straddle performance) is executed in which a plurality of variable games corresponding to the number of the symbol confirmation signals collectively output are made to look like one variation. In addition, in the tenth embodiment described above, when the reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special symbol in the high-frequency support mode includes the reservation that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the case where the total number of symbol determination signals up to the variable game corresponding to the reservation is collectively output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 was explained. That is, in the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment described above, the number of pattern confirmation signals to be output to the outside in the high-frequency support mode is set in advance in consideration of the holding status of the variable game by the second special figure, and when a plurality of pattern confirmation signals are output in the high-frequency support mode, a look-ahead effect (straddle effect) is executed for a plurality of variable games corresponding to these pattern confirmation signals.

However, in the tenth embodiment described above, when the number of symbol confirmation signals to be output to the outside is set, it is necessary to check the suspension status such as the number of suspensions and the judgment result of each suspension to determine the number of symbol confirmation signals to be output to the outside. Therefore, the control by the main controller 4 becomes relatively complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of pattern confirmation signals to be output to the outside is set to a prescribed number of times, and when the variation game of the prescribed number of times is executed, the number of symbol confirmation signals corresponding to the prescribed number of times is outputted. In this way, when the number of pattern determination signals to be output to the outside is set to a predetermined number of times, it is not necessary to check the status of suspension such as the number of suspensions and the result of judging the validity of each suspension, so that the control by the main controller 4 is simplified.

In one example of the present embodiment, the specified number of times is one fixed number of times, and the specified number of times is a fixed number of times.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120, focusing on differences from other embodiments.

[Processing of main controller 4]
The processing of main controller 4 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. Here, FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process, and FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation stop process.

[Variation start processing]
In the variation start processing of the present embodiment, unlike the variation start processing of the tenth embodiment described above, when the variation of the second special figure in the high-frequency support mode is started, the number of pattern confirmation signals is set to a predetermined specified number (fixed number), or the value of the specified number of times counter indicating the remaining number of variations until the pattern fixing signal is output, and the value of the subtraction number counter indicating the number of variations after the specified number of times is set (value subtracted from the value of the specified number of counters) is updated.

<Steps S4601 to S4604>
In the variation start process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116, unlike the variation start process of the tenth embodiment described above, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the specified number of times counter indicating the remaining number of variation games until the symbol determination signal is output is 0 (step S4602) when the high frequency support mode is set (step S4601: Yes). Then, when the value of the specified number of times counter is 0 (step S4602: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the specified number of times, which is a fixed number of times, as the value of the specified number of times counter (step S4603). Further, the MPU 41 sets a specified number of times set command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that a specified number of times counter indicating the number of remaining variable games until outputting the pattern confirmation signal is set (step S4604), and ends the variation start process.

Although there is no particular limitation on the specified number of times, it is determined in consideration of the jackpot probability in the variable probability game state, and is determined in consideration of the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state. For example, the specified number of times is set in the range of 2 to 50 times, preferably in the range of 2 to 25 times.

<Steps S4605 to S4608>
If the value of the specified number counter is not 0 (step S4602: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the specified number of times until the pattern confirmation signal is output has not elapsed, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result of the variable game is not a jackpot but a loss (step S4605: No), and if there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure (step S4606: No), the number of the specified number counter indicating the remaining number of variable games until the symbol confirmation signal is output. 1 is subtracted from the value (step S4607). Then, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the subtraction number counter indicating the number of variable games (subtraction value of the value of the specified number counter) after the specified number of times is set (step S4608), and ends the variation start process. The value of the subtraction number counter is referred to determine the number of pattern confirmation signals to be output in step S4703 of the fluctuation stop processing in FIG.

<Step S4609>
When the value of the specified number counter is not 0 (step S4602: Yes), the MPU 41 clears (sets to 0) the value of the specified number counter when the lottery result of the variable game is a big hit (step S4605: Yes) or when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure (step S4606: Yes). That is, even if the variable game does not correspond to a variable game that outputs a symbol confirmation signal by executing a specified number of times of the variation game, if the lottery result for the variation game is a big hit, or if there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure, the value of the specified number of times counter is cleared (step S4609), and a symbol confirmation signal is output at the end of the variation game (steps S4702 and S4 of the fluctuation stop processing in FIG. 117 described later). 703). In this way, even if it does not correspond to the variable game for outputting the symbol confirmation signal by executing the specified number of times of the variation game, when the lottery result for the variation game is a big win or when the right to execute the variation game by the second special symbol is not reserved, the symbol confirmation signal is output at the end of the variation game, thereby preventing the symbol confirmation signal from being output when the continuity of the variation game is interrupted in the variation game. As a result, the output of the pattern determination signal is prevented at the end of the variation game executed after the end of the jackpot, and the output of the pattern determination signal at the end of the variation game started after the interruption of the continuously executed variation game is prevented. As a result, for example, the inconvenience of updating the number of times of variation of the data display 103 at the end of the variation game executed after the end of the jackpot is prevented, and the inconvenience of updating the number of times of variation of the data display 103 at the end of the variation game started after the interruption of the variation game continuously performed is prevented.

<Steps S4610 and S4611>
When the value of the specified number of times counter is cleared (step S4609), the MPU 41 sets ON the specified number of times clear command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the specified number of times is cleared (is 0) before the number of fluctuation games until the pattern determination signal is output passes the specified number of times (step S4610). Then, the MPU 41 turns on a specified number of times clear flag indicating that the specified number of times has been cleared (0) before the specified number of variable games is executed (step S4611), and ends the variation start process. The prescribed number of times clear flag is referenced in step S4701 of fluctuation stop processing in FIG.

[Variation stop processing]
In the variation stop processing of the present embodiment, when the second special figure is stopped and displayed, unlike the variation stop processing of the tenth embodiment described above, when the specified number of variation games are executed, or when the specified number of clear flag is on (when the lottery result for the variation game is a big win, or when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variation game by the second special figure at the start of the variation game), a pattern confirmation signal is output.

<Step S4701>
As shown in FIG. 117, in step S4701, when the MPU 41 is in the high-frequency support mode (step S4401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specified number of times clear flag indicating that the value of the specified number of times counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until outputting the pattern confirmation signal is cleared is set to ON. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4705 when the specified number of times clear flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), and moves the process to step S4702 when the specified number of times clear flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No).

<Steps S4702 to S4704>
When the specified number of times clear flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the specified number of times counter is 0 (step S4702). When the value of the specified number counter is 0 (step S4702: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs a number of symbol confirmation signals corresponding to the specified number of times (step S4703), clears the value of the subtraction number counter (step S4704), and ends the fluctuation stop processing. On the other hand, when the value of the specified number counter is not 0 (step S4702: No), the MPU 41 can determine that it is not the timing to output the symbol confirmation signal, and thus ends the fluctuation stop processing without outputting the symbol confirmation signal.

<Steps S4705 to S4707>
When the specified number of times clear flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), that is, when the value of the specified number counter is cleared before executing the variable game of the specified number of times, the MPU 41 outputs the number of symbol determination signals corresponding to the value of the subtraction number counter (step S4705). Then, the MPU 41 clears the value of the subtraction number counter (step S4706), sets the specified times clear flag to off (step S4707), and ends the fluctuation stop processing.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the specified number of variable games set as the fixed number of times is executed, the symbol confirmation signal for the specified number of times is collectively output. Thus, when the number of pattern confirmation signals to be output to the outside is set, it is not necessary to confirm the holding status such as the number of holdings and the judgment result of each holding, so that the control by the main controller 4 is simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, even before the prescribed number of times has passed, if the variable game is a big win or if there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure at the start of the fluctuation, the number of symbol determination signals corresponding to the number of times of the variable game by the second special figure after the prescribed number of times is set is collectively output. Thus, when the continuity of the variation game is interrupted in the variation game, the pattern determination signal is output, so that the pattern determination signal is prevented from being output at the end of the variation game executed after the end of the big winning, and the pattern determination signal is prevented from being output at the end of the variation game started after the variation game executed continuously is interrupted. As a result, for example, the inconvenience of updating the number of times of variation of the data display 103 at the end of the variation game executed after the end of the jackpot is prevented, and the inconvenience of updating the number of times of variation of the data display 103 at the end of the variation game started after the interruption of the continuously performed variation game is prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even before the specified number of times has elapsed, after the end of the variable game, from the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time saving game state) to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) When the transition is made, the symbol confirmation signal may be output after the end of the final variable game in the game state (high frequency support) before the shift. In this case, in the last variation game in the game state before the transition, if there are a plurality of unoutputted symbol determination signals, the unoutputted symbol determination signals are output. As a result, the symbol determination signal in the game state before transition is prevented from being output in the game state after transition. That is, in the game state after the transition, it is possible to prevent the symbol confirmation signal from being output in a different game state before the transition.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
The processing of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120. FIG. Here, FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, unlike the command determination process of the tenth embodiment described above, an effect pattern is set for each variation game in the high-frequency support mode. The effect pattern in this case differs depending on whether the specified number of times is set, when the specified number of times is cleared, and when the specified number of times is both set and cleared.

<Steps S4801 and S4802>
As shown in FIG. 118, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives the specified number of times set command (step S4801: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specified number of times set flag to ON (step S4802). This specified number of times set flag is a flag for setting a continuous effect start effect as the effect pattern, and is referred to in step S4901 of the effect pattern setting process in FIG. 120 described later.

<Steps S4803 and S4804>
When the MPU 51 receives the specified number of times clear command (step S4803: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specified number of times clear flag to ON (step S4804). This specified number of times clear flag is a flag for setting the continuous effect end effect as the effect pattern, and is referred to in step S4904 of the effect pattern setting process in FIG. 120 described later.

<Steps S4805 to S4807>
MPU51, if the variation pattern command is received (step S2102: Yes), if not high frequency support mode (step S4805: No), that is, if the low frequency support mode, the variation pattern command in the first embodiment described above Performs the same processing as when it is received (steps S2103 to S2105). On the other hand, if the MPU 51 receives the variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), and if it is the high frequency support mode (step S4805: Yes), it sets the stop symbol combination and the variation display time (step S406). Then, after executing the effect pattern setting process described below (step S4807), the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 (step S2105), and terminates the command determination process.

[Production pattern setting process]
In the production pattern setting process of this embodiment, the production pattern in each variable game in the high frequency support mode is set. In this embodiment, as the effect in the high frequency support mode, a continuous effect having relevance in a plurality of variable games is executed. Here, FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of continuous effects in the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 119(A), the continuous effect includes a start effect, a continuous effect and an end effect. The start effect is the effect determined and executed for the first variable game in which the continuous effect is executed. The end effect is an effect determined and executed for the last variable game in which the continuous effect is executed. The continuous performance is a performance determined and executed for a variable game other than the first variable game and the last variable game of the continuous performance when the continuous performance is executed over three or more variable games. That is, the continuous effect is basically executed in the order of start effect→continuous effect→ .

The continuous effect is a effect having relevance to a story or the like executed over a plurality of variable games, and is a set of effects individually determined and executed in each variable game. Types of continuous effects are not particularly limited, but include, for example, battle effects, mission effects, treasure hunt effects, and role-playing game effects. When the continuous performance is executed as a battle performance, for example, a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other is performed as a start performance, a performance in which one or both of the ally character and the enemy character attack is performed as a continuation performance, and a performance in which one of the ally character and the enemy character is knocked down is performed as an end performance. Specifically, as the ending performance, when the prescribed number of times has passed and when the right to execute the variation game by the second special figure is not reserved at the start of the variation game, the performance of defeating the ally character is executed. When the prescribed number of times has passed and when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure at the start of the variable game, the ending performance may be such that the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is a draw. Also, as the end effect, when the lottery result for the variable game is a big hit, an effect is executed in which the enemy character is defeated.

As shown in FIG. 119(B), in the continuous performance, when the lottery result for the variable game is a big hit, and when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure at the start of the variable game, the end performance is executed in the variable game even before the specified number of times has passed. Thus, when the continuity of the variation game is interrupted in the variation game, the pattern determination signal is output, so that the pattern determination signal is prevented from being output at the end of the variation game executed after the end of the big winning, and the pattern determination signal is prevented from being output at the end of the variation game started after the variation game executed continuously is interrupted. As a result, for example, the inconvenience of updating the number of times of variation of the data display 103 at the end of the variation game executed after the end of the jackpot is prevented, and the inconvenience of updating the number of times of variation of the data display 103 at the end of the variation game started after the interruption of the variation game continuously performed is prevented.

Here, FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of effect pattern setting processing executed in step S4807 of the command determination processing of FIG.

<Steps S4901 to S4903>
As shown in FIG. 120, in the effect pattern setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the specified number of times set flag is set to ON (step S4901). This specified number of times set flag is a flag indicating that the value of the specified number of times counter has been set to the specified number of times in the main controller 4, and is set to ON when the specified number of times set command is received in the command determination process of FIG. When the specified number of set flag is set to ON (step S4901: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the effect start effect as the effect pattern of the variable game (step S4902), further sets the specified number of set flag to off (step S4903), and ends the effect pattern setting process. In other words, the start effect indicating that the continuous effect is started is set as the first effect pattern when the first variation game when the specified number of times is set, that is, when the continuous effect is started. On the other hand, when the specified number of times set flag is set to OFF (step S4901: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4904.

<Steps S4904 to S4906>
When the specified number of times set flag is set to OFF (step S4901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the specified number of times clear flag is set to ON (step S4904). This specified number of times set flag is a flag indicating that the value of the specified number of times counter has been cleared, that is, that the value of the specified number of times counter is 0 in the main controller 4, and is set to ON when a specified number of times clear command is received in the command determination process of FIG. When the specified number of times clear flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets the end effect as the effect pattern of the variable game (step S4905), further sets the specified number of times clear flag to OFF (step S4906), and ends the effect pattern setting process. In other words, an end effect indicating that the continuous effect is terminated is set as the effect pattern of the last variable game when the prescribed number of times is set. In addition, the value of the specified number of times counter in the main control device 4 is cleared even when the lottery result for the variable game is a big hit, or when the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure is not reserved at the start of the variable game, so that the end performance is set as the performance pattern even when the lottery result for the variable game is a big hit or when the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure is not reserved at the start of the variable game. On the other hand, when the specified number of times clear flag is set to OFF (step S4904: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4907.

<Step S4907>
When the specified number of times clear flag is set to OFF (step S4904: No), the MPU 41 sets the continuous effect as the effect pattern (step S4907), and terminates the effect pattern setting process. In other words, when the variable game does not correspond to either the first variable game or the last variable game when the prescribed number of times is set, and the variable game is not changed and there is a hold for the second special figure, continuous performance is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol confirmation signals to be output to the outside in the high-frequency support mode in which the right to execute the variable game is likely to be reserved is set to the prescribed number of times, which is a fixed number, and when a plurality of symbol confirmation signals are output in the high-frequency support mode, a continuous performance having relevance over the plurality of variable games corresponding to these symbol confirmation signals is determined and executed for each variable game.

In this way, the number of symbol determination signals for a plurality of variable games corresponding to the specified number of times is collectively output from the game machine, so that the current number of variable games on the data display device 103 is not updated for each variation, and it is possible to cause mismatch between the current number of variable games on the data display device 103 and the actual number of variable games. Thereby, when the variable game is executed continuously, it becomes difficult to grasp the break between the variable games from the data display 103.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the variable games is grasped from the data display device 103.例文帳に追加In addition, when the number of pattern determination signals to be output to the outside is set as a specified number of times, it is not necessary to confirm the status of suspension such as the number of suspensions and the result of judging the validity of each suspension, so that the control by the main controller 4 is simplified.

Further, when a plurality of pattern determination signals are collectively output, a continuous performance having relevance across a plurality of variation games is determined and executed for each variation game, thereby making it possible to match a variation game outputting a plurality of pattern determination signals with a variation game ending a continuous performance having relevance across a plurality of variation games. As a result, it is possible to execute a continuous performance in which a plurality of variable games are made to look like one variable game.

In addition, when a plurality of pattern determination signals are collectively output, continuous performances having relevance over a plurality of variable games are determined and executed, so that the number of apparent failure performances can be reduced even when failure performances are repeated in a high-frequency support mode, for example. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration and discomfort caused by the repetition of the failure effect, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest and interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, even before the prescribed number of times has passed, if the variable game is a big win or if there is no reservation of the right to execute the variable game by the second special figure at the start of the fluctuation, the number of symbol determination signals corresponding to the number of times of the variable game by the second special figure after the prescribed number of times is set is collectively output. As a result, when the continuity of the variation game is interrupted in the variation game, the pattern determination signal is output, so that the continuous performance is prevented from being output at the end of the variation game executed after the end of the big winning, and the pattern determination signal is prevented from being output at the end of the variation game started thereafter after the variation game executed continuously is interrupted. As a result, for example, the inconvenience of updating the number of times of variation of the data display 103 at the end of the variation game executed after the end of the jackpot is prevented, and the inconvenience of updating the number of times of variation of the data display 103 at the end of the variation game started after the interruption of the variation game continuously performed is prevented.

Further, in this embodiment, even before the lapse of the specified number of times, when the variation game is a big hit, or when there is no reservation of the right to execute the variation game by the second special figure at the start of the variation, the end performance is determined and executed as the performance pattern for the variation game. As a result, even if the symbol determination signal is collectively output before the specified number of times has passed, the continuous effect can be terminated in the variation game. Further, when the continuity of the variation game is interrupted in the variation game, it is possible to terminate the continuous performance in the variation game in which the continuity is interrupted. As a result, when the continuity of the variable game is interrupted, the continuous performance is prevented from ending halfway.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to tenth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
In the eleventh embodiment described above, the number of symbol confirmation signals to be output to the outside is set to a prescribed number of times, which is a predetermined fixed number of times, and when a variation game of the prescribed number of times is executed, the number of symbol confirmation signals corresponding to the prescribed number of times is output, so that it is unnecessary to confirm the holding status such as the number of reservations and the judgment result of each reservation, so that the control by the main control device 4 is simplified.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the number of variable games corresponding to the (selection) prescribed number of times (variation number of times) selected from a plurality of predetermined fixed numbers is executed, the number of symbol determination signals corresponding to the selection prescribed number of times is output. That is, the present embodiment is different from the eleventh embodiment described above in that the specified number of times is not a fixed number of times as in the above-described eleventh embodiment, but a non-fixed number of times selected from a plurality of specified number of times.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the number of pattern confirmation signals to be output to the outside is set from a predetermined number of predetermined times, and when a variable game of the set number of times is executed, the number of symbol confirmation signals corresponding to the predetermined number of times is output. As in the eleventh embodiment described above, when the number of symbol confirmation signals to be output to the outside is set from a plurality of predetermined numbers of predetermined times, it is unnecessary to confirm the holding status such as the number of reservations and the judgment result of each reservation. Control is simplified.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 121, focusing on differences from the eleventh embodiment.

[Variation start processing]
In the variation start process of the present embodiment, when the number of variation games corresponding to the specified number of times selected (selected) from a plurality of predetermined fixed numbers as described above is executed, the number of symbol determination signals corresponding to the specified number of selections is output. Here, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process of this embodiment.

<Step S5001>
As shown in FIG. 121, unlike the fluctuation start process of the eleventh embodiment described above, when the value of the specified number counter is 0 in the high-frequency support mode (step S4602: Yes), the MPU 41 selects one specified number from a plurality of specified numbers, sets the specified number as the value of the specified number counter (steps S5001 and S5002), sets the specified number set command (step S4604), and ends the variation start process.

A plurality of specified times are not particularly limited, but are determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the like in the case of the variable probability game state, and are determined in consideration of the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state. The specified number of times is set, for example, in the range of 2 to 50 times, preferably in the range of 2 to 25 times.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of symbol confirmation signals to be output to the outside (specified number of times) is set from a plurality of predetermined fixed times, and the number of symbol confirmation signals corresponding to the specified number of times is output when the set specified number of variable games is executed. As in the eleventh embodiment described above, when the number of symbol confirmation signals to be output to the outside is set from a plurality of predetermined numbers of predetermined times, it is unnecessary to confirm the pending status such as the number of reservations and the judgment result of each reservation. Controls on the main controller are simplified.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to eleventh embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In order to facilitate understanding of the corresponding relationship between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals and the like may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention according to the supplementary note is not limited to the specific configuration to which the reference numerals are attached. Moreover, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1', specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period when a specific condition is established. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by extension, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2']
The gaming machine according to appendix A1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A3']
The gaming machine according to appendix A1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2' or appendix A3', not only the specific information but also the special information that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information or the special information that indicates a part of the multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A2' or appendix A3', wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information in part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4', the special information is displayed by part of the plurality of display areas of the display means for displaying the specific information. That is, the special information display area is shared with the specific information display area. As a result, since the specific information and the special information can be displayed on the common display means, the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5']
The gaming machine according to appendix A4', wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas (segments A to G) as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5', the display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such a display means can be realized by a readily available and low cost display such as, for example, a 7-segment display. Therefore, it is possible to equip the game machine with display means for displaying specific information and special information, while suppressing complication of the configuration of the game machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to appendix A4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6', the specific information and the special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for image types and display modes to be displayed as specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in various forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in specifying or estimating the specific numerical information or the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and the special information.

[Appendix A7']
The gaming machine according to appendix A6', wherein the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7', the specific information and the special information are displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the game machine, the image display means can be used to display the specific image. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing display means for displaying the specific information and the special information, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A7', wherein the specified period is set to a period that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8', the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied, and the specified period during which the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means is set to a period that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information together with the migration determination result. For example, when the image display means displays the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the transition determination result, it is possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to increase the interest in suggesting or specifying the result of transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the specific condition is established when a game ball passes through the specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9', the specific condition can be established when the specific area is passed, so the player can easily grasp that the specific condition has been met. This allows for more fun as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10']
It further comprises a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball on the back side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix A9', wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix A11']
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second discharge port (373) different from the first discharge port (318),
The gaming machine according to appendix A10', wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A12']
The gaming machine according to appendix A11', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A10' to A12', when a specific condition is established triggered by passage of a game ball through a second discharge port into which a game ball can enter in a special game, display contents of specific information displayed on the display means are controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed in an inorganic manner, it is possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix A13']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A12', wherein the second discharge port (373) allows passage of a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13', when a game ball passes through the second discharge port through which the game ball that has entered the variable winning port in the special game passes, and a specific condition is satisfied, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, the game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by hitting the game ball into the game area in the special game and making the game ball enter the variable winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by proceeding with the special game as usual. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from avoiding playing games in the game machine for the reason that a skill difference may occur, as compared with the case where a skill difference may occur due to the game balls entering the second discharge port.

[Appendix A14']
The third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373) through which a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) can pass;
Distributing means (37) for distributing a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix A13', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14', since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, a game property is imparted in which whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A15', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The game machine according to appendix A15', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A16', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determining means is lower than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of wins, so that at least one chance of guessing or specifying specific numerical information and further specific numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix A17']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A15′ or appendix A16′, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17', since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started.

[Appendix A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15' to A17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix A19']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix A18', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A19', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix A20']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A18' or appendix A19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A20', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, wherein the prescribed period is set during the execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A21', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period set during the execution period of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can enjoy the specification of the specific numerical information and the speculation or specification of the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (regulation period) of the special game, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A22']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) that provides a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) is completed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A21′, wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A22', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A23']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least the specific information (number) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to appendix A21' or appendix A22', wherein the specified period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A23', when a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period of time, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period, and can enjoy the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the prescribed period. As a result, the amusement of the game is improved during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the predetermined period has passed.

[Appendix A24']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21′ to A23′, characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24', the start time of the predetermined period is set to a special game that is executed in the special game state that is shifted when the result of the shift determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win, the end is set to the last special game to be executed, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has passed. As a result, it is possible to provide the game feature of presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of a series of villas, it is also possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied for this series of villas after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, the player can confirm a large amount of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the lapse of the predetermined period, so that the convenience of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information and further the specific numerical information based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix A25']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A23' or appendix A24', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine pertaining to appendix A25' includes a specific period set for a special game to be started within a predetermined period. That is, when the special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period like winning consecutive houses, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of times the special game is started in the predetermined period. Further, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when a plurality of specific periods exist in the predetermined period, it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period elapses. Thus, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the specific information displayed on the display means, so that interest in the special game can be improved.

[Appendix A26']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A25', wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A26', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-added game, and if the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period, the specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-added game is finished. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is finished. As a result, the special game ending can be effectively used to provide a game feature of displaying the specific information, and the progress of the game can be focused on in the entire special game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A27']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and wins the display lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21' to A26', wherein the prescribed period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A27', specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means in this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the display lottery is won (whether the specific information is displayed or not), so that the amusement of the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of difficulty and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty and variation in displaying the specific information). As a result, it is possible to add various game features to the display of the specific information according to the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix A28']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period when the specific conditions are satisfied during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28', when the specific conditions are satisfied within the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by specifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest in the game is improved. In particular, since specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the number of specific conditions to be satisfied while expecting that many specific conditions will be satisfied in the predetermined period.

[Appendix A29']
The gaming machine according to appendix A28', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display contents of the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, so that it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A29', wherein the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A30', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information depending on which information among the plurality of pieces of individual information is to be displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A31']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30′, wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A31', each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding individual information among the plurality of individual information, so it is possible to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the correspondence. Thus, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information among the plurality of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A32']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30′ or appendix A31′, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A32', the information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low cost display device such as a 7 segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the game machine with the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the game machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A33']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30′ or appendix A31′, wherein the information display means (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A33', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be specified or estimated, there are many options for the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or guessed in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. As a result, the playability of specifying or estimating specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix A34']
The gaming machine according to appendix A33', wherein the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) indicating or indicating the result of the transition determination is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A34', the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the game machine, the image display means can be used to display the specific image. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A35′]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A29' to A34', wherein the specific information is numbers or alphabets.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A35', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and specific information is displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numerals and alphabets, so that the specific numerical information can be easily specified or guessed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified or guessed without requiring advanced game knowledge.

[Appendix A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A36', the specific information is displayed on the individual display portion corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section is defined for each specific numerical value information, in which specific information is displayed. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped according to the type of the individual display portion on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37′]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) in one of two modes of a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix A36'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A37', the individual display section is controlled to be in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the mode of the individual display section. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38']
The gaming machine according to appendix A36' or appendix A37', wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, or staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39′]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A36' to A38', wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A38' and A39', it is possible to form the information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40']
display order determination means (51) for determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the prescribed period when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in this manner, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming constant. This can prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed, and prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A41', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. By the way, the power supply of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day by determining the display order of the specific information upon turning on the power of the game machine. Since this prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A42', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period of time starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the predetermined period starts. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A44', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the special game is started. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the value-adding game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46']
display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period;
an operation means (21) operated by a player to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for displaying the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A46', the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operation means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, the player can cause the second display means to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period by operating the operation means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to confirm the display contents of the specific information displayed during the prescribed period, for example, when the display contents are forgotten or when the player changes, the player can confirm the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by confirming the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can determine whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine according to the identification or guess.

[Appendix A47′]
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A46', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A47', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed within the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. As a result, the player can carefully and politely check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time restrictions, and can decide whether or not to play a game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of the prescribed periods different from each other,
The gaming machine according to appendix A46' or appendix A47', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix A49']
The display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display, on the second display means (35, 39, 341), the display content selected from the display content of the plurality of specific information during the special period by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix A50']
The gaming machine according to appendix A49', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display two or more of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A48' to A50', it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information displayed during the plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by the player. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of the display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. Also, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presentation contents can be confirmed efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix A51′]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A46' to A50', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52']
The gaming machine according to appendix A51', wherein the second display means (341) is variable display image display means for variably displaying a pattern (decorative pattern) indicating or indicating the result of the transition determination.

The gaming machine according to appendices A51' and A52' includes a first display means for displaying during the specified period and a second display means for displaying during the special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during each period of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the prescribed period, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, the visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during a special period (for example, in a standby state), the second display means such as the variable display image display means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner presents the display contents of the specific information for the specified period. In general, since the display area of the variable display image display means is large, visibility is improved when the display content of the specific information for the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means. Also, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by causing the variable display image display means to present the display contents of the specific information in the prescribed period, it is possible to cause the variable display image display means to present the display contents of the specific information in the prescribed period by an operation similar to the operation for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience is improved when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period.

[Appendix A53']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A8′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A53', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54']
The gaming machine according to appendix A53′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A54', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appendix A54' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in which information that denies high set values such as maximum set values is not presented.

[Appendix A55']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to appendix A53', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A55', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A56']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A55', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A56', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57′]
The gaming machine according to appendix A56', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selecting means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A57', it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order and to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all the display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is possible to make it easier to identify specific non-set values and, conversely, to make it difficult to identify specific non-set values. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of possibility of a high set value, the degree of possibility of a low set value, and the like.

[Appendix A58']
The plurality of display orders include a first display order with the lowest priority of the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A57', wherein the first display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) selection rate (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A58', the first display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is likely to be selected. That is, except for the probability of advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest probability of advantageous decision and the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information most disadvantageous to the player is displayed at the end, the probability of advantageous decision most disadvantageous to the player and the advantage decision probability more advantageous to the player are left until the last specific information is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to comprehend that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the early termination of the game in the game machine can be suppressed and the reduction in the operation rate of the game machine can be suppressed.

[Appendix A59']
The specific information includes first specific numerical information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the probability of the highest advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision,
The plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest two priorities,
The gaming machine according to appendix A57', wherein the second display order is set with a higher probability (selection rate) selection rate (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A59', the second display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is likely to be selected. Therefore, as in the gaming machine according to appendix A58', it is difficult for the player to grasp that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the game in the gaming machine can be prevented from being terminated early, and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information has a low priority. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability of advantageous determination is advantageous to the player as well as the probability of advantageous determination that is disadvantageous to the player. By lowering the priority of the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability advantageous to the player, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities contradicts each other until the end, so that the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means can be enhanced.

[Appendix A60']
the plurality of display orders include a third display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability;
The gaming machine according to appendix A57', wherein the third display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A60', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability is set lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability, and the selection rate of the third display order is set high. Since the selection rate of the third display order is set high, the player can expect the possibility that the probability of advantageous determination is higher than the actual first probability of advantageous determination immediately before grasping the probability of advantageous determination. As a result, it is possible to enjoy guessing the specific information (predetermined information) while anticipating the possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision will be high until just before the first probability of an advantageous decision is grasped.

[Appendix A61′]
the plurality of display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability;
The fourth display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A61', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is set lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability, and the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is left as non-display specific information immediately before the first advantageous decision probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous decision probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantageous decision probability and the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. As a result, since the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the first advantageous determination probability advantageous to the player is grasped as the first advantageous determination probability (predetermined numerical value information), the pleasure when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix A62']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1′ to A3′, further comprising display restriction means (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A62', display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during a period other than the prescribed period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63′]
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A62′, wherein the period other than the prescribed period is a standby period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A63', display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during the standby state period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by restricting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining the specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A64']
The gaming machine according to appendix A62' or appendix A63', wherein the display restricting means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A64', the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the prescribed period, and display of past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. As a result, since the specific information displayed in the past cannot be confirmed based on the display history, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining the specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix A65′]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when a first specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of A1' to Appendix A3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A65', when a first specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a first display order on the display means, and when a second specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of specific information (numerals) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of specific condition that is established. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. As a result, when the probability of advantageous determination is low, the player is prevented from recognizing the low probability of advantageous determination at an early stage. As a result, even if the probability of advantageous determination is low, the game in the gaming machine is prevented from being terminated early, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix A66']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A65', wherein the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A66', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined based on the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a defined period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67′]
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to appendix A65' or appendix A66', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A67', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A68']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A67', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A68', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69′]
Further comprising second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information on a second display means (45),
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A69', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is established, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided at a position visible to a player during a prescribed period. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and by extension, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, by displaying the predetermined information on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped on the game hall side outside business hours. Thus, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, confirm the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information after the change, so that the work of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix A70′]
further comprising a game board (31) on which game balls are launched,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The game machine according to appendix A69', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A70', the specific information indicating the specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visual recognition of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix A71′]
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to appendix A70', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A71', the second display means is provided on the back side of the game board fixed to the frame so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed on the game hall side. As a result, a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visual recognition is restricted can be achieved by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix A72']
The second display control means (41)
controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix A70′ or appendix A71′, wherein control is performed from the display state to the non-display state when a second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A72', a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, the second display means can surely prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information even when the game board is opened when the ball jam occurs in the game machine.

[Appendix B1′]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1', the specific condition can be established when the specific area is passed, so the player can easily grasp that the specific condition has been met. This allows for more fun as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2']
The gaming machine according to appendix B1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix B3']
The gaming machine according to appendix B1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2' or appendix B3', the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix B4']
It further comprises a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball on the back side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1′ to B3′, wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix B5']
It further comprises a plurality of prize winning ports (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second discharge port (373) different from the first discharge port (318),
The gaming machine according to appendix B4', wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B6']
The gaming machine according to appendix B5', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4' to appendix B6', when a specific condition is established triggered by passage of the game ball through the second discharge port into which the game ball can enter in the special game, the display contents of the specific information displayed on the display means are controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed in an inorganic manner, it is possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix B7′]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix B6', wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of passing game balls that have passed through the variable winning port (316).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B7', when a game ball passes through a second discharge port through which a game ball that has entered a variable winning port in a special game passes, and a specific condition is met, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, the game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by hitting the game ball into the game area in the special game and making the game ball enter the variable winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by proceeding with the special game as usual. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from avoiding playing games in the game machine for the reason that a skill difference may occur, as compared with the case where a skill difference may occur due to the game balls entering the second discharge port.

[Appendix B8']
The third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373) through which a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) can pass;
Distributing means (37) for distributing a game ball entering the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix B7', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B8', since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, it is possible to provide a game feature in which whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix B9′]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1′ to B8′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information during the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10']
The gaming machine according to appendix B9′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B10', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix B10' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix C1′]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy specifying the specific numerical information, and by extension, guessing or specifying the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2']
The gaming machine according to appendix C1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix C3′]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1′, wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of numbers) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2' or appendix C3', not only the specific information but also the special information that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information or the special information that indicates a part of the multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix C4']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1′ to C3′, characterized in that the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the transition determining means determines to shift to the special game state with a lower probability than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of wins, so that at least one chance of guessing or specifying specific numerical information and further specific numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix C5']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C4', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5', since the starting time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the start of the value-adding game.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C6', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not reported. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decline. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix C7′]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix C6', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix C8']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6' or appendix C7', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix C8', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix C9′]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1′ to C8′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10']
The gaming machine according to appendix C9', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C10', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix C10' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix D1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The gaming machine, wherein the prescribed period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1', when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period set during the execution period of the special game. As a result, the player can enjoy the specification of the specific numerical information and the speculation or specification of the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (regulation period) of the special game, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix D2']
The gaming machine according to appendix D1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix D3']
The gaming machine according to appendix D1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2' or appendix D3', not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix D4']
The special game has a value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) that provides a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game (opening/closing execution mode) is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D3', wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix D4', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix D5']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least the specific information (number) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D4', wherein the prescribed period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5', when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period, and can enjoy the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the prescribed period. As a result, the amusement of the game is improved during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the predetermined period has passed.

[Appendix D6']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix D5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6', the start time of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in the special game state that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win, the end is set to the last special game to be executed, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has passed. As a result, it is possible to provide the game feature of presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of a series of villas, it is also possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied for this series of villas after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, the player can confirm a large amount of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the lapse of the predetermined period, so that the convenience of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information and further the specific numerical information based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix D7′]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D5' or appendix D6', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to appendix D7' includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. That is, when the special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period like winning consecutive houses, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of times the special game is started in the predetermined period. Further, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when a plurality of specific periods exist in the predetermined period, it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period elapses. Thus, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the specific information displayed on the display means, so that interest in the special game can be improved.

[Appendix D8']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D7′, wherein the prescribed period is set in the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D8', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-added game, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed in the ending executed after the value-added game is finished. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be paid to the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is finished. As a result, the special game ending can be effectively used to provide a game feature of displaying the specific information, and the progress of the game can be focused on in the entire special game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D9′]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and wins the display lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D8', wherein the prescribed period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D9', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means in this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the display lottery is won (whether the specific information is displayed or not), so that the amusement of the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the degree of difficulty and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty and variation in displaying the specific information). As a result, it is possible to add various game features to the display of the specific information according to the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix D10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1′ to D9′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11']
The gaming machine according to appendix D10', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D11', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix D11' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix E1′]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1', when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific information. It is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by specifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest in the game is improved. In particular, since the specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied while expecting that many specific conditions will be satisfied during the predetermined period.

[Appendix E2′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix E3′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of numbers) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2' or appendix E3', the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information, or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix E4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E3', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display contents of the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, so that it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5′]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The gaming machine according to appendix E4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature capable of adjusting the difficulty of specifying or estimating the specific numerical information depending on which information among the plurality of pieces of individual information is to be displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E6']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5′, wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6', individual information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of individual information items is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, so it is possible to specify or guess the specific numerical information based on the correspondence relationship. Thus, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information among the plurality of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix E7′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or appendix E6', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7', the information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low cost display device such as a 7 segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the game machine with the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the game machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or appendix E6', wherein the information display means (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be specified or estimated, there are many options for the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be specified or guessed in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. As a result, the playability of specifying or estimating specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix E9′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E8', wherein the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that indicates or indicates the result of the transition determination is variably displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E9', the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the game machine, the image display means can be used to display the specific image. Accordingly, the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E10']
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E5' to E9', wherein the specific information is numbers or alphabets.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E10', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and specific information is displayed in association with numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numerals and alphabets, so that the specific numerical information can be easily specified or guessed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified or guessed without requiring advanced game knowledge.

[Appendix E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E11', the specific information is displayed on the individual display portion corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section is defined for each specific numerical value information, in which specific information is displayed. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped according to the type of the individual display portion on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12']
The display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) in one of two modes of a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix E11'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E12', the individual display section is controlled in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the mode of the individual display section. This enhances the convenience when specifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13′]
The gaming machine according to appendix E11' or appendix E12', wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix or zigzag.

[Appendix E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11′ to E13′, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

In the game machines according to appendices E13' and E14', the information display means can be formed easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1′ to E14′, wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E15', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The game machine according to appendix E15', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E16', in the first game state in which the transition determination means determines that the transition to the special game state has a lower probability than in the second game state, the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, since a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, at least one chance to guess or specify specific numerical information and further predetermined numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix E17′]
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15' or appendix E16', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E17', the starting time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started.

[Appendix E18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15' to E17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not reported. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decline. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix E19']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix E18', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E19', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information for specifying the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further, the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix E20']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18' or appendix E19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix E20', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix E21']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1′ to E20′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E21', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22']
The gaming machine according to appendix E21′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E22', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appendix E22' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix F1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period;
display order determination means (51) for determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By determining the display order in which the specific information is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in this manner, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming constant. This can prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed, and prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2']
The gaming machine according to appendix F1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix F3']
The gaming machine according to appendix F1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2' or appendix F3', not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. By the way, the power supply of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game arcade. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day by determining the display order of the specific information when the gaming machine is turned on. Since this prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1′ to F3′, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period of time starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by the start of the predetermined period. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the special game is started. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the value-adding game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments F1' to F8', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F10']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix F9', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F10', wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The game machine according to appendix F11', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the probability that the transition determination means determines to shift to the special game state is lower than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, since a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, at least one chance to guess or specify specific numerical information and further predetermined numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix F13']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11' or appendix F12', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix F13', since the starting time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied after at least the start of the value-giving game.

[Appendix F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11' to F13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix F15']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix F14', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F15', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix F16']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14' or appendix F15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix F16', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix F17']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1′ to F16′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F17', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18']
The gaming machine according to appendix F17', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F18', when the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix F18' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix G1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for causing a first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period;
an operation means (21) operated by a player to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for displaying the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1', the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, the player can cause the second display means to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period by operating the operation means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to confirm the display contents of the specific information displayed during the prescribed period, for example, when the display contents are forgotten or when the player changes, the player can confirm the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by confirming the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can determine whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine according to the identification or guess.

[Appendix G2']
The gaming machine according to appendix G1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G3′]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of causing the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2' or appendix G3', not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. Thus, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix G4']
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G3', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G4', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed in the prescribed period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed. As a result, the player can carefully and politely check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time restrictions, and can decide whether or not to play a game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of the prescribed periods different from each other,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G4', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix G6']
The gaming machine according to appendix G5', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display content selected from the display content of the plurality of specific information during the special period by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix G7']
The gaming machine according to appendix G5', wherein the display content display control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display two or more of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machines according to appendices G5' to G7', it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information displayed during the plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by the player. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of the display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. Also, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presentation contents can be confirmed efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix G8']
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments G1' to G7', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9']
The gaming machine according to appendix G8′, wherein the second display means (341) is variable display image display means for variably displaying a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination.

The gaming machines according to appendix G8' and appendix G9' are provided with a first display means for displaying during the specified period and a second display means for displaying during the special period, and the specific information is displayed by different display means during each of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the prescribed period, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, the visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during a special period (for example, in a standby state), the second display means such as the variable display image display means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner presents the display contents of the specific information for the specified period. In general, since the display area of the variable display image display means is large, visibility is improved when the display content of the specific information for the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means. Also, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by causing the variable display image display means to present the display contents of the specific information in the prescribed period, it is possible to cause the variable display image display means to present the display contents of the specific information in the prescribed period by an operation similar to the operation for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience is improved when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period.

[Appendix G10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1′ to G9′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11']
The gaming machine according to appendix G10', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G11', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix G11' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix H1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing display means (35, 39, 341) to distinguishably display a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating at least a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a predetermined display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2']
The gaming machine according to appendix H1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix H3']
The gaming machine according to appendix H1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2' or appendix H3', not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix H4']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments H1' to H3', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H4', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H5']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6']
The gaming machine according to appendix H5', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selecting means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6', it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order and to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all the display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is possible to make it easier to identify specific non-set values and, conversely, to make it difficult to identify specific non-set values. This makes it possible to adjust the degree of possibility of a high set value, the degree of possibility of a low set value, and the like.

[Appendix H7']
The plurality of display orders include a first display order with the lowest priority of the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to appendix H6', wherein the first display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H7', the first display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is likely to be selected. That is, except for the probability of advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest probability of advantageous decision and the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information most disadvantageous to the player is displayed at the end, the probability of advantageous decision most disadvantageous to the player and the advantage decision probability more advantageous to the player are left until the last specific information is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to comprehend that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the early termination of the game in the game machine can be suppressed and the reduction in the operation rate of the game machine can be suppressed.

[Appendix H8']
The specific information includes first specific numerical information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the probability of the highest advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision,
The plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest two priorities,
The second display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H8', the second display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities among the plurality of advantageous decision probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is likely to be selected. Therefore, as in the gaming machine according to appendix H6', it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the probability of determining the advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that the game in the gaming machine can be prevented from being terminated early, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of advantageous decision among the plurality of probabilities of advantageous decision corresponding to the plurality of specific information has a low priority. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability of advantageous determination is advantageous to the player as well as the probability of advantageous determination that is disadvantageous to the player. By lowering the priority of the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability advantageous to the player, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities contradicts each other until the end, so that the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means can be enhanced.

[Appendix H9']
the plurality of display orders include a third display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability;
The gaming machine according to appendix H6', wherein the third display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H9', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability is set higher than the selection rate of the third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. Since the selection rate of the third display order is set high, the player can expect the possibility that the probability of advantageous determination is higher than the actual first probability of advantageous determination immediately before grasping the probability of advantageous determination. As a result, it is possible to enjoy guessing the specific information (predetermined information) while anticipating the possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision will be high until just before the first probability of an advantageous decision is grasped.

[Appendix H10']
the plurality of display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability;
The gaming machine according to appendix H6', wherein the fourth display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is set lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability higher than the first advantageous decision probability, and the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability is left as non-display specific information immediately before the first advantageous decision probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous decision probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantageous decision probability and the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous decision probability lower than the first advantageous decision probability. As a result, since the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the first advantageous determination probability advantageous to the player is grasped as the first advantageous determination probability (predetermined numerical value information), the pleasure when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix H11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1′ to H10′, wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix H11', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H12', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the transition determination result is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the transition determining means determines to shift to the special game state with a lower probability than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a series of wins, so that at least one chance of guessing or specifying specific numerical information and further specific numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix H13']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H11′ or appendix H12′, wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H13', since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started.

[Appendix H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11′ to H13′, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decline. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix H15']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix H14', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H15', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix H16']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H14' or appendix H15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix H16', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix H17']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1′ to H15′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the prescribed period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period exceeds a prescribed number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H17', when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix H17' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix I1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
display restriction means (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the prescribed period;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I1', display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during a period other than the prescribed period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or estimating specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2']
The gaming machine according to appendix I1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix I3′]
The gaming machine according to appendix I1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I2' or supplementary note I3', the display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix I4']
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I3', wherein the period other than the prescribed period is a standby period during which neither the special game nor the information game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I4', the specific information is restricted from being displayed on the display means during the standby state period when neither the special game nor the information game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by restricting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining the specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I5']
The gaming machine according to any one of additions I1' to I4', wherein the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I5', the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the prescribed period, and display of past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. As a result, since the specific information displayed in the past cannot be confirmed based on the display history, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining the specific information for specifying or estimating the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix I6']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1′ to I5′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7′]
The gaming machine according to appendix I6', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I7', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix I7' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix J1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
display control means (51) for causing display means (35, 39, 341) to distinguishably display a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating at least a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a second display order different from the first display order when the second specific condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J1', when a first specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of specific information are displayed in the first display order on the display means, and when the second specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of specific information (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of specific condition that is established. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. As a result, when the probability of advantageous determination is low, the player is prevented from recognizing the low probability of advantageous determination at an early stage. As a result, even if the probability of advantageous determination is low, the game in the gaming machine is prevented from being terminated early, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix J2']
The gaming machine according to appendix J1', wherein the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information.

[Appendix J3']
The gaming machine according to appendix J1', wherein the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2' or appendix J3', not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix J4']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix J1' to Appendix J3', wherein the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J4', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined by the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a defined period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
Further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix J1' to Appendix J4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, to make it difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, and to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order, according to the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof. Thus, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the plurality of display orders, it is possible to display the plurality of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J6']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix J5′, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a prescribed period in accordance with a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the probability of advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J6', wherein the starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J7', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the special game is set to start. Therefore, the player can enjoy estimating or identifying the specific numerical information, and furthermore, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. By setting the start time of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix J7', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special game.

In the game machine according to appendix J8', the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state in which the probability that the transition determination means determines to shift to the special game state is lower than the second game state. That is, the start time of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first winning special game. As a result, since a predetermined period is always set for one first win regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, at least one chance to guess or specify specific numerical information and further predetermined numerical information is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix J9']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix J7' or appendix J8', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-giving game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J9', the starting time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started.

[Appendix J10']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7' to J9', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J10', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is concern that the player's interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ending period in addition to the start period of the predetermined period in the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decline, is improved.

[Appendix J11']
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) that is shifted to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state by the transition determination means (41) is higher than the first game state, and the second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified A second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to appendix J10', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is shifted to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J11', the special game is set to be executed in the first special game state in which the end of the predetermined period is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first game state is to shift to the first special game state, that is, in the one-shot hit where the initial winning is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined period is terminated in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first game state is to shift to the second special game state, i.e., when the first hit is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special game state, the predetermined period of the special game executed to the second special game state is not terminated, and when the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state, the predetermined period of the special game to be executed to the first special game state is terminated. In other words, in the case of consecutive wins in which the initial winning is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive games end. Therefore, in the consecutive game, the predetermined period is set over the first special game ending in the series game, so the predetermined period is longer than in the single game, and the more times the game is shifted to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period. As a result, there is a higher possibility that the number of times a specific condition is met is higher in the case of consecutive villas than in the case of single-shot, and the higher the number of consecutive villas, the higher the possibility that the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. As a result, the player can obtain the advantage that not only the expected value of the game value to be acquired increases as the number of consecutive games increases, but also the specific information indicating the specific numerical information can be obtained in a large amount, and the specific numerical information and further the predetermined numerical information can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix J12']
The special game has a value giving game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value giving game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix J10′ or appendix J11′, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is given nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix J12', since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-giving game and the end of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, it is possible to use the blank period for the player to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a time efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix J13']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1′ to J12′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J13', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14']
The gaming machine according to appendix J13′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J14', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appendix J14' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in which information that denies high set values such as the maximum set value is not presented.

[Appendix K1']
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
a storage means (41) for storing respective numerical information (game set values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selecting means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for causing a first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
a second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information on a second display means (45);
with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1', the specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is established, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided at a position visible to a player during a prescribed period. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and by extension, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, by displaying the predetermined information on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped on the game hall side outside business hours. Thus, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, confirm the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information after the change, so that the work of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix K2']
The gaming machine according to appendix K1', wherein the first display control means (51) can cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information.

[Appendix K3']
The gaming machine according to appendix K1', wherein the first display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and the special information (a part of the number) indicating part of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2' or appendix K3', the first display means displays not only the specific information but also special information that does not indicate a plurality of types of numerical information, or special information that indicates a portion of a plurality of types of numerical information. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also can guess the specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the user can guess the specific numerical value information based on the special information and enjoy the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix K4']
further comprising a game board (31) on which game balls are launched,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The game machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K3', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4', the specific information indicating the specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visual recognition of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix K5']
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The game machine according to appendix K4', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the game machine according to appendix K5', the second display means is provided on the back side of the game board fixed to the frame so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed on the game hall side. As a result, a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visual recognition is restricted can be achieved by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6']
The second display control means (41)
Controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix K4' or appendix K5', wherein control is performed from the display state to the non-display state when a second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6', a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating the specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, the second display means can surely prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information even when the game board is opened when the ball jam occurs in the game machine.

[Appendix K7']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1′ to K6′, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the prescribed period in a prescribed display order when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K7', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of favorable determination is high or low, or an order in which it is difficult to determine whether it is high or low. In this way, the plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8']
The gaming machine according to appendix K7', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K8', when the number of times that the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. In this way, when a specific condition exceeding a prescribed number of times is established, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed display order, so that the player can grasp the prescribed numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix K8' is different from conventional slot machines in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and information that negates high set values such as maximum set values is not presented.

[Appendix a0]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
A notification game (fluctuation game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Determination means (41) for determining the game time of the information game from a plurality of preset game times;
Effect determination means (51) for determining an information game effect (fluctuation game effect) to be executed in the information game according to the game time of the information game;
with
The information game production includes a pseudo-variation production in which a predetermined number of pseudo-variations are executed,
The performance determination means determines the pseudo-variation performance when the probability that the predetermined condition is established is the second probability and the game time determined by the determination means (41) is a predetermined game time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix a0, a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times is included as the information game effect. In this way, by including the pseudo-variation effect in which the pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-variation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

[Appendix a1]
The gaming machine according to appendix a0, wherein the period of time for the predetermined number of times of the pseudo fluctuations is a fixed period of time or a substantially fixed period of time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix a1, the information game effect includes a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation for a certain period of time or approximately a certain period of time is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, by including the pseudo-fluctuation effect in which the pseudo-fluctuation for a fixed time or substantially fixed time is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-fluctuation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

[Appendix a2]
The gaming machine according to appendix a1, wherein the fixed time is a time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix a2, the fixed time is the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the predetermined number of times. In this way, since the fixed time is the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the predetermined number of times, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

[Appendix a3]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a0 to a2, wherein the effect determination means determines the pseudo-fluctuation effect when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix a3, the pseudo-fluctuation effect is determined when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means. Here, when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means, the information game is continuously executed. Therefore, the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is continuously executed can be improved by determining the pseudo-fluctuation performance when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means.

[Appendix a4]
The gaming machine according to any one of notes a0 to a3, wherein the effect determination means determines the pseudo-variation effect when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix a4, the pseudo-fluctuation effect is determined when the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is not to shift to the special game state. Here, when the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is not to shift to the special game state, since the transition to the special game state is not performed, the information game can be continuously executed. Therefore, the tempo of the fluctuation rhythm when the information game is continuously executed can be improved by determining the pseudo-fluctuation performance when the transition judgment result by the transition judging means does not shift to the special game state.

[Appendix a5]
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination with a first transition determination probability (low probability mode) having a different transition determination probability that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special game state or a second transition determination probability (low probability mode) that is higher than the first transition determination probability,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a0 to a4, wherein the effect determination means determines the pseudo-fluctuation effect when the transition determination is executed according to the second transition determination probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix a5, when the result of the transition determination is the second transition determination probability (high-probability mode) with a high transition determination probability for shifting to the special game state, the pseudo-fluctuation effect is determined. In this way, when the transition determination result is the second transition determination probability (high-probability mode) with a high transition determination probability for shifting to a special game state, the pseudo-variation performance is determined, so that the tempo of the variation rhythm when the information game is continuously executed can be improved when the transition determination probability is the second transition determination probability.

[Appendix b0]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
A notification game (fluctuation game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Determination means (41) for determining the game time of the information game from a plurality of preset game times;
Effect determination means (51) for determining an information game effect (fluctuation game effect) to be executed in the information game according to the game time of the information game;
with
The information game effect includes a pseudo-variation effect in which a predetermined number of times of pseudo-variation having an upper limit is executed,
The effect determination means determines the pseudo-fluctuation effect when the probability that the predetermined condition is established is the second probability and the game time determined by the determination means (41) is a predetermined game time,
The game machine further comprises an advance notice performance determination means (51) for determining an advance notice performance suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the shift determination means is to shift to the special game when the performance determination means determines the pseudo performance in which the pseudo fluctuations less than the upper limit number are executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix b0, a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times is included as the information game effect. In this way, by including the pseudo-variation effect in which the pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-variation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

Further, in the game machine pertaining to appendix b0, when the pseudo performance in which the pseudo fluctuation less than the upper limit number is executed is determined, the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will shift to the special game is determined. In this way, when the pseudo performance in which the pseudo fluctuations less than the upper limit number are executed is determined, the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the shift judging means is to shift to the special game is decided, so that the fluctuation rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be changed by the execution of this notice performance, so that the decrease in interest when the pseudo fluctuation performance in which the upper limit number of pseudo fluctuations is executed is repeated is prevented.

[Appendix b1]
The gaming machine according to appendix b0, wherein the period of time of the pseudo fluctuation of the predetermined number of times is a fixed time or a substantially fixed time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix b1, the information game effect includes a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation for a certain period of time or approximately a certain period of time is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, by including the pseudo-fluctuation effect in which the pseudo-fluctuation for a fixed time or substantially fixed time is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-fluctuation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

[Appendix b2]
The gaming machine according to appendix b0 or appendix b1, wherein the predetermined period of time is a period of time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix b2, the fixed time is the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the predetermined number of times. In this way, since the fixed time is the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the predetermined number of times, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

[Appendix b3]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of additions b0 to b2, wherein the effect determination means determines the pseudo-variation effect when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix b3, the pseudo-fluctuation effect is determined when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means. Here, when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means, the information game is continuously executed. Therefore, the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is continuously executed can be improved by determining the pseudo-fluctuation performance when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means.

[Appendix b4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b0 to b3, wherein the effect determination means determines the pseudo-variation effect when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix b4, the pseudo-fluctuation effect is determined when the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is not to shift to the special game state. Here, when the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is not to shift to the special game state, since the transition to the special game state is not performed, the information game can be continuously executed. Therefore, the tempo of the fluctuation rhythm when the information game is continuously executed can be improved by determining the pseudo-fluctuation performance when the transition judgment result by the transition judging means does not shift to the special game state.

[Appendix b5]
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination with a first transition determination probability (low probability mode) having a different transition determination probability that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special game state or a second transition determination probability (low probability mode) that is higher than the first transition determination probability,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b0 to b4, wherein the effect determination means determines the pseudo-fluctuation effect when the transition determination is executed according to the second transition determination probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix b5, when the result of the transition determination is the second transition determination probability (high-probability mode) with a high transition determination probability for shifting to the special game state, the pseudo-fluctuation effect is determined. In this way, when the transition determination result is the second transition determination probability (high-probability mode) with a high transition determination probability for shifting to a special game state, the pseudo-variation performance is determined, so that the tempo of the variation rhythm can be improved when the transition determination probability is the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability.

[Appendix c0]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
A notification game (fluctuation game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game;
Determination means (41) for determining the game time of the information game from a plurality of preset game times;
Effect determination means (51) for determining an information game effect (fluctuation game effect) to be executed in the information game according to the game time of the information game;
with
The information game production includes a pseudo-variation production in which a predetermined number of pseudo-variations are executed,
When the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability, the game time determined by the determination means (41) is a predetermined game time, and the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41), the game machine is characterized by determining an effect including the pseudo-variation production and a continuous production that continues from the information game to the next information game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix c0, a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times is included as the information game effect. In this way, by including the pseudo-variation effect in which the pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-variation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix c0, when a specific condition is established, an effect including a continuous effect that continues from the information game to the next information game is determined. In this way, when a specific condition is established, a performance including a continuous performance that continues from the relevant information game to the next information game is determined, and the variation rhythm can be changed by the execution of the continuous performance, thereby preventing the decrease in interest when the pseudo-variation performance is repeated.

[Appendix c1]
The gaming machine according to appendix a0, wherein the period of time for the predetermined number of times of the pseudo fluctuations is a fixed period of time or a substantially fixed period of time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix c1, the information game effect includes a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation for a certain period of time or approximately a certain period of time is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, by including the pseudo-fluctuation effect in which the pseudo-fluctuation for a fixed time or substantially fixed time is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-fluctuation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

[Appendix c2]
Further comprising a lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to determine the continuous effect,
The game machine according to appendix c0 or c1, wherein the effect determination means determines a effect including the pseudo-variation effect and the continuous effect when a lottery result by the lottery means determines the continuous effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix c2, when the lottery result by the lottery means determines the continuous effect, the effect including the pseudo-fluctuation effect and the continuous effect is determined. In this way, when the lottery result by the lottery means determines the continuous performance, the performance including the pseudo-variation performance and the continuous performance is determined, so that the continuous performance is randomly executed according to the lottery result by the lottery means. As a result, since the variable rhythm of the game performance executed at a good tempo can be randomly changed by the continuous performance, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest when the pseudo variable performance is repeated.

[Appendix c3]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices c0 to c2, wherein the continuous effect is an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix c3, the continuous effect is an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to a special game. In this way, since the continuous performance is a performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means is to shift to the special game, the fluctuation rhythm of the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the advance notice performance, thereby preventing the decline of interest when the pseudo-variation performance in which the upper limit number of pseudo-variations is executed is repeated.

[Appendix d0]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
A notification game (fluctuation game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game;
Determination means (41) for determining the game time of the information game from a plurality of preset game times;
Effect determination means (51) for determining an information game effect (fluctuation game effect) to be executed in the information game according to the game time of the information game;
with
The information game production includes a pseudo-variation production in which a predetermined number of pseudo-variations are executed,
The performance determination means determines a series of performances that are continuous from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game when the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability, the game time determined by the determination means (41) is a predetermined game time, and the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix d0, a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times is included as the information game effect. In this way, by including the pseudo-variation effect in which the pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-variation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

Also, in the gaming machine according to appendix d0, when a specific condition is established, a series of effects that are continuous from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game are determined. In this way, when a specific condition is established, a continuous series of performances is determined from the start of the relevant information game to the end of the next information game, and the execution of the series of performances can give changes to the game performances executed at a good tempo, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest of the game when the pseudo-fluctuation performances are repeated.

[Appendix d1]
The gaming machine according to appendix d0, wherein the period of time of the pseudo fluctuation of the predetermined number of times is a constant period of time or a substantially constant period of time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix d1, the information game effect includes a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation for a certain period of time or approximately a certain period of time is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, by including the pseudo-fluctuation effect in which the pseudo-fluctuation for a fixed time or substantially fixed time is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-fluctuation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

[Appendix d2]
Further comprising a lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to determine the series of effects,
The gaming machine according to appendix d0 or d1, wherein the effect determination means determines the series of effects when a lottery result by the lottery means determines the series of effects.

In the gaming machine according to appendix d2, when the lottery result by the lottery means determines the series of effects, the series of effects is determined. In this way, when the lottery result by the lottery means determines the series of performances, the series of performances is determined, so that the series of performances are randomly executed according to the lottery results of the lottery means. As a result, the fluctuating rhythm of the game performance executed at a good tempo can be randomly changed by a series of performances, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game when the pseudo-variation performance is repeated.

[Appendix d3]
The gaming machine according to appendices d0 to d2, wherein the series of effects includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix d3, the series of effects includes an advance notice effect indicating the degree of expectation as to whether the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to a special game. In this way, by including the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift judgment by the shift judgment means shifts to the special game in the series of performances, the variation rhythm of the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the advance notice performance, thereby preventing the decrease in interest when the pseudo-variation performance is repeated.

[Appendix d4]
The gaming machine according to appendix d3, wherein the series of effects includes a ready-to-win effect that is started after the end of the advance notice effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix d4, the series of effects includes a ready-to-win effect that starts after the end of the advance notice effect. In this way, the series of effects includes the ready-to-win effect that is started after the end of the advance notice effect, so that the notice effect has significance as a look-ahead notice effect. As a result, the player's interest in the performance can be enhanced by the advance notice performance.

[Appendix d5]
The gaming machine according to appendix d4, wherein the series of effects includes effects in which the pseudo-variation, the advance notice effect, and the ready-to-win effect are executed in this order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix d5, the series of effects includes a pseudo-variation effect, and the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in this order. In this way, the sequence of effects includes effects in which the pseudo-variation, the advance notice effect, and the ready-to-win effect are executed in this order, so that the pseudo-variation increases the significance of the advance notice effect of the advance notice effect. As a result, the player's interest in the effect can be further enhanced by the advance notice effect.

[Appendix e0]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
A notification game (fluctuation game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Determination means (41) for determining the game time of the information game from a plurality of preset game times;
Effect determination means (51) for determining an information game effect (fluctuation game effect) to be executed in the information game according to the game time of the information game;
with
The information game production includes a pseudo-variation production in which a predetermined number of pseudo-variations are executed,
The effect determination means determines the pseudo-fluctuation effect when the probability that the predetermined condition is established is the second probability and the game time determined by the determination means (41) is a predetermined game time,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the plurality of game times are less than the predetermined game time and include times during which the variable game effect can be executed a number of times less than the predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix e0, a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times is included as the information game effect. In this way, by including the pseudo-variation effect in which the pseudo-variation is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-variation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix e0, the plurality of game times are less than the predetermined game time and include times during which the variable game effect can be executed less than the predetermined number of times. In this way, a plurality of game times are shorter than a predetermined game time and include a time during which the variable game performance can be executed less than the predetermined number of times, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be varied by executing the variable game performance less than the predetermined number of times, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game when the pseudo-variation performance is repeated.

[Appendix e1]
The gaming machine according to appendix e0, wherein the period of time for the predetermined number of times of the pseudo fluctuations is a constant period of time or a substantially constant period of time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix e1, the information game effect includes a pseudo-variation effect in which pseudo-variation for a certain period of time or approximately a certain period of time is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, by including the pseudo-fluctuation effect in which the pseudo-fluctuation for a fixed time or substantially fixed time is executed a predetermined number of times as the information game effect, the pseudo-fluctuation effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, the game performance in the information game can be executed at a good tempo, and the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm when the information game is repeatedly executed can be improved.

[Appendix e2]
The plurality of playing times include the same time as the fixed time,
The gaming machine according to appendix e0 or appendix e1, further comprising limiting means for limiting determination of the pseudo variation by the performance determining means when the game time is the same as the fixed time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix e2, determination of pseudo fluctuation is restricted when the game time is the same as the fixed time. By restricting the determination of the pseudo-variation when the game time is the same as the fixed time, the performance in which the pseudo-variation is not executed is inserted in the game performance, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be given a clear change, so that the decrease in interest when the pseudo-variation performance is repeated is prevented.

[Appendix e3]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix e2, characterized in that, when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41) and the determination of the pseudo variation by the production determination means is restricted by the restriction means, the production determination means determines an production including a continuous production that continues from the information game to the next information game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix e3, the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means, and when the determination of the pseudo-variation is restricted, the performance including the continuous performance from the information game to the next information game is determined. In this way, when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means and the determination of the pseudo-variation is restricted, the performance including the continuous performance from the information game to the next information game is determined, and the variation rhythm of the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the continuous performance, so that the decline of interest when the pseudo-variation performance is repeated is prevented.

[Appendix e4]
The gaming machine according to appendix e3, wherein the continuous effect is an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix e4, the continuous effect is an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is to shift to the special game. In this way, since the continuous performance is a performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is to shift to the special game, the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the advance notice performance, thereby preventing the decrease in interest when the pseudo-variation performance in which the upper limit number of pseudo-variations is executed is repeated.

[Appendix f1]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of an information game for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of game times;
display means (341) for displaying variations of a plurality of patterns (decorative patterns) and notifying the result of the transition determination by a combination of stop displays of the plurality of patterns;
A game effect executing means (51) for executing a game effect determined from a plurality of game effects based on the game time of the information game determined by the game time determining means (41);
with
The game time determination means (41) has means for determining a predetermined game time out of the plurality of game times as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state,
The plurality of game effects, as effects to be executed when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, a predetermined effect (e.g., notice effect), and a specific effect different from the predetermined effect (e.g., pseudo consecutive 3 effects),
The specific effect is an effect in which a predetermined variation (pseudo variation) in which a combination of the plurality of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination does not cause the transition to the special game state is temporarily stopped or displayed on the display means is executed a specific number of times.
The game effect executing means (51)
means for executing the specific effect without executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time;
means for executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, and executing the predetermined variation a number of times less than the specific number of times;
A game machine characterized by having

By the way, it is not preferable for the gaming machine to arouse the gambling spirit of the player by excessively increasing the number of paid balls. In addition, recent players tend not to want the game machine to excessively increase or decrease the number of paid balls in a short period of time, and especially players who want to enjoy a long game tend to want the game machine to gradually increase or decrease the number of paid balls.

As a method of moderating the increase and decrease of the number of balls released in the gaming machine, for example, setting the jackpot probability in the normal game state (low probability mode) high, setting the probability variable jackpot ratio in the probability variable game machine low (setting the probability variable continuation rate low), and setting the jackpot probability low in the probability variable game state (high probability mode). Especially these days, there is a tendency to set the jackpot probability low in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) in order to suppress a rapid increase in the number of balls released. Also, in order to suppress an excessive increase in the number of payout balls in the variable probability game state, it is conceivable to set the variation display time in the variation game relatively long (for example, 15 seconds or more). When the variable display time is set to be relatively long, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a ready-to-win performance pattern in which ready-to-win performance is executed after execution of high-speed variable performance is likely to be set as game performance in the variable game. This ready-to-win effect pattern is set based on the lottery result of the big win lottery, and suggests the degree of expectation for the big win in the high-speed fluctuation effect and the ready-to-win effect. Further, during the execution of the high-speed fluctuation effect and the ready-to-win effect, the advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win is appropriately executed.

However, even in the probability variable gaming state (high probability mode), most of the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are out. In addition, when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a loss, a performance pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be set, and a performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be set as the advance notice performance. Therefore, in the probability variable gaming state, the effect with low expectation for big win is likely to occur frequently, and the increasing speed of the paid out balls can be reduced. On the other hand, when a performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win is executed in a relatively long variable display time, the tempo of the variable rhythm of the variable games that are executed one after another is bad, and the player is likely to feel a sense of sluggishness, thereby reducing interest in the game. In particular, when the probability of big wins in the variable probability game state (high probability mode) is set low, the average number of times of games required until the next big wins increases and the average game time required until the next big wins becomes longer, so that the amusement of the games is further reduced.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to set the variable display time of the variable game short while setting the jackpot probability in the probability variable game state, for example, to set the variable display time to a short variable display time of about 3 seconds so that the short variable display time is easily selected. In this way, by facilitating the setting of the short fluctuation display time in the variable probability game state, for example, as shown in FIG.

However, in the short fluctuation display of about 3 seconds, although the tempo of the fluctuation games that are executed one after another is improved, it is difficult to execute a sufficient deviation effect during that time. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand what the effect is intended in the effect for the short-time fluctuation display, and it is also difficult for the player to understand the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the big win lottery will be a big win. Therefore, even if the tempo of the fluctuating rhythm is prioritized and an effect that is difficult to understand is repeated, the interest in the game may decrease. Further, when the short fluctuation display time is easily selected, the average playing time of the fluctuation game is shortened, and after all, an excessive increase in the number of paid balls cannot be sufficiently suppressed, which hinders a gradual increase or decrease in the number of paid balls.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, a predetermined game time out of a plurality of game times can be set as the game time of the information game that notifies that the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. Then, when a predetermined game time is set, as a game performance, a specific performance (for example, quasi-continuous 3 performance) in which predetermined fluctuations (for example, pseudo fluctuations) are executed for a specific number of times without executing the prescribed performances can be executed, or a performance in which a prescribed performance (for example, advance notice performance) is executed and predetermined fluctuations are executed less times than the specific times (for example, once) can be executed.

In this way, in the gaming machine according to appendix f1, by executing a specific effect in which a specific number of predetermined fluctuations are executed without executing a predetermined effect as a game effect, the tempo in the information game is improved by the specific number of predetermined fluctuations. And, since most of the results of transition determination do not transition to the special game state, the specific effect can be repeatedly executed. As a result, in the game machine according to appendix A1, by repeating the predetermined fluctuation, it is possible to improve the tempo of the information game to be executed one after another while preventing the delay of the game performance, like the conventional game machine in which the short fluctuation display time is likely to be selected. That is, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the tempo of information games that are executed one after another can be improved by adopting a specific effect in which a predetermined number of times of predetermined fluctuations are executed instead of a short-time fluctuation display of about 3 seconds as a game time.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the repetition of the predetermined variation makes it difficult for the player to recognize the gap between the information games (at the end of the information game). Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ready-to-win effect has suddenly started. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix f1, the specific effect is such that a predetermined variation such as a pseudo-variation is executed a specific number of times, thereby making it easier for the player to understand the intention of the effect and the degree of expectation for a big win. As a result, in the game machine pertaining to appendix A1, the predetermined variation in the information game can be executed with a sense of rhythm, the information game executed one after another can be made at a good tempo, and the player can easily understand the intention of performance and the degree of expectation for a big win, thereby preventing the decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the predetermined game time is set to a time during which the predetermined variation can be performed a specific number of times, thereby preventing the average game time of the information game from being shortened. Since this prevents the average playing time between special games from being shortened, it is possible to sufficiently suppress an excessive increase in the number of paid balls and realize a gradual increase or decrease in the number of paid balls.

In addition, in the game machine pertaining to appendix f1, a predetermined performance is executed as a game performance, and a performance of executing a predetermined variation less than a specific number of times is executed, so that when information games are executed one after another, a predetermined performance such as an advance notice performance is executed during the repetition of the predetermined variation. Here, when the predetermined variation is repeated in the successively executed information games, excessive repetition of the predetermined variation may make the progress of the game monotonous and reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, when a predetermined effect such as a notice effect is executed while the information games that are executed one after another are executed at a good tempo, the fluctuation rhythm is changed. This prevents the predetermined fluctuation from being repeated excessively, thereby preventing the progress of the game from becoming monotonous, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

[Appendix f2]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix f1, wherein the playing time determining means (41) has means for determining the predetermined playing time as the playing time of the information game when the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f2, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole that gives the opportunity for the transition determination based on the game ball entry is the second probability, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game. Here, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole is the second probability, the transition determination is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, when the probability that a game ball is allowed to enter a starting hole that gives an opportunity for transition determination based on the entry of a game ball is the second probability, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, thereby facilitating repeated execution of a specific presentation in which a specific number of predetermined fluctuations are executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation rhythms of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix f3]
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination with a first transition determination probability (low probability mode) or a second transition determination probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first transition determination probability (high probability mode), and
The gaming machine according to appendix f2, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is executed according to the second transition determination probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f3, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is performed with the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability that it is determined to shift to the special game state. In this way, when the transition determination is performed by the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability of determining to shift to the special game state, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, so that when the transition determination is performed by the second transition determination probability with the high transition determination probability, the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games executed one after another can be improved, thereby further suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix f4]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of notes f1 to f3, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix f4, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game. Here, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, if a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, the transition determination is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, thereby facilitating repeated execution of the specific performance in which the predetermined fluctuation is executed for the specific number of times. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation rhythms of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix f5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f4, wherein a selection rate of the predetermined game time among the plurality of game times is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f5, the selection rate of the predetermined game time is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. By setting the selection rate of the predetermined game time to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination does not shift to the special game state, the specific performance of executing the predetermined fluctuation of the specific number of times is easily executed repeatedly. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the fluctuating rhythms of the information games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix f6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f5, wherein the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game. In this way, the predetermined performance includes the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, thereby making it easier for the player to understand the intention of the performance when the predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game. As a result, the decrease in interest in the game due to the unclearness of the intent of the presentation is further suppressed.

[Appendix f7]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The game effect executing means (51)
When the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time and the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41), the game machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f6, characterized by having means for executing a continuous performance from the information game to the next information game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f7, when the predetermined game time is determined and the right to execute the information game is reserved, continuous performance is executed from the information game to the next information game. In this way, when a predetermined game time is determined and the right to execute the information game is reserved, continuous performance is executed continuously from the information game to the next information game, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the continuous performance, so that the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed when the predetermined fluctuation is repeated.

[Appendix f8]
The game effect executing means (51)
means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the continuous effect when the predetermined game time is determined by the game time determination means (41) and the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41);
means for executing the continuous performance when the result of the lottery by the means for performing the lottery is to execute the continuous performance;
The gaming machine according to appendix f7, characterized by having

In the gaming machine according to appendix f8, when a predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game when the right to execute the information game is reserved, whether or not to execute the continuous performance is determined by lottery. In this way, by determining whether or not to execute the continuous performance by lottery, the continuous performance is randomly executed according to the lottery result. As a result, the change in the game performance executed at a good tempo can be randomly given by the continuous performance, so that the player's interest in the game is further suppressed when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is repeated.

[Appendix f9]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note f7 or supplementary note f8, wherein the continuous performance includes an advance notice performance suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f9, the continuous effect includes an advance notice effect indicating the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game. In this way, the continuous performance includes a performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is to shift to a special game, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the advance notice performance, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest of the game when the pseudo-variation performance in which the upper limit number of pseudo-variations is executed is repeated.

[Appendix f10]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f9, wherein the game effect execution means (51) has means for executing a series of effects continuously from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time and the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix f10, when the predetermined game time is determined and the right to execute the information game is reserved, a continuous series of performances is executed from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game. Thus, when a predetermined game time is determined and the right to execute the information game is reserved, a continuous series of performances is executed from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the series of performances, so that the decline in the interest of the game when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is repeated is suppressed.

[Appendix f11]
The game time determination means (41) determines the game time for the information game and the next information game when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix f10, wherein the game effect execution means (51) executes the series of effects based on the game time for the information game and the next information game determined by the game time determination means (41).

[Appendix f12]
The gaming machine according to appendix f11, wherein the game effect execution means (51) executes the series of effects based on the total time of the game time for the information game and the next information game determined by the game time determination means (41).

In the gaming machine according to notes f11 and f12, a series of effects are executed based on the game time for the information game and the next information game, for example, the total time of the game time of these information games. Thus, by executing a series of performances on the basis of the game time for the information game and the next information game, it is possible to select a performance that can be completed from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game and execute it as a series of performances. As a result, it is possible to avoid the end of the series of performances in the middle of the information game or the next information game, or the execution of the series of performances only halfway.

[Appendix f13]
The game effect executing means (51)
means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the series of effects when the predetermined game time is determined by the game time determination means (41) and the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41);
means for executing the continuous production when the lottery result by the means for performing the lottery is to execute the series production;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f10 to f12, characterized by having:

In the gaming machine according to appendix f13, when a predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game when the right to execute the information game is reserved, whether or not to execute the continuous performance is determined by lottery. In this way, by determining whether or not to execute the continuous performance by the lottery, a continuous series of performances is randomly executed from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game according to the lottery result. As a result, changes in the game performance executed at a good tempo can be randomly given by a series of performances, so that the player's interest in the game is further suppressed when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is repeated.

[Appendix f14]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f10 to f13, wherein the series of effects includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix f14, the series of effects includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to a special game. In this way, the series of performances includes the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift judgment by the shift judgment means shifts to the special game, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the advance notice performance, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest of the game when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is repeated.

[Appendix f15]
The gaming machine according to appendix f14, wherein the series of effects includes a ready-to-win effect that starts after the end of the advance notice effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f15, the series of effects includes a ready-to-win effect that starts after the end of the advance notice effect. In this way, the series of effects includes the ready-to-win effect that is started after the end of the advance notice effect, so that the notice effect has significance as a look-ahead notice effect. As a result, the player's interest in the performance can be enhanced by the advance notice performance.

[Appendix f16]
The gaming machine according to attachment f15, wherein the series of effects includes effects in which the pseudo-variation, the advance notice effect, and the ready-to-win effect are executed in this order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f16, a series of effects includes a pseudo-variation effect, and an effect in which the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in this order. In this way, the sequence of effects includes effects in which the pseudo-variation, the advance notice effect, and the ready-to-win effect are executed in this order, so that the pseudo-variation increases the significance of the advance notice effect of the advance notice effect. As a result, the player's interest in the effect can be further enhanced by the advance notice effect.

[Appendix f17]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments f1 to f16, wherein the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same as or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f17, the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times. Thus, by making the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation equal or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the prescribed game time by the specific number of times, the fluctuation time of each prescribed fluctuation is uniformed, and the fluctuation game time of each prescribed fluctuation in the specific performance is uniformized. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined variation of the specific number of times in the specific performance in the information game at a good tempo. Therefore, since it is possible to improve the tempo of the information games that are executed one after another, the decrease in interest in the game is further suppressed. In particular, when the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, the time of each predetermined variation in the specific performance becomes the same, so that the tempo of the variable games executed one after another can be further improved, thereby further suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix f18]
The gaming machine according to appendix f17, wherein the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is in the range of -10% or more and +10% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

[Appendix f19]
The gaming machine according to attachment f18, wherein the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is in the range of -5% or more and +5% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f18 and appendix f19, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is, for example, a range of -10% or more +10% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, preferably -5% or more +5% or less. By setting the fluctuation times of the predetermined fluctuations within such a range, the fluctuation times of the predetermined fluctuations are made more uniform, and the fluctuation game times of the predetermined fluctuations in the specific effect are made uniform. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined variation of the specific number of times in the specific performance in the variation game with a better tempo. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix f20]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f17 to f19, wherein the plurality of game times includes a short variable game time shorter than the predetermined game time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f20, the plurality of game times includes short variable game times that are shorter than the predetermined game time. Here, when a pseudo variation in the information motion game can be performed with a good sense of rhythm by executing a specific performance in which the predetermined variation is performed a specific number of times, and the tempo of the variation games executed one after another is improved, a player skilled in the game machine can recognize a break between the information games (at the end of the information game) by counting the number of times of the predetermined variation. However, if the short-time variation is executed while the predetermined variation is repeated a specific number of times, it becomes difficult to recognize the gap between the information games by counting the number of times of the predetermined variation. As a result, a plurality of game times including a short fluctuation game time shorter than a predetermined game time makes it difficult for the player to grasp the start and end times of the information game, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance can be recognized as suddenly started. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

[Appendix f21]
The gaming machine according to appendix f20, wherein the short fluctuation gaming time includes a time equal to or substantially the same as a time obtained by multiplying a time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times by a number less than the specific number of times.

[Appendix f22]
The short fluctuation gaming time is in the range of -10% or more + 10% or less of the time obtained by multiplying the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times by a number less than the specific number of times. The gaming machine according to addition f21.

[Appendix f23]
The short fluctuation game time is in the range of -5% to +5% of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying the number of times less than the specific number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix f22.

In the gaming machines according to notes f21 to f23, the short variable playing time is the same or substantially the same time as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined playing time by the specific number of times and multiplying it by a number less than the specific number of times. In this way, the short fluctuation game time is the same or substantially the same time as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying it by a number less than the specific number of times, for example, the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the player to grasp the start time and the end time of the information game, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance can be recognized as suddenly started. As a result, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

[Appendix f24]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f20 to f23, wherein the selection rate of the short fluctuation game time is lower than the selection rate of the predetermined game time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f24, the selection rate of the short fluctuation game time is lower than the selection rate of the predetermined game time. Since the selection rate of the short-variation game time is lower than the selection rate of the predetermined game time, shortening of the average game time required between special games, that is, excessive increase in the number of paid balls can be suppressed, and the short-variation game time can be selected to change the 9-second variation pattern, which tends to make the progress of the game monotonous, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix f25]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments f20 to f24, wherein the short variation includes a first short variation time and a second short variation time set longer than the first short variation time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f25, the short-term fluctuation includes a first short-variation period and a second short-variation period that is longer than the first short-variation period. In this way, the short-term fluctuation includes the first short-term fluctuation time and the second short-term fluctuation time set to be longer than the first short-term fluctuation time, so that when the first short-term fluctuation or the second short-term fluctuation is executed while the predetermined fluctuation is repeated a specific number of times, it becomes more difficult to recognize the discontinuity between the information games by counting the number of times of the predetermined fluctuation. By including the first short-time variation and the second short-time variation shorter than the predetermined game time in a plurality of game times, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the start time and the end time of the information game, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance can be recognized as suddenly started. As a result, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

[Appendix f26]
The gaming machine according to appendix f25, wherein the game effect executing means (51) has means for not executing the specific effect when the plurality of game times is the first short variation time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f26, the specific effect is not executed when the plurality of game times are the first short variation time. In this way, when a plurality of game times are the first short fluctuation time, the specific performance is not executed, so that the information game in which the specific performance is not executed is interposed while the information games executed one after another are executed at a good tempo, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be given a clear change, so that the decline in the interest of the game when the predetermined fluctuation is repeated is suppressed.

[Appendix f27]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix f25 or appendix f26, characterized in that said game effect execution means (51) has means for executing an effect including a continuous effect that continues from said information game to the next information game when said plurality of game times are the first short variable time and said reserve means (41) reserves the right to execute said information game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f27, when the right to execute the information game is reserved when a plurality of game times are the first short fluctuation time, the performance including the continuous performance from the information game to the next information game is executed. In this way, when the right to execute the information game is reserved when a plurality of game times are the first short fluctuation time, the performance including the continuous performance that continues from the information game to the next information game is executed, and the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the continuous performance, so that the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed when the predetermined fluctuation is repeated.

[Appendix f28]
The gaming machine according to appendix f27, wherein the continuous effect is an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix f28, the continuous effect is an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination will shift to the special game. In this way, since the continuous performance is the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, the execution of the advance notice performance can give a clear change to the game performance executed at a good tempo, so that the decrease in interest in the game when the predetermined fluctuation is repeatedly executed is further suppressed.

[Appendix f29]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f25 to f28, wherein the game effect execution means (51) has means for executing the predetermined effect or the predetermined change less than the specific number of times when the plurality of game times are the second short variation time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix f29, a predetermined effect or a pseudo-variation less than a specified number of times is executed when a plurality of game times are the second short variation time. When the predetermined performance is executed when a plurality of game times are the second short fluctuation time, the execution of the predetermined performance can give a clear change to the game performance executed at a good tempo, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be clearly changed by the execution of the predetermined performance, so that the decrease in the interest of the game when the predetermined fluctuation is repeatedly executed is further suppressed. On the other hand, when a plurality of game times are the second short fluctuation time and the pseudo fluctuations are executed less than the specific number of times, it becomes more difficult to recognize the break between the information games by counting the number of times of the prescribed fluctuations, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, it is possible to make the ready-to-win performance suddenly start, and the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win performance makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix g1]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of an information game for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of game times;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game;
display means (341) for displaying variations of a plurality of patterns (decorative patterns) and notifying the result of the transition determination by a combination of stop displays of the plurality of patterns;
A game effect executing means (51) for executing a game effect determined from a plurality of game effects based on the game time of the information game determined by the game time determining means (41);
with
The game time determination means (41) has means for determining a predetermined game time out of the plurality of game times as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state,
The plurality of game effects, as effects to be executed when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, a predetermined effect (e.g., notice effect), and a specific effect different from the predetermined effect (e.g., pseudo consecutive 3 effects),
The specific effect is an effect in which a predetermined variation (pseudo variation) in which a combination of the plurality of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination does not cause the transition to the special game state is temporarily stopped or displayed on the display means is executed a specific number of times.
The game effect executing means (51)
means for executing the specific effect without executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time;
means for executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, and executing the predetermined variation a number of times less than the specific number of times;
When the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, if the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41), means for executing a continuous performance that continues from the information game to the next information game;
A game machine characterized by having

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix g1, as in the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A1, a predetermined game time out of a plurality of game times may be set as the game time of the notification game for notifying that the result of the transition determination is not to transition to the special game state, and as the game effect in the case where the predetermined game time is set, a specific effect may be executed in which a predetermined variation is executed a specific number of times without executing a predetermined effect, or a predetermined effect is executed and a predetermined number of times less than the specific number of times is executed. Since an effect in which variation is executed can be executed, the same effect as that of the gaming machine according to appendix A1 can be obtained.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix g1, when the predetermined game time is determined and the right to execute the information game is reserved, continuous performance is executed from the information game to the next information game. In this way, when a predetermined game time is determined and the right to execute the information game is reserved, continuous performance is executed continuously from the information game to the next information game, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the continuous performance, so that the decrease in interest in the game when the predetermined fluctuation is repeated is suppressed.

[Appendix g2]
The game effect executing means (51)
means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the continuous effect when the predetermined game time is determined by the game time determination means (41) and the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41);
means for executing the continuous performance when the result of the lottery by the means for performing the lottery is to execute the continuous performance;
The gaming machine according to appendix g1, characterized by having

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix g2, when a predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game when the right to execute the information game is reserved, it is determined by lottery whether or not the continuous performance is to be performed. In this way, by determining whether or not to execute the continuous performance by lottery, the continuous performance is randomly executed according to the lottery result. As a result, the change in the game performance executed at a good tempo can be randomly given by the continuous performance, so that the player's interest in the game is further suppressed when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is repeated.

[Appendix g3]
The gaming machine according to appendix g1 or appendix g2, wherein the continuous effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix g3, the continuous effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is to shift to the special game. In this way, the continuous performance includes a performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is to shift to the special game, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the advance notice performance, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest of the game when the pseudo-variation performance in which the upper limit number of pseudo-variations is executed is repeated.

[Appendix g4]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of notes g1 to g3, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix g4, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole that gives the opportunity for the transition determination based on the game ball entry is the second probability, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game. Here, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole is the second probability, the transition determination is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, when the probability that a game ball is allowed to enter a starting hole that gives an opportunity for transition determination based on the entry of a game ball is the second probability, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, thereby facilitating repeated execution of a specific performance in which a specific number of predetermined fluctuations are executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation rhythms of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix g5]
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination with a first transition determination probability (low probability mode) or a second transition determination probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first transition determination probability (high probability mode), and
The gaming machine according to appendix g4, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is executed according to the second transition determination probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix g5, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is performed with the second transition determination probability that the transition to the special game state is determined to be made with a high second transition determination probability. In this way, when the transition determination is performed with the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability of determining to shift to the special game state, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, so that when the transition determination is performed with the second transition determination probability with the high transition determination probability, the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games executed one after another can be improved, thereby further suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix g6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5, wherein a selection rate of the predetermined game time among the plurality of game times is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix g6, the selection rate of the predetermined game time is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. Thus, by setting the selection rate of the predetermined game time to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state, the specific performance of executing the predetermined fluctuation of the specific number of times is easily executed repeatedly. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the fluctuating rhythms of the information games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix g7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g6, wherein the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix g7, the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game. In this way, the predetermined performance includes the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, thereby making it easier for the player to understand the intention of the performance when the predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game. As a result, the decrease in interest in the game due to the unclearness of the intent of the presentation is further suppressed.

[Appendix h1]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of an information game for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of game times;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game;
display means (341) for displaying variations of a plurality of patterns (decorative patterns) and notifying the result of the transition determination by a combination of stop displays of the plurality of patterns;
A game effect executing means (51) for executing a game effect determined from a plurality of game effects based on the game time of the information game determined by the game time determining means (41);
with
The game time determination means (41) has means for determining a predetermined game time out of the plurality of game times as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state,
The plurality of game effects, as effects to be executed when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, a predetermined effect (e.g., notice effect), and a specific effect different from the predetermined effect (e.g., pseudo consecutive 3 effects),
The specific effect is an effect in which a predetermined variation (pseudo variation) in which a combination of the plurality of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination does not cause the transition to the special game state is temporarily stopped or displayed on the display means is executed a specific number of times.
The game effect executing means (51)
means for executing the specific effect without executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time;
means for executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, and executing the predetermined variation a number of times less than the specific number of times;
When the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time and the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41), means for executing a series of continuous effects from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game;
A game machine characterized by having

In the gaming machine pertaining to supplementary note h1, as in the gaming machine pertaining to supplementary note A1, a predetermined game time out of a plurality of game times may be set as the game time of the notification game for informing that the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state, and as the game effect in the case where the predetermined game time is set, a specific effect may be executed in which a predetermined variation is executed a specific number of times without executing a predetermined effect, or a predetermined effect may be executed and a predetermined number of times less than the specific number of times may be executed. Since an effect in which variation is executed can be executed, the same effect as that of the gaming machine according to appendix A1 can be obtained.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix h1, when the predetermined game time is determined and the right to execute the information game is reserved, a continuous series of performances is executed from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game. Thus, when a predetermined game time is determined and the right to execute the information game is reserved, a continuous series of performances is executed from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game, so that the game performances executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the series of performances, so that the decline in the interest of the game when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is repeated is suppressed.

[Appendix h2]
The game time determination means (41) determines the game time for the information game and the next information game when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix h1, wherein the game effect execution means (51) executes the series of effects based on the game time for the information game and the next information game determined by the game time determination means (41).

[Appendix h3]
The gaming machine according to appendix h2, wherein the game effect execution means (51) executes the series of effects based on the total time of the game time for the information game and the next information game determined by the game time determination means (41).

In the gaming machines according to appendices h2 and h3, a series of effects are executed based on the game time for the information game and the next information game, for example, the total time of the game time of these information games. Thus, by executing a series of performances on the basis of the game time for the information game and the next information game, it is possible to select a performance that can be completed from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game and execute it as a series of performances. As a result, it is possible to avoid the end of the series of performances in the middle of the information game or the next information game, or the execution of the series of performances only halfway.

[Appendix h4]
The game effect executing means (51)
means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the series of effects when the predetermined game time is determined by the game time determination means (41) and the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41);
means for executing the continuous production when the lottery result by the means for performing the lottery is to execute the series production;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h3, characterized by having

In the gaming machine according to appendix h4, when a predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game when the right to execute the information game is reserved, it is determined by lottery whether or not the continuous performance is to be performed. In this way, by determining whether or not to execute the continuous performance by the lottery, a continuous series of performances is randomly executed from the start of the information game to the end of the next information game according to the lottery result. As a result, changes in the game performance executed at a good tempo can be randomly given by a series of performances, so that the player's interest in the game is further suppressed when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is repeated.

[Appendix h5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h4, wherein the series of effects includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h5, the series of effects includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means is to shift to the special game. In this way, by including the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift judgment by the shift judgment means shifts to the special game in the series of performances, the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the advance notice performance, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest of the game when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is repeated.

[Appendix h6]
The gaming machine according to appendix h5, wherein the series of effects includes a ready-to-win effect that is started after the end of the advance notice effect.

In the gaming machine according to appendix h6, the series of effects includes a ready-to-win effect that starts after the end of the advance notice effect. In this way, the series of effects includes the ready-to-win effect that is started after the end of the advance notice effect, so that the notice effect has significance as a look-ahead notice effect. As a result, the player's interest in the performance can be enhanced by the advance notice performance.

[Appendix h7]
The gaming machine according to attachment h6, wherein the series of effects includes effects in which the pseudo-variation, the advance notice effect, and the ready-to-win effect are executed in this order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix h7, the series of effects includes a pseudo-variation effect, and the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in this order. In this way, the sequence of effects includes effects in which the pseudo-variation, the advance notice effect, and the ready-to-win effect are executed in this order, so that the pseudo-variation increases the significance of the advance notice effect of the advance notice effect. As a result, the player's interest in the effect can be further enhanced by the advance notice effect.

[Appendix h8]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h7, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix h8, a predetermined playing time can be determined as the playing time of the information game when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole that gives the opportunity for the transition determination based on the entering of the game ball is the second probability. Here, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the start hole is the second probability, the transition determination is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, when the probability that a game ball is allowed to enter a starting hole that gives an opportunity for transition determination based on the game ball's entry is the second probability, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, thereby facilitating repeated execution of a specific presentation in which a specific number of predetermined fluctuations are executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix h9]
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination with a first transition determination probability (low probability mode) or a second transition determination probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first transition determination probability (high probability mode), and
The gaming machine according to appendix h8, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is executed according to the second transition determination probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix h9, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is performed with the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability that it is determined to shift to the special game state. In this way, when the transition determination is performed by the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability of determining to shift to the special game state, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, so that when the transition determination is performed by the second transition determination probability with the high transition determination probability, the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games executed one after another can be improved, thereby further suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix h10]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h9, wherein a selection rate of the predetermined game time among the plurality of game times is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix h10, the selection rate of the predetermined game time is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the transition determination result is not to shift to the special game state. Thus, by setting the selection rate of the predetermined game time to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state, the specific performance of executing the predetermined fluctuation of the specific number of times is easily executed repeatedly. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the fluctuating rhythms of the information games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix h11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h10, wherein the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to supplementary note h11, the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game. In this way, the predetermined performance includes the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, thereby making it easier for the player to understand the intention of the performance when the predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game. As a result, the decrease in interest in the game due to the unclearness of the intent of the presentation is further suppressed.

[Appendix i1]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of an information game for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of game times;
display means (341) for displaying variations of a plurality of patterns (decorative patterns) and notifying the result of the transition determination by a combination of stop displays of the plurality of patterns;
A game effect execution means (51) for executing a game effect determined from a plurality of game effects based on the game time of the information game determined by the game time determination means (41);
with
The game time determination means (41) has means for determining a predetermined game time out of the plurality of game times as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state,
The plurality of game effects, as effects to be executed when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, a predetermined effect (e.g., notice effect), and a specific effect different from the predetermined effect (e.g., pseudo consecutive 3 effects),
The specific effect is an effect in which a predetermined variation (pseudo variation) in which a combination of the plurality of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination does not cause the transition to the special game state is temporarily stopped or displayed on the display means is executed a specific number of times.
The fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times,
The game effect executing means (51)
means for executing the specific effect without executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time;
means for executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, and executing the predetermined variation a number of times less than the specific number of times;
A game machine characterized by having

In the gaming machine pertaining to supplementary note i1, as in the gaming machine pertaining to supplementary note A1, a predetermined game time out of a plurality of game times may be set as the game time of the notification game for informing that the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state, and as a game effect in the case where the predetermined game time is set, a specific effect may be executed in which a predetermined variation is executed a specific number of times without executing a predetermined effect, or a predetermined effect may be executed and a predetermined number of times less than the specific number of times may be executed. Since an effect in which variation is executed can be executed, the same effect as that of the gaming machine according to appendix A1 can be obtained.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix i1, the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times. Thus, by making the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the prescribed game time by the specific number of times, the fluctuation time of each prescribed fluctuation is uniformed, and the fluctuation game time of each prescribed fluctuation in the specific performance is uniformized. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined variation of the specific number of times in the specific performance in the information game at a good tempo. Therefore, it is possible to improve the tempo of the information games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game. In particular, when the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, the time of each predetermined variation in the specific performance becomes the same, so that the tempo of the variation games executed one after another can be further improved, thereby further suppressing the decline in the interest of the game.

[Appendix i2]
The gaming machine according to appendix i1, wherein the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is in the range of -10% or more and +10% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

[Appendix i3]
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is in the range of -5% or more and +5% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

In the gaming machines according to attachments i2 and i3, the variation time of the predetermined variation is, for example, a range of -10% or more +10% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, preferably -5% or more +5% or less. By setting the fluctuation times of the predetermined fluctuations within such a range, the fluctuation times of the predetermined fluctuations are made more uniform, and the fluctuation game times of the predetermined fluctuations in the specific effect are made uniform. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined variation of the specific number of times in the specific performance in the variation game with a better tempo. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix i4]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of notes i1 to i3, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the probability that the predetermined condition is established is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix i4, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole that gives the opportunity for the transition determination based on the game ball entry is the second probability, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game. Here, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the start hole is the second probability, the transition determination is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, when the probability that a game ball is allowed to enter a starting hole that gives an opportunity for transition determination based on the game ball's entry is the second probability, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, thereby facilitating repeated execution of a specific presentation in which a specific number of predetermined fluctuations are executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix i5]
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination with a first transition determination probability (low probability mode) or a second transition determination probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first transition determination probability (high probability mode), and
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note i4, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is executed according to the second transition determination probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix i5, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is performed with the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability that it is determined to shift to the special game state. In this way, when the transition determination is performed with the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability of determining to shift to the special game state, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, so that when the transition determination is performed with the second transition determination probability with the high transition determination probability, the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games executed one after another can be improved, thereby further suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix i6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices i1 to i5, wherein a selection rate of the predetermined game time among the plurality of game times is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine pertaining to supplementary note i6, the selection rate of the predetermined game time is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. By setting the selection rate of the predetermined game time to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination does not shift to the special game state, the specific performance of executing the predetermined fluctuation of the specific number of times is easily executed repeatedly. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the fluctuating rhythms of the information games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix i7]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of notes i1 to i6, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note i7, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game. Here, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, if a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, the transition determination is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, thereby facilitating repeated execution of the specific performance in which the predetermined fluctuation is executed for the specific number of times. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix i8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices i1 to i7, wherein the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note i8, the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game. In this way, the predetermined performance includes the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, thereby making it easier for the player to understand the intention of the performance when the predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game. As a result, the decrease in interest in the game due to the unclearness of the intent of the presentation is further suppressed.

[Appendix j1]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of an information game for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of game times;
display means (341) for displaying variations of a plurality of patterns (decorative patterns) and notifying the result of the transition determination by a combination of stop displays of the plurality of patterns;
A game effect executing means (51) for executing a game effect determined from a plurality of game effects based on the game time of the information game determined by the game time determining means (41);
with
The game time determination means (41) has means for determining a predetermined game time out of the plurality of game times as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state,
The plurality of game effects, as effects to be executed when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, a predetermined effect (e.g., notice effect), and a specific effect different from the predetermined effect (e.g., pseudo consecutive 3 effects),
The specific effect is an effect in which a predetermined variation (pseudo variation) in which a combination of the plurality of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination does not cause the transition to the special game state is temporarily stopped or displayed on the display means is executed a specific number of times.
The fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times,
The plurality of game times includes a short variable game time shorter than the predetermined game time,
The game effect executing means (51)
means for executing the specific effect without executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time;
means for executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, and executing the predetermined variation a number of times less than the specific number of times;
A game machine characterized by having

In the gaming machine pertaining to supplementary note j1, as in the gaming machine pertaining to supplementary note A1, a predetermined game time out of a plurality of game times may be set as the game time of the notification game for informing that the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state, and as a game effect in the case where the predetermined game time is set, a specific effect may be executed in which a predetermined variation is executed a specific number of times without executing a predetermined effect, or a predetermined effect may be executed and a predetermined number of times less than the specific number of times may be executed. Since an effect in which variation is executed can be executed, the same effect as that of the gaming machine according to appendix A1 can be obtained.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix j1, similarly to the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, so that the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix D1 is achieved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix j1, a plurality of game times include short variable game times that are shorter than the predetermined game time. Here, when a pseudo variation in the information motion game can be performed with a good sense of rhythm by executing a specific performance in which the predetermined variation is performed a specific number of times, and the tempo of the variation games executed one after another is improved, a player skilled in the game machine can recognize a break between the information games (at the end of the information game) by counting the number of times of the predetermined variation. However, if the short-time variation is executed while the predetermined variation is repeated a specific number of times, it becomes difficult to recognize the gap between the information games by counting the number of times of the predetermined variation. As a result, a plurality of game times including a short fluctuation game time shorter than a predetermined game time makes it difficult for the player to grasp the start and end times of the information game, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance can be recognized as suddenly started. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

[Appendix j2]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note j1, wherein the short-variation gaming time includes the same or substantially the same time as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying the time by a number less than the specific number of times.

[Appendix j3]
The short fluctuation gaming time is in the range of -10% or more + 10% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying the number of times less than the specific number of times.

[Appendix j4]
The short fluctuation game time is in the range of -5% to +5% of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying it by a number less than the specific number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix j3.

In the gaming machine according to appendix j2 to appendix j4, the short variable game time is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying it by a number less than the specific number of times. In this way, the short fluctuation game time is the same or substantially the same time as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying it by a number less than the specific number of times, for example, the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the player to grasp the start time and the end time of the information game, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance can be recognized as suddenly started. As a result, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

[Appendix j5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j4, wherein the selection rate of the short fluctuation game time is lower than the selection rate of the predetermined game time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix j5, the selection rate of the short variable game time is lower than the selection rate of the predetermined game time. Since the selection rate of the short-variation game time is lower than the selection rate of the predetermined game time, shortening of the average game time required between special games, that is, excessive increase in the number of balls paid out is suppressed, and the short-variation game time can be selected, thereby changing the variation pattern of 9 seconds, which tends to make the progress of the game monotonous, and suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix j6]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments j1 to j5, wherein the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

[Appendix j7]
The gaming machine according to appendix j6, wherein the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is in the range of -10% or more and +10% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

[Appendix j8]
The gaming machine according to appendix j7, wherein the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is in the range of -5% or more and +5% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

In the gaming machines according to notes j6 to j8, the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, for example, the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times. The variation time of the predetermined variation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, for example, in the range of -10% or more +10% or less, preferably -5% or more +5% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined variation of the specific number of times in the specific effect in the variation game at a better tempo. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix j9]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j8, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix j9, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole that gives the opportunity for the transition determination based on the game ball entry is the second probability, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game. Here, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole is the second probability, the transition determination is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, when the probability that a game ball is allowed to enter a starting hole that gives an opportunity for transition determination based on the entry of a game ball is the second probability, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, thereby facilitating repeated execution of a specific presentation in which a specific number of predetermined fluctuations are executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation rhythms of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix j10]
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination with a first transition determination probability (low probability mode) or a second transition determination probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first transition determination probability (high probability mode), and
The gaming machine according to appendix j9, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is executed according to the second transition determination probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix j10, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is performed by the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability that it is determined to shift to the special game state. In this way, when the transition determination is performed by the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability of determining to shift to the special game state, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, so that when the transition determination is performed by the second transition determination probability with the high transition determination probability, the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games executed one after another can be improved, thereby further suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix j11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j10, wherein a selection rate of the predetermined game time among the plurality of game times is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix j11, the selection rate of the predetermined game time is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. By setting the selection rate of the predetermined game time to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination does not shift to the special game state, the specific performance of executing the predetermined fluctuation of the specific number of times is easily executed repeatedly. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the fluctuating rhythms of the information games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix j12]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j11, wherein the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix j12, the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game. In this way, the predetermined performance includes the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, thereby making it easier for the player to understand the intention of the performance when the predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game. As a result, the decrease in interest in the game due to the unclearness of the intent of the presentation is further suppressed.

[Appendix k1]
A transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery);
A game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of an information game for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of game times;
display means (341) for displaying variations of a plurality of patterns (decorative patterns) and notifying the result of the transition determination by a combination of stop displays of the plurality of patterns;
A game effect executing means (51) for executing a game effect determined from a plurality of game effects based on the game time of the information game determined by the game time determining means (41);
with
The game time determination means (41) has means for determining a predetermined game time out of the plurality of game times as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state,
The plurality of game effects, as effects to be executed when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, a predetermined effect (e.g., notice effect), and a specific effect different from the predetermined effect (e.g., pseudo consecutive 3 effects),
The specific effect is an effect in which a predetermined variation (pseudo variation) in which a combination of the plurality of symbols indicating that the result of the transition determination does not cause the transition to the special game state is temporarily stopped or displayed on the display means is executed a specific number of times.
The fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times,
The plurality of game times includes a short variable game time shorter than the predetermined game time,
The short-term fluctuation includes a first short-variation time and a second short-variation time set to be longer than the first short-variation time,
The game effect executing means (51)
means for executing the specific effect without executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time;
means for executing the predetermined effect when the game time of the information game is the predetermined game time, and executing the predetermined variation a number of times less than the specific number of times;
A game machine characterized by having

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix k1, as in the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A1, a predetermined game time out of a plurality of game times may be set as the game time of the notification game for informing that the result of the shift determination is not to transition to the special game state, and as the game effect in the case where the predetermined game time is set, a specific effect may be executed in which a predetermined variation is executed a specific number of times without executing a predetermined effect, or a predetermined effect may be executed but a predetermined number of times less than the specific number of times. Since an effect in which variation is executed can be executed, the same effect as that of the gaming machine according to appendix A1 can be obtained.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix k1, similar to the gaming machine according to appendix E1, a plurality of game times include a short-variation game time shorter than a predetermined game time, thereby achieving the same effect as the gaming machine according to appendix E1.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix k1, the short-time fluctuation includes a first short-change time and a second short-change time set to be longer than the first short-change time. In this way, the short-term fluctuation includes the first short-term fluctuation time and the second short-term fluctuation time set to be longer than the first short-term fluctuation time, so that when the first short-term fluctuation or the second short-term fluctuation is executed while the predetermined fluctuation is repeated a specific number of times, it becomes more difficult to recognize the discontinuity between the information games by counting the number of times of the predetermined fluctuation. By including the first short-time variation and the second short-time variation shorter than the predetermined game time in a plurality of game times, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the start time and the end time of the information game, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance can be recognized as suddenly started. As a result, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

[Appendix k2]
The gaming machine according to appendix k1, wherein the game effect execution means (51) has means for not executing the specific effect when the plurality of game times are the first short fluctuation time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k2, the specific effect is not executed when the plurality of game times are the first short variation time. In this way, when a plurality of game times are the first short fluctuation time, the specific performance is not executed, so that the information game in which the specific performance is not executed is interposed while the information games executed one after another are executed at a good tempo, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be given a clear change, so that the decline in the interest of the game when the predetermined fluctuation is repeated is suppressed.

[Appendix k3]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix k1 or appendix k2, wherein the game effect execution means (51) has means for executing a continuous effect that continues from the information game to the next information game when the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41) when the plurality of game times are the first short variable time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k3, when the right to execute the information game is reserved when a plurality of game times are the first short fluctuation time, the performance including the continuous performance from the information game to the next information game is executed. In this way, when the right to execute the information game is reserved when a plurality of game times are the first short fluctuation time, the performance including the continuous performance that continues from the information game to the next information game is executed, and the game performance executed at a good tempo can be changed by the execution of the continuous performance, so that the decline in the interest of the game is suppressed when the predetermined fluctuation is repeated.

[Appendix k4]
The gaming machine according to appendix k3, wherein the continuous effect is an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k4, the continuous effect is an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not the result of the shift determination will shift to the special game. In this way, since the continuous performance is the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, the execution of the advance notice performance can give a clear change to the game performance executed at a good tempo, so that the decline in the interest of the game when the predetermined fluctuation is repeatedly executed is further suppressed.

[Appendix k5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices k1 to k4, wherein the game effect execution means (51) has means for executing the predetermined effect or the predetermined change less than the specific number of times when the plurality of game times are the second short variation time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k5, when a plurality of game times are the second short variation time, a predetermined effect or a pseudo variation less than a specific number of times is executed. When the predetermined performance is executed when a plurality of game times are the second short fluctuation time, the execution of the predetermined performance can give a clear change to the game performance executed at a good tempo, so that the game performance executed at a good tempo can be clearly changed by the execution of the predetermined performance, so that the decrease in the interest of the game when the predetermined fluctuation is repeatedly executed is further suppressed. On the other hand, when a plurality of game times are the second short fluctuation time and the pseudo fluctuations are executed less than the specific number of times, it becomes more difficult to recognize the break between the information games by counting the number of times of the prescribed fluctuations, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, it is possible to make the ready-to-win performance suddenly start, and the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win performance makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix k6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices k1 to k5, wherein the short-variable playing time includes the same or substantially the same time as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying the time by a number less than the specific number of times.

[Appendix k7]
The short fluctuation game time is in the range of -10% to +10% of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying it by a number less than the specific number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix k6.

[Appendix k8]
The short fluctuation gaming time is in the range of -5% or more + 5% or less of the time obtained by multiplying the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times by the number of times less than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k6 to appendix k7, the short fluctuation game time is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying it by a number less than the specific number of times. In this way, the short fluctuation game time is the same or substantially the same time as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times and multiplying it by a number less than the specific number of times, for example, the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the player to grasp the start time and the end time of the information game, so that when the ready-to-win performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance can be recognized as suddenly started. As a result, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced by the unexpectedness of the sudden start of the ready-to-win effect.

[Appendix k9]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices k1 to k8, wherein the selection rate of the short fluctuation game time is lower than the selection rate of the predetermined game time.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k9, the selection rate of the short fluctuation game time is lower than the selection rate of the predetermined game time. Since the selection rate of the short-variation game time is lower than the selection rate of the predetermined game time, shortening of the average game time required between special games, that is, excessive increase in the number of paid balls can be suppressed, and the short-variation game time can be selected to change the 9-second variation pattern, which tends to make the progress of the game monotonous, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix k10]
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments k1 to k9, wherein the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same as or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k10, the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times. Thus, by making the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation equal or substantially the same as the time obtained by dividing the prescribed game time by the specific number of times, the fluctuation time of each prescribed fluctuation is uniformed, and the fluctuation game time of each prescribed fluctuation in the specific performance is uniformized. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined variation of the specific number of times in the specific performance in the information game at a good tempo. Therefore, since it is possible to improve the tempo of the information games that are executed one after another, the decrease in interest in the game is further suppressed. In particular, when the variation time of the predetermined variation is the same as the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, the time of each predetermined variation in the specific performance becomes the same, so that the tempo of the variable games executed one after another can be further improved, thereby further suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix k11]
The gaming machine according to appendix k10, wherein the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is in the range of -10% or more and +10% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

[Appendix k12]
The gaming machine according to appendix k11, wherein the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is in the range of -5% or more and +5% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times.

In the gaming machines according to appendix k11 and appendix k12, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation is, for example, a range of -10% or more +10% or less of the time obtained by dividing the predetermined game time by the specific number of times, preferably -5% or more +5% or less. By setting the fluctuation times of the predetermined fluctuations within such a range, the fluctuation times of the predetermined fluctuations are made more uniform, and the fluctuation game times of the predetermined fluctuations in the specific effect are made uniform. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the predetermined variation of the specific number of times in the specific performance in the variation game with a better tempo. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix k13]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices k1 to k12, wherein the playing time determining means (41) has means for determining the predetermined playing time as the playing time of the information game when the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k13, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole that triggers the transition determination based on the game ball entering is the second probability, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game. Here, when the probability that the game ball is allowed to enter the starting hole is the second probability, the transition determination is likely to be repeatedly and continuously executed. Therefore, when the probability that a game ball is allowed to enter a starting hole that gives an opportunity for transition determination based on the entry of a game ball is the second probability, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, thereby facilitating repeated execution of a specific presentation in which a specific number of predetermined fluctuations are executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the variation rhythms of the variation games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix k14]
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination with a first transition determination probability (low probability mode) or a second transition determination probability (high probability mode) that is higher than the first transition determination probability (high probability mode), and
The gaming machine according to appendix k13, wherein the game time determination means (41) has means for determining the predetermined game time as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is executed according to the second transition determination probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k14, a predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game when the transition determination is performed with the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability that it is determined to shift to the special game state. In this way, when the transition determination is performed by the second transition determination probability with a high transition determination probability of determining to shift to the special game state, the predetermined game time can be determined as the game time of the information game, so that when the transition determination is performed by the second transition determination probability with the high transition determination probability, the tempo of the variation rhythm of the variation games executed one after another can be improved, thereby further suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix k15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices k1 to k14, wherein a selection rate of the predetermined game time among the plurality of game times is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k15, the selection rate of the predetermined game time is set to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the transition determination result is not to shift to the special game state. By setting the selection rate of the predetermined game time to be the highest as the game time of the information game when the result of the transition determination does not shift to the special game state, the specific performance of executing the predetermined fluctuation of the specific number of times is easily executed repeatedly. As a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the fluctuating rhythms of the information games that are executed one after another, thereby further suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix k16]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices k1 to k15, wherein the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix k16, the predetermined effect includes an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game. In this way, the predetermined performance includes the advance notice performance suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game, thereby making it easier for the player to understand the intention of the performance when the predetermined game time is determined as the game time of the information game. As a result, the decrease in interest in the game due to the unclearness of the intent of the presentation is further suppressed.

[Appendix A1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (fluctuation game) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition judgment;
Signal output means (41) for outputting information game information (symbol determination signal) related to the information game output by the main control means (41) via an output terminal (101);
with
The signal output means (41) is
When the first condition is established, a plurality of the information game information are collectively output as a signal through the output terminal,
A gaming machine characterized by outputting one signal of the informing game information when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the information game information includes information game end information indicating that the information game ends.

In the gaming machines according to appendices A1 and A2, when a first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one piece of information game information is output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means via the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is signal-outputted from the main control means via the output terminal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big hit on the data display is updated each time an information game is executed in the same manner as in the conventional art. On the other hand, the number of information games on the data display is not updated each time one information game is executed when the first condition is established. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and to execute various performances (for example, read-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of times of the information game.

[Appendix A3]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or appendix A2, wherein the first condition is that the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A3, the first condition is that the right to execute the information game is reserved. Here, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, the reserved information game can be executed after the end of the information game, so that after the end of the information game related to the reservation, information game information such as information game end information for two information games including at least the information game can be collectively output as a signal. Thus, by setting the first condition that the right to execute the information game is reserved, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games can be reliably collectively output as a signal.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the first condition is that the reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means (41) includes a transition to the special game state (jackpot game state) as a result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4, the first condition is that the reservation of the right to execute the information game includes the result of the shift determination to shift to the special game state. In this way, the first condition includes the reservation of the right to execute the information game and the transition determination result to shift to the special game state, so that when the reservation of the transition determination result to shift to the special game state is executed as the information game, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games can be output as a signal at the end of the information game. In addition, when the suspension, which is the result of the transition determination to shift to the special game state, is executed as the information game, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for the plurality of information games is output as a signal at the end of the information game, so that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state. Signal output of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a trick is prevented. Thus, for example, the number of informal games after the special game is prevented from being different from the actual number of informal games, and the number of informal games after the special game displayed on the data display device, for example, is prevented from being different from the number of informal games after the actual jackpot game.

[Appendix A5]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A4, wherein the probability that the predetermined condition is established in the first condition is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, the first condition is that the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the game ball to enter the start hole is met is a second probability higher than the first probability. Here, when the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is established is the second probability, the game ball is likely to enter the winning opening, and the information game is likely to be executed continuously. Therefore, since the right to execute the information game is likely to be reserved because the first condition is the second probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting hole is established, it is easy to collectively output a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games.

[Appendix A6]
Further comprising a game time determination means (41) for determining the game time of the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein the first condition is that the playing times for a plurality of the information games are collectively determined by the playing time determining means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, the first condition is that the game times for a plurality of information games are collectively determined. Thus, since the first condition is that the game times for a plurality of information games are collectively determined, the number of information game information (for example, information game end information) collectively output as a signal can be set equal to or less than the number of a plurality of information games for which the variable display times are collectively set. As a result, it is possible to reliably output the information game information such as the information game end information together as a signal.

[Appendix A7]
Effect determination means (51) for determining the effect to be executed by the effect means (341) in the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A6, characterized in that said effect determination means (51) determines one said effect corresponding to a plurality of said information game information collectively output as a signal.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, one effect is determined corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information game information signal-output together. Thus, by determining one performance corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information game information signal-output collectively, that is, by determining one performance for a plurality of information games, it is possible to execute various performances (for example, look-ahead performance, stride performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of information games. In addition, by determining one performance corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information game information output together as a signal, as described above, when the number of information games since the last transition to the special game state is not updated in the data display each time one information game is executed, and a mismatch occurs between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games, the decline in interest in the game caused by the gap between the information games being grasped from the data display is prevented. It can be suppressed more, and it becomes possible to execute various effects (for example, look-ahead effect) for a plurality of information games.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A7, wherein the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8, the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started (executed). In this way, since the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started, the timing at which a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) is collectively output as a signal can be adjusted by setting the predetermined information game. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal at various timings, so that the timing at which a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal is diversified.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to appendix A8, wherein the first condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, the first condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, since the first condition is that the information game is executed for a predetermined specified number of times, the number of information games (timing) at which a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal can be adjusted by the set number of the specified number of times. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal at various timings, so that the timing at which a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal is diversified.

[Appendix A10]
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the specified number of times is a preset fixed number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, the prescribed number of times is one fixed number of times that is preset. In this way, since the prescribed number of times is one fixed number set in advance, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are periodically signal-output each time the information game of the fixed number of times is executed.

[Appendix A11]
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the prescribed number of times is a number of times selected from a plurality of preset fixed numbers of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A11, the specified number of times is the number of times selected from a plurality of preset fixed times. In this way, since the prescribed number of times is the number of times selected from a plurality of predetermined fixed numbers, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are signal-outputted at irregular intervals.

[Appendix A12]
The first condition is when the information game is executed a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1 to appendix A11, characterized in that the signal output means (41) collectively outputs the plurality of the information game information as a signal before the information game is executed for the specified number of times when a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is established.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A12, when a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output before the information game is executed a specified number of times. In this way, when a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal before the information game is executed for a specified number of times, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem caused by not outputting a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information).

[Appendix A13]
The gaming machine according to appendix A12, wherein the third condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, the third condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state. In this way, the third condition is that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state, and a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are signal-output in the information game for notifying that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state even before the information game is executed for the prescribed number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of information game information such as information game end information from being signal-output in the information game executed after the end of the special game. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the number of informing games on the data display after the end of the special game from becoming different from the actual number of informing.

[Appendix A14]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A12 or appendix A13, wherein the third condition is that there is no reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, the third condition is that there is no reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means. In this way, since the third condition is that the right to execute the information game is not reserved by the reservation means, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the number of information games on the data display device is not updated to the actual number of information even though the information game is obviously finished.

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A14, characterized by comprising means for executing a continuous performance for the plurality of the information game information corresponding to the plurality of the information game information when the plurality of the information game information are collectively output as a signal.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A15, when a plurality of pieces of information game information are collectively output as a signal, continuous effects are executed for the plurality of pieces of information game information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information game information. Thus, when a plurality of pieces of information game information are collectively output as a signal, continuous performance is executed for a plurality of pieces of information game information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information game information, so that a plurality of pieces of information game can be disguised as one piece of information game. As a result, even when the result of the transition determination clearly indicates that the failure performance is not to be shifted to a special game state, the number of apparent failure performances can be reduced, and the frustration and discomfort of the player caused by the repetition of the failure performance can be reduced, so that the decrease in interest and interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix A16]
The gaming machine according to appendix A15, wherein the continuous effects are effects that are related to each other.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A16, the continuous effects are effects that are related to each other. In this way, since the continuous effects are mutually related effects, it becomes easier for the player to perceive a plurality of times of the information game as one time of the information game. As a result, even when the result of transition determination clearly indicates that the failure performance is not to be shifted to a special game state, the number of apparent failure performances can be reduced, so that the frustration and discomfort of the player caused by the repetition of the failure performance can be reduced, and the decrease in interest and amusement in the game is further suppressed.

[Appendix A17]
The game machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A16, characterized in that the effects executed by the effect means (341) in each of the plurality of information games corresponding to the information game information collectively output as a signal via the output terminal are continuous effects having mutual relevance.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17, the effects executed by the effect means in each of the plurality of information games corresponding to the information game information collectively output as a signal through the output terminal are continuous effects having relevance to each other. In this way, the performance executed by the performance means in each of the plurality of information games corresponding to the information game information collectively output as a signal through the output terminal is a continuous performance having mutual relevance, so that a plurality of times of the information game can be disguised as one time of the information game. As a result, even when the result of the transition determination clearly indicates that the failure performance is not to be shifted to a special game state, the number of apparent failure performances can be reduced, and the frustration and discomfort of the player caused by the repetition of the failure performance can be reduced, so that the decrease in interest and interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix A18]
The game machine according to appendix A17, wherein the continuous performance includes a performance corresponding to the start executed in the first information game of the continuous performance and a performance corresponding to the end executed in the last information game of the continuous performance.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A18, the continuous performance includes the performance corresponding to the start executed in the first information game of the continuous performance and the performance corresponding to the end executed in the last information game of the continuous performance. In this way, the continuous performance is executed in the information game for which the specified number of times is set, and includes the performance corresponding to the start executed in the first information game of the continuous performance and the performance corresponding to the end executed in the last information game of the continuous performance, so that the start of the continuous performance and the end of the continuous performance can be easily grasped. Therefore, it is possible to make a plurality of information games appear as one information game by continuous performance for a plurality of information games.

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine according to appendix A18, wherein the continuous effect includes an effect corresponding to the continuation executed in the information game between the information game in which the effect corresponding to the start is executed and the information game in which the effect corresponding to the end is executed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A19, the continuous performance includes performance corresponding to continuation executed in the information game between the information game in which the performance corresponding to the start is executed and the information game in which the performance corresponding to the end is executed. In this way, the continuous performance includes the performance corresponding to the continuation executed in the information game between the information game in which the performance corresponding to the start is executed and the performance corresponding to the end is executed, so that the continuous performance is executed in a series of the performance corresponding to the start, the performance corresponding to the continuation and the performance corresponding to the end. Thus, the continuous performance including the performance corresponding to the start, the performance corresponding to the continuation, and the performance corresponding to the end facilitates recognition of a plurality of times of the information game as one time of the information game.

[Appendix A20]
The gaming machine according to appendix A18 or appendix A19, wherein the effect corresponding to the end is executed in the information game in which a prescribed condition is established.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A20, the effect corresponding to the end is executed in the information game in which the specified conditions are established. In this way, the performance corresponding to the end is executed in the information game in which the specified condition is established, so that the continuous performance can be terminated without a sense of incongruity in a situation in which continuous performance is difficult to continue, for example, in the information game in which the continuity of the information game is interrupted or in the information game in which a plurality of pieces of game information are collectively output as a signal.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to appendix A20, wherein the specified condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21, the prescribed condition is that the information game is executed a prescribed number of times. In this way, since the prescribed condition is that the prescribed number of information games are executed, when the prescribed number of information games are executed, in the information game in which a plurality of pieces of game information are collectively output as a signal, it is possible to end the continuous performance without a sense of incongruity.

[Appendix A22]
The signal output means (41) is
Means for collectively outputting a plurality of the information game information via the output terminal based on the end of the information game when the first condition is satisfied;
Means for outputting one signal of the information game information triggered by the end of the information game when a second condition different from the first condition is established. The gaming machine according to any one of additions A1 to A21.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal based on the end of the information game when the first condition is satisfied, and one information game information is output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied. Even in this case, it is possible to set a plurality of pieces of information game information at the end of the information game or the start of the next information game. Thereby, it becomes possible to collectively output a plurality of pieces of information game information at intervals of the information game.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to appendices A1 to A22, wherein the signal output means (41) comprises means for outputting a signal of the notification game information via the output terminal when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state.

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the information game information includes information game end information indicating that the information game ends.

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to appendix A23 or appendix A24, wherein the signal output means (41) outputs a plurality of the information game information signals via the output terminal when the game state is shifted to the second game state when there is a plurality of information game information not yet output in the first game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendices A23 to A25, when a first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one piece of information game information is output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means via the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is signal-outputted from the main control means via the output terminal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big hit on the data display is updated each time an information game is executed in the same manner as in the conventional art. On the other hand, the number of information games on the data display is not updated each time one information game is executed when the first condition is established. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and to execute various performances (for example, read-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of times of the information game.

Further, in the gaming machines according to notes A23 to A25, the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started (executed). Thus, since the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started, the timing at which a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal can be adjusted by setting the predetermined information game. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal at various timings, so that the timing at which a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal is diversified.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to notes A23 to A25, the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started, and the information game information is collectively signal-output when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state. That is, when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state, the information game information is output as a signal even if the condition (first condition or second condition) for signal output of the information game information is not established. In this way, when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state, the signal output of the information game information is performed even when the condition for signal output of the information game information is not satisfied, and the information game information in the first game state is signal-outputted before the end of the first game state, so that the information game information of the first game state is prevented from being signal-outputted in the second game state. As a result, when the game state is shifted, the notification game information in the game state before the transition is prevented from being output as a signal in the game state after the transition.

[Appendix A26]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
In the first gaming state, the probability that the predetermined condition is established is the second probability (high-frequency support mode);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A23 to A25, wherein, in the second game state, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first probability (low-frequency support mode).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A26, when the first game state in which the probability of meeting the predetermined condition is the second probability (high-frequency support mode) is shifted to the second game state in which the probability of meeting the predetermined condition is the first probability (low-frequency support mode), the information game information is output as a signal. In other words, in the case of shifting from the first game state in which the entry of the game ball into the start hole is easily permitted to the second game state in which the entry of the game ball into the start hole is easily permitted, the information game information is signal-outputted even when the condition for the signal output of the information game information is not satisfied, and the information game information in the first game state is signal-outputted by the end of the first game state. This prevents the signal output of the information game information in the first game state in the second game state, and prevents the signal output of the information game information in the high frequency support mode in the low frequency support when the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode.

[Appendix A27]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first gaming state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A23 to A25, wherein in the second game state, the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A27, when the first game state in which the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) is shifted to the second game state in which the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low probability mode), the information game information is output as a signal. In other words, in the case of shifting from a first game state in which the transition to the special game state is likely to occur to a second game state in which the transition to the special game state is difficult, the information game information is signal-outputted even when the conditions for outputting the signal of the information game information are not established, so that the information game information in the first game state is signal-outputted by the end of the first game state. This prevents the signal output of the information game information in the first game state in the second game state, and prevents the signal output of the information game information in the high probability mode in the low probability mode when shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

[Appendix A28]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
In the second game state, the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A28, the first game state (probable variable game state) in which the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high-frequency support mode). When the transition is shifted to the second game state (time-saving game state) in which the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high-frequency support mode), the information game information is signal-output. That is, in the case of shifting from the first game state (probability variable gaming state) in which it is easy to allow the entry of the game ball into the starting port and is easy to shift to the special game state, to the second game state (time saving game state) in which it is difficult to shift to the special game state in which the entry of the game ball into the starting port is easily permitted, the information game information is output as a signal even if the condition for signal output of the information game information is not satisfied, so that the information game information in the first game state is the first game. A signal is output by the end of the skill state. This prevents the signal output of the information game information in the first game state in the second game state, and prevents the signal output of the information game information in the probability variable game state in the time reduction game state when shifting from the probability variable game state to the time reduction game state.

[Appendix A29]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A23 to A25, wherein the second game state is characterized in that the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first probability (low-frequency support mode).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A29, the first game state (probable variable game state) in which the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode). When the transition is shifted to the second game state (normal game state) in which the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first probability (low frequency support mode), the information game information is signal-output. That is, the first game state (probability variable game state) in which the entry of the game ball into the starting port is easily permitted and the transition to the special game state is easily performed. In the case of shifting to the second game state (normal game state) in which the entry of the game ball into the starting port is difficult to be permitted and the transition to the special game state is difficult, the information game information is output as a signal even if the condition for signal output of the information game information is not satisfied, so that the information game information in the first game state is the first game. A signal is output by the end of the skill state. This prevents the signal output of the information game information in the first game state in the second game state, and prevents the signal output of the information game information in the variable probability game state in the time reduction game state when shifting from the variable probability game state to the normal game state.

[Appendix A30]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A23 to A25, wherein the second game state is characterized in that the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first probability (low-frequency support mode).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A30, the first game state (time-saving game state) in which the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (low probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high-frequency support mode). When the transition is shifted to the second game state (normal game state) in which the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first probability (low-frequency support mode), the information game information is signal-output. That is, in the case of shifting from a first game state in which entry of a game ball into a starting port is easily permitted and transition to a special game state is likely to be made to a second game state in which entry of a game ball into a starting port is difficult to be permitted and transition to a special game state is difficult, information game information is signal-outputted even when conditions for signal output of information game information are not satisfied, and information game information in the first game state is output as a signal by the end of the first game state. This prevents the signal output of the information game information in the first game state in the second game state, and prevents the signal output of the information game information in the variable probability game state in the time reduction game state when shifting from the time reduction game state to the normal game state.

[Appendix A31]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
In the first gaming state, the probability that the predetermined condition is established is the second probability (high-frequency support mode);
The gaming machine according to appendices A23 to A25, wherein the second game state is the special game state.

[Appendix A32]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first gaming state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode),
The gaming machine according to appendices A23 to A25, wherein the second game state is the special game state.

[Appendix A33]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to appendices A23 to A25, wherein the second game state is the special game state.

[Appendix A34]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to appendices A23 to A25, wherein the second game state is the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to any one of appendices A31 to A34, information game information is output as a signal when transitioning from a first game state (a game state in which a transition determination is made and an information game for notifying the result thereof is executed) capable of transitioning to a special game state to a special game state as a second game state. That is, when the special game is executed after the execution of the information game, the information game information in the first game state is signal-outputted by the end of the first game state by signal-outputting the information game information even when the condition for signal output of the information game information is not satisfied when the game state in which the information game is performed is shifted to the special game state. As a result, the information game information in the first game state is prevented from being signal-output in the second game state, when the special game is executed after the information game is executed, when the game state in which the information game is executed is shifted to the special game state, or when the special game is executed after the information game is executed, the information game information in the game state in which the information game is executed is prevented from being signal-output in the special game state.

[Appendix B1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (fluctuation game) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition judgment;
Signal output means (41) for outputting information game information (symbol determination signal) related to the information game output by the main control means (41) via an output terminal (101);
Effect determination means (51) for determining the effect to be executed by the effect means (341) in the information game;
with
The signal output means (41) is
When the first condition is established, a plurality of the information game information are collectively output as a signal through the output terminal,
When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, outputting one signal of the information game information,
A gaming machine characterized in that said effect determination means (51) determines one said effect corresponding to a plurality of said information game information collectively output as a signal.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the information game information includes information game end information indicating that the information game ends.

In the gaming machines according to appendices B1 and B2, when a first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal from the main control means through the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one piece of information game information is signal-outputted from the main control means through the output terminal. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means through the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is signal-outputted from the main control means through the output terminal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big win on the data display is updated each time an information game is executed in the same manner as in the conventional art. On the other hand, the information game count on the data display is not updated each time one information game is executed when the first condition is established. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game caused by the fact that the break between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and it is possible to execute various performances (for example, look-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for the information game for a plurality of times.

[Appendix B3]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix B1 or appendix B2, wherein the first condition is that the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B3, the first condition is that the right to execute the information game is reserved. Here, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, the reserved information game can be executed after the end of the information game, so that after the end of the information game related to the reservation, information game information such as information game end information for two information games including at least the information game can be collectively output as a signal. Thus, by setting the first condition that the right to execute the information game is reserved, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games can be reliably collectively output as a signal.

[Appendix B4]
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the first condition is that the reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means (41) includes a transition to the special game state (jackpot game state) as a result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4, the first condition is that the reservation of the right to execute the information game includes the result of the shift determination to shift to the special game state. In this way, the first condition includes the reservation of the right to execute the information game and the transition determination result to shift to the special game state, so that when the reservation of the transition determination result to shift to the special game state is executed as the information game, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games can be output as a signal at the end of the information game. In addition, when the suspension, which is the result of the transition determination to shift to the special game state, is executed as the information game, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for the plurality of information games is output as a signal at the end of the information game, so that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state. Signal output of information game information (for example, information game end information) for the technique is prevented. Thus, for example, the number of informal games after the special game is prevented from being different from the actual number of informal games, and the number of informal games after the special game displayed on the data display device, for example, is prevented from being different from the number of informal games after the actual jackpot game.

[Appendix B5]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B4, wherein the probability that the predetermined condition is established in the first condition is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B5, the first condition is that the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the game ball to enter the starting hole is met is a second probability higher than the first probability. Here, when the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is satisfied is the second probability, the game ball is likely to enter the winning opening, and the information game is likely to be executed continuously. Therefore, since the right to execute the information game is likely to be reserved because the first condition is the second probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting hole is established, it is easy to collectively output a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games.

[Appendix B6]
Further comprising a game time determination means (41) for determining the game time of the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B5, wherein the first condition is that the playing times for a plurality of the information games are collectively determined by the playing time determining means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B6, the first condition is that the game times for a plurality of information games are collectively determined. Thus, since the first condition is that the game times for a plurality of information games are collectively determined, the number of information game information (for example, information game end information) collectively output as a signal can be set equal to or less than the number of a plurality of information games for which the variable display times are collectively set. As a result, it is possible to reliably output the information game information such as the information game end information together as a signal.

[Appendix C1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (fluctuation game) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition judgment;
Signal output means (41) for outputting information game information (symbol determination signal) related to the information game output by the main control means (41) via an output terminal (101);
with
The signal output means (41) is
When the first condition is established, a plurality of the information game information are collectively output as a signal through the output terminal,
When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, outputting one signal of the information game information,
The gaming machine, wherein the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when a first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one piece of information game information is output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means via the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is signal-outputted from the main control means via the output terminal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big hit on the data display is updated each time an information game is executed in the same manner as in the conventional art. On the other hand, the number of information games on the data display is not updated each time one information game is executed when the first condition is established. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and to execute various performances (for example, read-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of times of the information game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started (executed). Thus, since the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started, the timing at which a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal can be adjusted by setting the predetermined information game. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal at various timings, so that the timing at which a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal is diversified.

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the first condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, the first condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, since the first condition is that the information game is executed for a predetermined specified number of times, the number of information games (timing) at which a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal can be adjusted by the set number of the specified number of times. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal at various timings, so that the timing at which a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal is diversified.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the specified number of times is a preset fixed number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C3, the specified number of times is one fixed number of times set in advance. In this way, since the prescribed number of times is one fixed number set in advance, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are periodically signal-output each time the information game of the fixed number of times is executed.

[Appendix C4]
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the specified number of times is a number of times selected from a plurality of preset fixed numbers.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, the specified number of times is the number of times selected from a plurality of preset fixed times. In this way, since the specified number of times is the number of times selected from a plurality of preset fixed numbers, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are signal-outputted at irregular intervals.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C2 to C4, wherein the signal output means (41) collectively outputs the plurality of the information game information before the information game is executed for the prescribed number of times when a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5, when a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output before the information game is executed a specified number of times. In this way, when a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal before the information game is executed for a specified number of times, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem caused by not outputting a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information).

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to appendix C5, wherein the third condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C6, the third condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state. In this way, the third condition is that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state, and a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are signal-output in the information game for notifying that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state even before the information game is executed for the prescribed number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of information game information such as information game end information from being signal-output in the information game executed after the end of the special game. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the number of informing games on the data display after the end of the special game from becoming different from the actual number of informing.

[Appendix C7]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix C5 or appendix C6, wherein the third condition is that there is no reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7, the third condition is that there is no reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means. In this way, since the third condition is that the right to execute the information game is not reserved by the reservation means, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the number of information games on the data display device is not updated to the actual number of information even though the information game is obviously finished.

[Appendix C8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C7, wherein the information game information includes information game end information indicating that the information game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C8, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal when the first condition is established, and one information game information signal is output when a second condition different from the first condition is established. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is output as a signal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big hit on the data display device is updated each time one information game is executed in the same manner as before, while one information game is performed when the first condition is established. is executed, the number of information games on the data display is not updated. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and to execute various performances (for example, read-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of times of the information game.

[Appendix C9]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C8, wherein the probability that the predetermined condition is established in the first condition is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C9, the first condition is that the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the game ball to enter the starting hole is met is a second probability higher than the first probability. Here, when the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is established is the second probability, the game ball is likely to enter the winning opening, and the information game is likely to be executed continuously. Therefore, since the right to execute the information game is likely to be reserved because the first condition is the second probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting hole is established, it is easy to collectively output a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games.

[Appendix D1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (fluctuation game) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition judgment;
Signal output means (41) for outputting information game information (symbol determination signal) related to the information game output by the main control means (41) via an output terminal (101);
with
The signal output means (41) is
When the first condition is established, a plurality of the information game information are collectively output as a signal through the output terminal,
When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, outputting one signal of the information game information,
The first condition is when the information game is executed a predetermined number of times,
Said signal output means (41), when a third condition different from said first condition and said second condition is established, before said prescribed number of times said information game is executed, said plurality of said information game information are collectively output as a signal.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, when a first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means through the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one piece of information game information is signal-output from the main control means through the output terminal. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means via the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is signal-outputted from the main control means via the output terminal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big hit on the data display is updated each time an information game is executed in the same manner as in the conventional art. On the other hand, the number of information games on the data display is not updated each time one information game is executed when the first condition is established. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and to execute various performances (for example, read-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of times of the information game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the first condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, since the first condition is that the information game is executed for a predetermined specified number of times, the number of information games (timing) at which a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal can be adjusted by the set number of the specified number of times. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal at various timings, so that the timing at which a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal is diversified.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix D1, when a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output before the information game is executed a specified number of times. In this way, when a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal before the information game is executed for a specified number of times, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem caused by not outputting a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information).

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein the third condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, the third condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state. In this way, the third condition is that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state, and a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are signal-output in the information game for notifying that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state even before the information game is executed for the prescribed number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of information game information such as information game end information from being signal-output in the information game executed after the end of the special game. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the number of informing games on the data display after the end of the special game from becoming different from the actual number of informing.

[Appendix D3]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix D1 or appendix D2, wherein the third condition is that there is no reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D3, the third condition is that there is no reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means. In this way, since the third condition is that the right to execute the information game is not reserved by the reservation means, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the number of information games on the data display device is not updated to the actual number of information even though the information game is obviously finished.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3, wherein the information game information includes information game end information indicating that the information game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output when the first condition is established, and one information game information signal is output when the second condition different from the first condition is established. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is output as a signal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big hit on the data display device is updated each time one information game is executed in the same manner as before, while one information game is performed when the first condition is established. is executed, the number of information games on the data display is not updated. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and to execute various performances (for example, read-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of times of the information game.

[Appendix D5]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, wherein the probability that the predetermined condition is established in the first condition is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, the first condition is that the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the game ball to enter the starting hole is met is a second probability higher than the first probability. Here, when the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is established is the second probability, the game ball is likely to enter the winning opening, and the information game is likely to be executed continuously. Therefore, since the right to execute the information game is likely to be reserved because the first condition is the second probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting hole is established, it is easy to collectively output a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games.

[Appendix E1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (fluctuation game) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition judgment;
Signal output means (41) for outputting information game information (symbol determination signal) related to the information game output by the main control means (41) via an output terminal (101);
with
The signal output means (41) is
When the first condition is established, a plurality of the information game information are collectively output as a signal through the output terminal,
When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, outputting one signal of the information game information,
The first condition is that the predetermined information game is started,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a continuous performance for the plurality of the information game information corresponding to the plurality of the information game information when a plurality of the information game information are collectively output as a signal.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, when a first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal from the main control means through the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one piece of information game information is signal-output from the main control means through the output terminal. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means via the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is signal-outputted from the main control means via the output terminal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big hit on the data display is updated each time an information game is executed in the same manner as in the conventional art. On the other hand, the number of information games on the data display is not updated each time one information game is executed when the first condition is established. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and to execute various performances (for example, read-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of times of the information game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the first condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, since the first condition is that the information game is executed for a predetermined specified number of times, the number of information games (timing) at which a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal can be adjusted by the set number of the specified number of times. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal at various timings, so that the timing at which a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal is diversified.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix E1, when a plurality of pieces of information game information are collectively output as a signal, continuous effects are executed for the plurality of pieces of information game information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information game information. Thus, when a plurality of pieces of information game information are collectively output as a signal, continuous performance is executed for the plurality of pieces of information game information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information game information, so that a plurality of pieces of information game can be disguised as one piece of information game. As a result, even if the result of transition determination clearly indicates that the failure performance is not to be shifted to a special game state, the number of apparent failure performances can be reduced, and the frustration and displeasure of the player caused by the repetition of the failure performance can be reduced, thereby suppressing the decline in interest and amusement in the game.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the continuous effects are mutually related effects.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, the continuous effects are effects that are related to each other. In this way, since the continuous effects are mutually related effects, it becomes easier for the player to perceive a plurality of times of the information game as one time of the information game. As a result, even when the result of the transition determination clearly indicates that the failure performance is not to be shifted to a special game state, the number of apparent failure performances can be reduced, so that the frustration and discomfort of the player caused by the repetition of the failure performance can be reduced, and the decrease in interest and interest in the game is further suppressed.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or appendix E2, wherein the continuous effect includes an effect corresponding to the start executed in the first information game of the continuous effect and an effect corresponding to the end executed in the last information game of the continuous effect.

In the game machine according to appendix E3, the continuous performance includes a performance corresponding to the start executed in the first information game of the continuous performance and a performance corresponding to the end executed in the last information game of the continuous performance. In this way, the continuous performance is executed in the information game for which the prescribed number of times is set, and includes the performance corresponding to the start executed in the first information game of the continuous performance and the performance corresponding to the end executed in the last information game of the continuous performance, so that the start of the continuous performance and the end of the continuous performance can be easily grasped. Therefore, it is possible to make a plurality of information games appear as one information game by continuous performance for a plurality of information games.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to appendix E3, wherein the continuous effect includes an effect corresponding to continuation executed in the information game between the information game in which the effect corresponding to the start is executed and the information game in which the effect corresponding to the end is executed.

In the game machine according to appendix E4, the continuous performance includes performance corresponding to continuation executed in the information game between the information game in which the performance corresponding to the start is executed and the information game in which the performance corresponding to the end is executed. In this way, the continuous performance includes the performance corresponding to the continuation executed in the information game between the information game in which the performance corresponding to the start is executed and the performance corresponding to the end is executed, so that the continuous performance is executed in a series of the performance corresponding to the start, the performance corresponding to the continuation and the performance corresponding to the end. Thus, the continuous performance including the performance corresponding to the start, the performance corresponding to the continuation, and the performance corresponding to the end facilitates recognition of a plurality of times of the information game as one time of the information game.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to appendix E3 or appendix E4, wherein the effect corresponding to the end is executed in the information game in which a prescribed condition is established.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5, the effect corresponding to the end is executed in the information game in which the prescribed conditions are satisfied. In this way, the performance corresponding to the end is executed in the information game in which the specified condition is established, so that the continuous performance can be terminated without a sense of incompatibility in a situation in which continuous performance is difficult to continue, for example, in the information game in which the continuity of the information game is interrupted or in the information game in which a plurality of pieces of game information are collectively output as a signal.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to appendix E5, wherein the specified condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6, the prescribed condition is that the information game is executed a prescribed number of times. In this way, since the prescribed condition is that the prescribed number of information games are executed, when the prescribed number of information games are executed, in the information game in which a plurality of pieces of game information are collectively output as a signal, it is possible to end the continuous performance without a sense of incongruity.

[Appendix E7]
The gaming machine according to appendix E5 or appendix E6, wherein the prescribed condition is that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7, the stipulated condition is that the result of transition determination causes the transition to the special game state. In this way, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are output as a signal in the information game for notifying that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state even before the information game is executed for the specified number of times, because the specified condition is that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. This prevents a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) from being signal-output in the information game executed after the end of the special game. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the number of informing games on the data display after the end of the special game from becoming different from the actual number of informing.

[Appendix E8]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E5 to E7, wherein the prescribed condition is that there is no reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8, the prescribed condition is that there is no reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means. In this way, since the prescribed condition is that there is no reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the number of information games on the data display is not updated to the actual number of information even though the information game is obviously finished.

[Appendix E9]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E8, wherein the first condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, the first condition is that the information game is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, since the first condition is that the information game is executed for a predetermined specified number of times, the number of information games (timing) at which a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal can be adjusted by the set number of the specified number of times. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal at various timings, so that the timing at which a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal is diversified.

[Appendix E10]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E9, wherein the specified number of times is a preset fixed number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E10, the prescribed number of times is one fixed number of times set in advance. In this way, since the prescribed number of times is one fixed number set in advance, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are periodically signal-output each time the information game of the fixed number of times is executed.

[Appendix E11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E10, wherein the specified number of times is a number selected from a plurality of preset fixed numbers.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E11, the specified number of times is the number of times selected from a plurality of preset fixed times. In this way, since the prescribed number of times is the number of times selected from a plurality of predetermined fixed numbers, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are signal-outputted at irregular intervals.

[Appendix E12]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E11, wherein the first condition is that the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E12, the first condition is that the right to execute the information game is reserved. Here, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, the reserved information game can be executed after the end of the information game, so that a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal after the end of the information game related to the reservation for at least two information games including the information game. Thus, by setting the first condition that the right to execute the information game is reserved, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be surely collectively output as a signal.

[Appendix E13]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E12, wherein the information game information includes information game end information indicating that the information game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E13, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal when the first condition is established, and one information game information signal is output when a second condition different from the first condition is established. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is output as a signal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big hit on the data display device is updated each time one information game is executed in the same manner as before, while one information game is performed when the first condition is established. is executed, the number of information games on the data display is not updated. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game caused by the fact that the gap between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and to execute various performances (for example, read-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for a plurality of times of the information game.

[Appendix E14]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E13, wherein the first condition is characterized in that the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E14, the predetermined condition is that the probability that the predetermined condition that the game ball is allowed to enter the start hole is established is a second probability higher than the first probability. Here, when the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is established is the second probability, the game ball is likely to enter the winning opening, and the information game is likely to be executed continuously. Therefore, since the right to execute the information game is likely to be reserved because the first condition is the second probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting hole is established, it is easy to collectively output a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games.

[Appendix F1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (fluctuation game) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition judgment;
Signal output means (41) for outputting information game information (symbol determination signal) related to the information game output by the main control means (41) via an output terminal (101);
with
The signal output means (41) is
Means for collectively outputting a plurality of the information game information via the output terminal based on the end of the information game when the first condition is satisfied;
and means for outputting one signal of the information game information when the information game ends when a second condition different from the first condition is established.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the information game information includes information game end information indicating that the information game ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1 and appendix F2, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means via the output terminal based on the end of the information game when the first condition is satisfied, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, one information game information is signal-outputted from the main control means via the output terminal when the information game is finished. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means through the output terminal based on the end of the information game, and when the second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is output as a signal from the main control means through the output terminal when the second condition different from the first condition is established. While the number of information games from the previous big win on the data display is updated every time the game is played, the number of information games on the data display is not updated each time one information game is executed when the first condition is established. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game caused by the fact that the break between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and it is possible to execute various performances (for example, look-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for the information game for a plurality of times.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1 and appendix F2, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means via the output terminal based on the end of the information game when the first condition is satisfied, and one information game information is output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to set a plurality of pieces of information game information at the end of the information game or at the start of the next information game regardless of which of the conditions is satisfied. Thereby, it becomes possible to collectively output a plurality of pieces of information game information at intervals of the information game.

[Appendix F3]
Further comprising a reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the information game,
The gaming machine according to appendix F1 or appendix F2, wherein the first condition is that the right to execute the information game is reserved by the reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F3, the first condition is that the right to execute the information game is reserved. Here, when the right to execute the information game is reserved, the reserved information game can be executed after the end of the information game, so that after the end of the information game related to the reservation, information game information such as information game end information for two information games including at least the information game can be collectively output as a signal. Thus, by setting the first condition that the right to execute the information game is reserved, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games can be reliably collectively output as a signal.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine according to appendix F3, wherein the first condition is that the reservation of the right to execute the information game by the reservation means (41) includes a transition to the special game state (jackpot game state) as a result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, the first condition is that the reservation of the right to execute the information game includes the result of the shift determination to shift to the special game state. In this way, the first condition includes the reservation of the right to execute the information game and the transition determination result to shift to the special game state, so that when the reservation of the transition determination result to shift to the special game state is executed as the information game, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games can be output as a signal at the end of the information game. In addition, when the suspension, which is the result of the transition determination to shift to the special game state, is executed as the information game, a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for the plurality of information games is output as a signal at the end of the information game, so that the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state. Signal output of information game information (for example, information game end information) for the technique is prevented. Thus, for example, the number of informal games after the special game is prevented from being different from the actual number of informal games, and the number of informal games after the special game displayed on the data display device, for example, is prevented from being different from the number of informal games after the actual jackpot game.

[Appendix F5]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
A switching means (41) for switching the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing a game ball to enter the starting port (315) is established between a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability;
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F4, wherein the probability that the predetermined condition is established in the first condition is the second probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, the first condition is that the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the game ball to enter the starting hole is met is a second probability higher than the first probability. Here, when the probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is established is the second probability, the game ball is likely to enter the winning opening, and the information game is likely to be executed continuously. Therefore, since the right to execute the information game is likely to be reserved because the first condition is the second probability that the predetermined condition for allowing the entry of the game ball into the starting hole is established, it is easy to collectively output a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) for a plurality of information games.

[Appendix F6]
Further comprising a game time determination means (41) for determining the game time of the information game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F5, wherein the first condition is that the game times for a plurality of the information games are collectively determined by the game time determining means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, the first condition is that the game times for a plurality of information games are collectively determined. Thus, since the first condition is that the game times for a plurality of information games are collectively determined, the number of information game information (for example, information game end information) collectively output as a signal can be set equal to or less than the number of a plurality of information games for which the variable display times are collectively set. As a result, it is possible to reliably output the information game information such as the information game end information together as a signal.

[Appendix G1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of an information game (fluctuation game) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of a judgment condition (jackpot lottery), and notifying the result of the transition judgment;
Signal output means (41) for outputting information game information (symbol determination signal) related to the information game output by the main control means (41) via an output terminal (101);
with
The signal output means (41) is
means for collectively outputting a plurality of the information game information via the output terminal when a first condition is satisfied;
means for outputting one signal of the information game information when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied;
A game machine characterized in that the signal output means (41) comprises means for outputting a signal of the informing game information through the output terminal when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the information game information includes information game end information indicating that the information game ends.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1 or appendix G2, characterized in that the signal output means (41) signals a plurality of the information game information via the output terminal when shifting to the second game state when there is a plurality of information game information not yet output in the first game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendices G1 to G3, when a first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one piece of information game information is output as a signal from the main control means via the output terminal. In this way, when the first condition is established, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output from the main control means through the output terminal, and when a second condition different from the first condition is established, one information game information is signal-outputted from the main control means through the output terminal, for example, when the second condition is established, the number of information games from the previous big win on the data display is updated each time an information game is executed in the same manner as in the conventional art. On the other hand, the information game count on the data display is not updated each time one information game is executed when the first condition is established. Therefore, when one information game is executed, the current number of information games displayed on the data display may or may not be updated depending on the condition to be established. This makes it possible to cause a mismatch between the current number of information games on the data display and the actual number of information games. As a result, when the information game is continuously executed, it becomes difficult to grasp the breaks between the information games from the data display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game caused by the fact that the break between the information games is grasped from the data display device, and it is possible to execute various performances (for example, look-ahead performance, crossing performance, continuous performance) for the information game for a plurality of times.

Further, in the gaming machines according to notes G1 to G3, the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started (executed). In this way, since the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started, the timing at which a plurality of information game information (for example, information game end information) is collectively output as a signal can be adjusted by setting the predetermined information game. As a result, a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) can be collectively output as a signal at various timings, so that the timing at which a plurality of pieces of information game information (for example, information game end information) are collectively output as a signal is diversified.

Furthermore, in the gaming machines according to notes G1 to G3, the first condition is that a predetermined information game is started, and when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state, the information game information is collectively output as a signal. That is, when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state, the information game information is output as a signal even if the condition (first condition or second condition) for signal output of the information game information is not satisfied. In this way, when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state, the signal output of the information game information is performed even when the condition for signal output of the information game information is not satisfied, and the information game information in the first game state is signal-outputted before the end of the first game state, so that the information game information of the first game state is prevented from being signal-outputted in the second game state. As a result, when the game state is shifted, the notification game information in the game state before the transition is prevented from being output as a signal in the game state after the transition.

[Appendix G4]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
In the first gaming state, the probability that the predetermined condition is established is the second probability (high-frequency support mode);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, wherein, in the second game state, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first probability (low-frequency support mode).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G4, when the first game state in which the probability of meeting the predetermined condition is the second probability (high-frequency support mode) is shifted to the second game state in which the probability of meeting the predetermined condition is the first probability (low-frequency support mode), the information game information is output as a signal. In other words, in the case of shifting from the first game state in which the entry of the game ball into the start hole is easily permitted to the second game state in which the entry of the game ball into the start hole is easily permitted, the information game information is signal-outputted even when the condition for the signal output of the information game information is not satisfied, and the information game information in the first game state is signal-outputted by the end of the first game state. This prevents the information game information in the first game state from being signal-output in the second game state, and prevents the information game information in the high-frequency support mode from being signal-output in the low-frequency support mode when shifting from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

[Appendix G5]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first gaming state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G4, wherein in the second game state, the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G5, when the first game state in which the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) is shifted to the second game state in which the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low probability mode), the information game information is output as a signal. In other words, in the case of shifting from a first game state in which the transition to the special game state is likely to occur to a second game state in which the transition to the special game state is difficult, the information game information is signal-outputted even when the conditions for outputting the signal of the information game information are not established, so that the information game information in the first game state is signal-outputted by the end of the first game state. This prevents the signal output of the information game information in the first game state in the second game state, and prevents the signal output of the information game information in the high probability mode in the low probability mode when shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

[Appendix G6]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments G1 to G3, wherein the second gaming state is characterized in that the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high-frequency support mode).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G6, the first game state (probable variable game state) in which the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high-frequency support mode). When the transition is shifted to the second game state (time-saving game state) in which the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high-frequency support mode), the information game information is signal-output. That is, in the case of shifting from the first game state (probability variable gaming state) in which the entry of the game ball to the starting hole is easily permitted and is easily shifted to the special game state, the information game information in the first game state is the first game by outputting the information game information even when the condition for signal output of the information game information is not established in the case of shifting to the second game state (time saving game state) in which it is difficult to shift to the special game state in which the entry of the game ball to the start opening is easily permitted. A signal is output by the end of the skill state. This prevents the signal output of the information game information in the first game state in the second game state, and prevents the signal output of the information game information in the probability variable game state in the time reduction game state when shifting from the probability variable game state to the time reduction game state.

[Appendix G7]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments G1 to G3, wherein the second gaming state is characterized in that the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first probability (low-frequency support mode).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G7, the information game information is output as a signal from the first game state (probable variable game state) in which the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode). That is, the first game state (probability variable game state) in which the entry of the game ball into the starting port is easily permitted and the transition to the special game state is easily shifted to the second game state (normal game state) in which the entry of the game ball into the starting port is difficult to be permitted and the transition to the special game state is difficult. A signal is output by the end of the skill state. This prevents the signal output of the information game information in the first game state in the second game state, and prevents the signal output of the information game information in the variable probability game state in the time reduction game state when shifting from the variable probability game state to the normal game state.

[Appendix G8]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of attachments G1 to G3, wherein the second gaming state is characterized in that the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first probability (low-frequency support mode).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G8, the first game state (time-saving game state) in which the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (low probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high-frequency support mode). When the transition is shifted to the second game state (normal game state) in which the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low-probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first probability (low-frequency support mode), the information game information is signal-output. That is, in the case of shifting from a first game state in which entry of a game ball into a starting port is easily permitted and transition to a special game state is likely to be made to a second game state in which entry of a game ball into a starting port is difficult to be permitted and transition to a special game state is difficult, information game information is signal-outputted even when conditions for signal output of information game information are not satisfied, and information game information in the first game state is output as a signal by the end of the first game state. This prevents the signal output of the information game information in the first game state in the second game state, and prevents the signal output of the information game information in the variable probability game state in the time reduction game state when shifting from the time reduction game state to the normal game state.

[Appendix G9]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
In the first gaming state, the probability that the predetermined condition is established is the second probability (high-frequency support mode);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, wherein the second game state is the special game state.

[Appendix G10]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first gaming state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, wherein the second game state is the special game state.

[Appendix G11]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the second determination probability (high probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, wherein the second game state is the special game state.

[Appendix G12]
A starting port (315) that provides an opportunity for the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) based on the entry of a game ball;
Limiting means (315b) for limiting entry of a game ball to the start port (315) and allowing entry of a game ball to the start port (315) by establishment of a predetermined condition;
with
The probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied includes a first probability (low frequency support mode) and a second probability (high frequency support mode) higher than the first probability,
The special game state is
After the end of the special game, a first special game state that is shifted to a first transition determination state in which the transition determination probability determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a first determination probability (low probability mode);
After the end of the special game, the transition determination probability to be determined to shift to the special game state (jackpot game state) is a second determination probability (high probability mode) higher than the first determination probability A second transition determination state includes a second special game state,
In the first game state, the transition determination probability is the first determination probability (low probability mode) and the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second probability (high frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, wherein the second game state is the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to any one of appendices G9 to G12, information game information is output as a signal when a transition is made from a first game state (a game state in which a shift determination is made and an information game for reporting the result is executed) capable of shifting to a special game state to a special game state as a second game state. That is, when the special game is executed after the execution of the information game, the information game information in the first game state is signal-outputted by the end of the first game state by signal-outputting the information game information even when the condition for signal output of the information game information is not satisfied when the game state in which the information game is performed is shifted to the special game state. Therefore, the notification game information in the first game state is prevented from being output as a signal in the second game state. Thus, when the special game is executed after the execution of the information game, that is, when the game state in which the information game is executed is shifted to the special game state, the information game information in the game state in which the information game is executed is prevented from being signal-output in the special game state.

10: Game Machine 101: External Output Terminal Board 102: Hall Computer 103: Data Display 31: Game Board 316: Variable Winning Port 341: Symbol Display Unit 35: Lamp Display Unit 351: First Individual Lamp Unit 352: Second Individual Lamp Unit 353: Third Individual Lamp Unit 354: Fourth Individual Lamp Unit 355: Fifth Individual Lamp Unit 356: Sixth Individual Lamp Unit 37: Creon Device 373: Special Out Ball mouth 38: Game ball retention section 381: Retention lane 383: Stopper section 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display section A to G: Segment 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
45: Set value display unit 46: Set value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Audio lamp controller 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed, based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
with
The transition determination means is configured to perform the transition determination in one of a plurality of transition determination states with different transition rates for transitioning to the special game state,
storage means for storing each numerical information corresponding to the plurality of transition determination states;
setting means for setting whether to perform the transition determination in the transition determination state using which of the numerical information;
display control means for displaying a display corresponding to one of the transition determination states set by the setting means in the display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display control means is
Numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of numerical information;
means for displaying a plurality of types of specific information displayed using numbers or characters corresponding to specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information in a predetermined period of time from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing at least when a game ball enters a specific area and a specific condition is satisfied;
This game machine is
During the prescribed period, the prescribed information indicating the prescribed numerical information is not displayed in the prescribed area of the display means,
The display order of the plurality of types of specific information to be displayed in the predetermined area of the display means for the specified period is set based on the type of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means ,
counting means for counting based on the number of game balls entering the specific area;
means for performing different numerical display control on the display means according to the counted number;
with
an opening/closing motion game execution means for executing a predetermined opening/closing motion game to a special ball entry means for giving a specific profit when a game ball enters the game ball when opened;
A plurality of stages are set for each predetermined number of the number of game balls entering the specific area,
The display control means is
It is possible to display with a different number of displays for each stage in the plurality of stages,
When a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the opening/closing operation game, a display corresponding to a predetermined stage corresponding to the number of game balls entering the specific area among the plurality of stages is configured to be executed,
an effect display executing means for executing a specific effect display on the display means when the specific condition is established based on execution of a predetermined game by the player;
configured to display the plurality of types of the specific information in the predetermined area of the display means in accordance with a display order set when executing the specific effect display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the plurality of types of specific information displayed during the past prescribed period are configured to be visually recognizable when a prescribed game condition is satisfied based on a prescribed game operation of a player in a prescribed game state.

Images